H im W^ UC-NRLF $B 3Db 75D GIFT OF y'iliter \'i^ym. ~7Uo /9/d NEW LATIN GRAMMAR BY CHARLES E.' BENNETt ; :y. : \ GoLDWiN Smith Professor of Latin in Corx^ll "University Quicquid praedpies, esto breuis, ut ci'to dicta Percipiant animi dociles teneantque fideles : Omne supervacuum plena de pectore manat. — Horace, Ars Poetica. ALLYN AND BACON First edition printed February, 1895. Reprinted April and September, 1895; April, 1896; July, 1897; April, 1898; May and September, 1899; April and November, 1900; October, 1901; March, 1902; April and November, 1903; July, 1904; April, 1905; April and November, 1906. Revised edition printed March, 1908. Reprinted April and October, 1909; May, 1910; March, 191 1 ; March, 191 2; March, 191 3; April, 1 914; March, 1915; March, 1916; March, 1917. Third edition printed June, 19 18. Reprinted November, 1919; September, 1920. COPYRIGHT, 1895; 1908; 1918, BY CHARLES E. BENNETT. Nottoooli ^re2S J. S. Cuahing Co. — Berwick & Smith Co. Norwood, Mass., U.S.A. 14^ PREFACE. uSt The present work is a revision of that published in 1908. No radical alterations have been introduced, although a number of minor changes will be noted. I have added an Introduction on the origin and development of the Latin language, which it is hoped will prove interesting and in- structive to the more ambitious pupil. At the end of the bopk will be found an Index to the Sources of the Illustra- tive Examples cited in the Syntax. C. E. B. Ithaca, New York, May 4, 1918. • PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. The present book is a revision of my Latin Grammar originally pubHshed in 1895. Wherever greater accuracy or precision of statement seemed possible, I have endeavored to secure this. The rules for syllable division have been changed and made to conform to the prevailing practice of the Romans themselves. In the Perfect Subjunctive Active, the endings -Is, -Imiis, -Itis are now marked long. The theory of vowel length before the suffixes -gnus, -gna, -gnum, and also before j, has been discarded. In the Syntax I have recognized a special category of Ablative of Association, and have abandoned the original doctrine as to the force of tenses in the Prohibitive. Apart from the foregoing, only minor and unessential modifications have been introduced. In its main lines the work remains unchanged. Ithaca, New York, October i6, 1907. dKflflQ.'^ FROM THE PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. The object of this book is to present the essential facts of Latin grammar in a direct and simple manner, and within the smallest compass consistent with scholarly standards. While intended primarily for the secondary school, it has not neglected the needs of the college stu- dent, and aims to furnish such grammatical information as is ordinarily required in undergraduate courses. The experience of foreign educators in recent years has tended to restrict the size of school-grammars of Latin, arid has demanded an incorporation of the main principles of the language in compact manuals of 250 pages. Within the past decade, several grammars of this scope have ap- peared abroad which have amply met the most exacting demands. The publication in this country of a grammar of similar plan and scope seems fully justified at the present time, as all recent editions of classic texts summarize in introduc- tions the special idioms of grammar and style peculiar to individual authors. This makes it feasible to dispense with the enumeration of many minutiae of usage which would otherwise demand consideration in a student's grammar. In the chapter on Prosody, I have designedly omitted all special treatment of the lyric metres of Horace and Catullus, as well as of the measures of the comic poets. Our standard editions of these authors all give such thor- ough consideration to versification that repetition in a separate place seems superfluous. Ithaca, New York, December 15, 1894. TABLE OF CONTENTS. Introduction — The Latin Language ix Part I. SOUNDS, ACCENT, QUANTITY, ETC. The Alphabet i Classification of Sounds ... i Sounds of the Letters .... 3 Syllables 4 Quantity 4 Accent 5 Vowel Changes ...... 6 Consonant Changes 7 Peculiarities of Orthography . . 7 Part II. INFLECTIONS CHAPTER \. — Declension. A. Nouns. Gender of Nouns 10 Number . 11 Cases II The Five Declensions .... 12 First Declension 13 Second Declension 14 Third Declension 18 Fourth Declension 28 Fifth Declension 29 Defective Nouns 30 B. Adjectives. Adjectives of the First and Second Declensions 34 Adjectives of the Third Declen- sion 36 Comparison of Adjectives . - . . 40 Formation and Comparison of Adverbs 43 Numerals 45 C. Pronouns. Personal Pronouns . . Reflexive Pronouns . . Possessive Pronouns Demonstrative Pronouns The Intensive Pronoun . The Relative Pronoun . Interrogative Pronouns Indefinite Pronouns . Pronominal Adjectives . 48 49 49 50 51 51 52 52 53 CHAPTER II. — Conjugation. Verb Stems 54 The Four Conjugations .... 55 Conjugation of Sum .... 56 First Conjugation 58 Second Conjugation 62 Third Conjugation 66 Fourth Conjugation 70 Verbs in -id of the Third Conju- gation 74 Deponent Verbs 76 VI TABLE OF CONTENTS. Semi-Deponents 78 Periphrastic Conjugation ... 78 Peculiarities of Conjugation . . 79 Formation of the Verb Stems . 80 PAGE List of the Most Important Verbs with Principal Parts . . . S^ Irregular Verbs 95 Defective Verbs 102 Impersonal Verbs 104 Part III. PARTICLES. Adverbs 106 Prepositions 107 Interjections 108 I. Derivatives. Nouns 109 Adjectives iii Verbs 113 Part IV. WORD FORMATION. Adverbs II. Compounds. Examples of Compounds . 114 115 Part V. syntax. CHAPTER I. — Sentences. Classification of Sentences . .117 Form of Interrogative Sentences 117 Subject and Predicate . . . .119 Simple and Compound Sentences 1 19 CHAPTER II. — Syntax of Nouns. Subject 120 Predicate Nouns 120 Appositives . 121 The Nominative 122 The Accusative 122 The Dative 129 The Genitive 134 The Ablative 142 The Locative 152 CHAPTER \\\.— Syntax of Adjectives. Agreement of Adjectives . . -153 Adjectives used Substantively . 154 Adjectives with the Force of Ad- verbs 156 Comparatives and Superlatives . 156 Other Peculiarities 156 CHAPTER IV. — Syntax of Pronouns. Personal Pronouns 157 Possessive Pronouns . . . -157 Reflexive Pronouns 158 Reciprocal Pronouns . . . -159 Demonstrative Pronouns • . -159 TABLE OF CONTENTS. Vlt PAGE Relative Pronouns l6i Indefinite Pronouns 163 Pronominal Adjectives . . . .164 CHAPTER ^.— Syntax of Verbs, Agreement of Verbs 165 Voices 167 Tenses 167 Of the Indicative 167 Of the Subjunctive .... 171 Of the Infinitive 174 Moods 176 In Independent Sentences . .176 Volitive Subjunctive . . .176 Optative Subjunctive . . .178 Potential Subjunctive . . . 179 Imperative 180 In Dependent Clauses . . .181 Clauses of Purpose . . .181 Clauses of Characteristic . 182 Clauses of Result . . . .184 Causal Clauses 185 Temporal Clauses . . . .187 Introduced by Postquam, Ut, Ubi, etc 187 C«z«-Clauses 188 Introduced by Antequam and Priusquam . . .190 Introduced by Dum, Do- nee, Quoad . . . .191 Substantive Clauses . . .192 Developed from the Voli- tive 192 Developed from the Opta- tive 194 Of Result 195 After non dubito, etc. . .195 Introduced by Quod . .196 Indirect Questions . . . 197 Conditional Sentences . . 198 Use of 6^, Ntsi^ Sin . . . 202 PAGE Conditional Clauses of Com- parison 203 Concessive Clauses . . . 203 Adversative Clauses with Quamvis, Quamquam, etc 203 Clauses of Wish and Proviso 205 Relative Clauses .... 205 Indirect Discourse .... 206 Moods in Indirect Dis- course 206 Tenses in Indirect Dis- course 208 Conditional Sentences in Indirect Discourse . . 209 Implied Indirect Discourse . 211 Subjunctive by Attraction . 212 Noun and Adjective Forms of the Verb 212 Infinitive 213 , Participles 217 Gerund 220 Supine 223 CHAPTER Wl.— Particles. Coordinate Conjunctions . . . 223 Adverbs 227 CHAPTER Vll.— Word- Order and Sentence- Structure. Word-Order . 227 Sentence-Structure 232 CHAPTER Will. — Hints on Latin Style. Nouns 233 Adjectives 235 Pronouns 236 Verbs 236 The Cases 238 Vlll TABLE OF CONTENTS. Part VI. PROSODY. Quantity of Vowels and Sylla- bles 240 Verse-Structure 243 The Dactylic Hexameter . . . 245 The Dactylic Pentameter . . . 246 Iambic Measures 246 SUPPLEMENTS TO THE GRAMMAR III I. Roman Calendar . . . .247 II. Roman Names 249 Figures of Syntax and Rhet- oric 249 Index to the Illustrative Examples Cited in the Syntax 251 Index to the Principal Parts of Latin Verbs 259 General Index 263 INTRODUCTION. THE LATIN LANGUAGE. I. The Indo-European Family of Languages. — Latin belongs to one group of a large family of languages, known as Indo- European)- This Indo-European family of languages embraces the following groups : ASIATIC MEMBERS OF THE INDO-EUROPEAN FAMILY. a. The Sanskrit^ spoken in ancient India. Of this there were several stages, the oldest of which is the Vedic, or language of the Vedic Hymns. These Hymns are the oldest literary produc- tions known to us among all the branches of the Indo-European family. A conservative estimate places them as far back as 1500 B.C. Some scholars have even set them more than a thou- sand years earlier than this, i.e. anterior to 2500 B.C. The Sanskrit, in modified form, has always continued to be spoken in India, and is represented to-day by a large number of dialects descended from the ancient Sanskrit, and spoken by millions of people. b. The Iranian^ spoken in ancient Persia, and closely related to the Sanskrit. There were two main branches of the Iranian group, viz. the Old Persian and the Avestan. The Old Persian was the official language of the court, and appears in a number of so-called cuneiform ^ inscriptions, the earliest of which date from the time of Darius I (sixth century B.C.). The other branch of the Iranian, the Avestan,^ is the language of the Avesta or sacred books of the Parsees, the followers of Zoro- 1 Sometimes also called Aryan or Indo- Germanic. 2 Cuneiform means " wedge-shaped." The name applies to the form of the strokes of which the characters consist. 8 The name Zend is often given to this. ix INTRODUCTION. aster, founder of the religion of the fire-worshippers. Portions of these sacred books may have been composed as early as lOOO B.C. Modern Persian is a living representative of the old Iranian speech. It has naturally been much modified by time, particu- larly through the introduction of many words from the Arabic. c. The Armenian, spoken in Armenia, the district near the Black Sea and Caucasus Mountains. This is closely related to the Iranian, and was formerly classified under that group. It is now recognized as entitled to independent rank. The earliest literary productions of the Armenian language date from the fourth and fifth centuries of the Christian era. To this period belong the translation of the Scriptures and the old Armenian Chronicle. The Armenian is still a living language, though spoken in widely separated districts, owing to the scattered loca- tions in which the Armenians are found to-day. d. The Tokharian. This language, only recently discovered and identified as Indo-European, was spoken in the districts east of the Caspian Sea (modern Turkestan). While in some respects closely related to the three Asiatic branches of the Indo-European family already considered, in others it shows close relationship to the European members of the family. The literature of the Tokharian, so far as it has been brought to light, consists mainly of translations from the Sanskrit sacred writings, and dates from the seventh century of our era. EUROPEAN MEMBERS OF THE INDO-EUROPEAN FAMILY. e. The Greek. The Greeks had apparently long been settled in Greece and Asia Minor as far back as 1500 B.C. Probably they arrived in these districts much earlier. The earliest literary productions are the Iliad and the Odyssey of Homer, which very likely go back to the ninth century B.C. From the sixth century B.C. on, Greek literature is continuous. Modern Greek, when we consider its distance -in time from antiquity, is remarkably similar to the classical Greek of the fourth and fifth centuries B.C. INTRODUCTION. XI /. The Italic Group. The Italic Group embraces the Umbrian, spoken in the northern part of the Italian peninsula (in ancient Umbria); the Latin, spoken in the central part (in Latium) ; the Oscan, spoken in the southern part (in Samnium, Campania, Lucania, etc.). Besides these, there were a number of minor dialects, such as the Marsian, Volscian, etc. Of all these (barring the Latin), there are no remains except a few scanty inscriptions. Latin literature begins shortly after 250 B.C. in the works of Livius Andronicus, Naevius, and Plau- tus, although a few brief inscriptions are found belonging to a much earlier period. g. The Celtic, In the earliest historical times of which we have any record, the Celts occupied extensive portions of north- ern Italy, as well as certain areas in central Europe ; but after the second century B.C., they are found only in Gaul and the British Isles. Among the chief languages belonging to the Celtic group are the Gallic, spoken in ancient Gaul ; the Breton, still spoken in the modern French province of Brittany; the Irish, which is still extensively spoken in Ireland among the common people ; the Welsh ; and the Gaelic of the Scotch Highlanders. h. The Teutonic. The Teutonic group is very extensive. Its earliest representative is the Gothic, preserved for us in the translation of. the scriptures by the Gothic Bishop Ulfilas (about 375 A.D.). Other languages belonging to this group are the Old Norse, once spoken in Scandinavia, and from which are de- scended the modern Icelandic, Norwegian, Swedish, Danish ; German ; Dutch ; Anglo-Saxon, from which is descended the modern English. /. The Balto-Slavic. The languages of this group belong to eastern Europe. The Baltic division of the group embraces the Lithuanian and Lettic, spoken to-day by the people living on the eastern shores of the Baltic Sea. The earliest literary pro- ductions of these languages date from the sixteenth century. The Slavic division comprises a large number of languages, the most important of which are the Russian, the Bulgarian, the Xll INTRODUCTION. Serbian, the Bohemian, the Polish. All of these were late in developing a literature, the earliest to do so being the Old Bul- garian, in which we find a translation of the Bible dating from the ninth century. j. The Albanian, spoken in Albania and parts of Greece, Italy, and Sicily. This is most nearly related to the Balto-Slavic group, and is characterized by the very large proportion of words borrowed from Latin, Turkish, Greek, and Slavic. Its literature does not begin till the seventeenth century. 2. Home of the Indo-European Family. — Despite the many outward differences of the various languages of the foregoing groups, a careful examination of their structure and vocabulary demonstrates their intimate relationship and proves overwhelm- ingly their descent from a common parent. 'We must believe, therefore, that at one time there existed a homogeneous clan or tribe of people speaking a language from which all the above enumerated languages are descended. The precise location of the home of this ancient tribe cannot be determined. For a long time it was assumed that it was in central Asia north of the Himalaya Mountains, but this view has long been rejected as untenable. It arose from the exaggerated importance attached for a long while to Sanskrit. The great antiquity of the earhest literary remains of the Sanskrit (the Vedic Hymns) suggested that the inhabitants of India were geographically close to the original seat of the Indo-European Family. Hence the home w^as sought in the elevated plateau to the north. To-day it is thought that central or southeastern Europe is much more likely to have been the cradle of the Indo-European parent-speech, though anything like a logical demonstration of so difficult a problem can hardly be expected. As to the size and extent of the original tribe whence the Indo-European languages have sprung, we can only speculate. It probably was not large, and very likely formed a compact racial and linguistic unit for centuries, possibly for thousands of years. The time at which Indo-European unity ceased and the vari- INTRODUCTION. Xlll ous individual languages began their separate existence, is likewise shrouded in obscurity. When we Consider that the separate existence of the Sanskrit may antedate 2500 B.C., it may well be believed that people speaking the Indo-European parent-speech belonged to a period as far back as 5000 B.C., or possibly earlier. 3. Stages in the Development of the Latin Language. — The earliest remains of the Latin language are found in certain very archaic inscriptions. The oldest of these belong to the sixth and seventh centuries B.C. Roman literature does not begin till several centuries later, viz. shortly after the middle of the third century B.C. We may recognize the following clearly marked periods of the language and literature : a. The Preliterary Period, from the earliest times down to 240 B.C., when Livius Andronicus brought out his first play. For this period our knowledge of Latin depends almost exclu- sively upon the scanty inscriptions that have survived from this remote time. Few of these are of any length. b. The Archaic Period, from Livius Andronicus (240 B.C.) to Cicero (8i B.C.). Even in this age the language had already become highly developed as a medium of expression. In the hands of certain gifted writers it had even become a vehicle of power and beauty. In its simplicity, however, it naturally marks a contrast with the more finished diction of later days. To this period belong : Livius Andronicus, about 275-204 B.C. (Translation of Homer's Odyssey ; Tragedies). Plautus, about 250-184 b.c, (Comedies). Naevius, about 270-199 b.c. (" Punic War "; Come- dies). Ennius, 239-169 b.c. ('' Annals " ; Tragedies). Terence, about 190-159 B.C. (Comedies). Lucilius, 180-103 B.C. (Satires). Pacuvius, 220-about 130 B.C. (Tragedies). Accius, 170-about 85 B.C. (Tragedies). XIV INTRODUCTION. c. The Golden Age, from Cicero (8i B.C.) to the death of Au- gustus (14 A.D.). 'In this period the language, especially in the hands of Cicero, reaches a high degree of stylistic perfection. Its vocabulary, however, has not yet attained its greatest full- ness and range. Traces of the diction of the Archaic Period are often noticed, especially in the poets, who naturally sought their effects by reverting to the speech of olden times. Litera- ture reached its culmination in this epoch, especially in the great poets of the Augustan Age. The following writers belong here : Lucretius, about 95-55 B.C. (Poem on Epicurean Philosophy). Catullus, 87-about 54 B.C. (Poet). Cicero, 106-43 ^-C- (Orations; Rhetorical Works; Philosophical Works ; Letters). Caesar, 102-44 B.C. (Commentaries on GaUic and Civil Wars). Sallust, 86-36 B.C. (Historian). Nepos, about loo-about 30 B.C. (Historian). Virgil, 70-19 B.C. ("Aeneid"; " Georgics " ; ** Bu- • colics "). Horace, 65-8 b.c. (Odes ; Satires ; Epistles). Tibullus, about 54-19 B.C. (Poet). Propertius, about 50-about 15 B.C. (Poet). Ovid, 43 B.C.-17 A.D. (" Metamorphoses " and other poems). Livy, 59 B.C.-17 A.D. (Historian). d. The Silver Latinity, from the death of Augustus (14 a.d.) to the death of Marcus AureHus (180 a.d.). This period is marked by a certain reaction against the excessive precision of the previous age. It had become the practice to pay too much attention to standardized forms of expression, and to leave too little play to the individual writer. In the healthy reaction against this formalism, greater freedom of expression now mani- fests itself. We note also the introduction of idioms from the INTRODUCTION. XV colloquial language, along with many poetical words and usages. The following authors deserve mention : Phaedrus, flourished about 40 a.d. (Fables in Verse). Velleius Paterculus, flourished about 30 a.d. (His- torian). Lucan, 39-65 a.d. (Poem on the Civil War). Seneca, about 1-65 a.d. (Tragedies ; Philosophical Works). Pliny the Elder, 23-79 ^-^^ C' Natural History "). Pliny the Younger, 62-about 115 a.d. ("Letters"). Martial, about 45 -about 104 a.d. (Epigrams). Quintilian, about 35-about 100 a.d. (Treatise on Oratory and Education). Tacitus, about 55-about 118 a.d. (Historian). Juvenal, about 55-about 135 a.d. (Satirist). Suetonius, about 75-about 150 a.d. (''Lives of the Twelve Caesars "). Minucius Felix, flourished about 160 a.d. (First Christian Apologist). Apuleius, 125- about 200 B.C. (" Metamorphoses," or " Golden Ass "). e. The Archaizing Period. This period is characterized by a conscious imitation of the Archaic Period of the second and first centuries B.C. ; it overlaps the preceding period, and is of importance from a linguistic rather than from a literary point of view. Of writers who manifest the archaizing tendency most conspicuously may be mentioned Fronto, from whose hand we have a collection of letters addressed to the Emperors Antoninus Pius and Marcus AureHus ; also Aulus GelHus, author of the '' Attic Nights." Both of these writers flourished in the second half of the second century a.d. /. The Period of the Decline, from 180 to the close of literary activity in the sixth century a.d. This period is characterized by rapid and radical alterations in the language. The features of the conversational idiom of the lower strata of society invade XVI INTRODUCTION. the literature, while in the remote provinces, such as Gaul, Spain, Africa, the language suffers from the incorporation of local peculiarities. Representative writers of this period are ; Tertullian, about i6o-about 240 a.d. (Christian Writer). Cyprian, about 200-258 a.d. (Christian Writer). Lactantius, flourished about 300 a.d. (Defense of Christianity). Ausonius, about 310-about 395 a.d. (Poet). Jerome, 340-420 a.d. (Translator of the Scriptures). Ambrose, about 340-397 (Christian Father). Augustine, 354-430 (Christian Father — "City of God "). Prudentius, flourished 400 a.d. (Christian Poet). Claudian, flourished 400 a.d. (Poet). Boethius, about 480-524 a.d. (" Consolation of Phi- losophy "). 4. Subsequent History of the Latin Language. — After the sixth century a.d. Latin divides into two entirely different streams. One of these is the literary language maintained in courts, in the Church, and among scholars. This was no longer the language of people in general, and as time went on, became more and more artificial. The other stream is the colloquial idiom of the common people, which developed ultimately in the provinces into the modern so-called Romance idioms. These are the Italian, Spanish, Portuguese, French, Provengal (spoken in Provence, i.e. southeastern France), the Rhaeto- Romance (spoken in the Canton of the Grisons in Switzerland), and the Roumanian, spoken in modern Roumania and adjacent districts. All these Romance languages bear the same relation to the Latin as the different groups of the Indo-European family of languages bear to the parent-speech. rART 1. « SOUNDS, ACCENT, QUANTITY. — • — THE ALPHABET. 1. The Latin Alphabet is the same as the English, except that the Latin has no w. 1. K occurs only in Kalendae and a few other words ; y and z were introduced from the Greek about 50 B.C., and occur only in foreign words — chiefly Greek. 2. With the Romans, who regularly employed only capitals, I served both as vowel and consonant ; so also V. For us, however, it is more convenient to distinguish the vowel and consonant sounds, and to write i and u for the former, j and v for the latter. Yet some scholars prefer to employ i and u in the function of consonants as well as vowels. CLASSIFICATION OF SOUNDS. 2. I. The Vowels are a, e, i, o, u, y. The other letters are Consonants. The Diphthongs are ae, oe, ei, au, eu, ui. 2. Consonants are further subdivided into Mutes, Liquids, Nasals, and Spirants. 3. The Mutes are p, t, c, k, q; b, d, g; ph, th, ch. Of these, — d) p, t, c, k, q are voiceless,^ i.e. sounded without voice or vibra- tion of the vocal cords. b) b, d, g are voiced,^ i.e. sounded with vibration of the vocal cords. 1 For ' voiceless,' ' surd,' ' hard,' or ' tenuis ' are sometimes used. 2 For ' voiced,' ' sonant,' ' soft,' or ' media ' are sometimes used. SOUNDS, ACCENT, QUANTITY. t) ph,'^tl?.f ch are aspirates. These are confined almost exclu- sively to words derived from the Greek, and were equivalent to p + h, t + h, c + h, i.e. to the corresponding voiceless mutes with a following breath, as in Eng. loop-hole, hot-house^ block-house. 4. The Mutes admit of classification also as Labials, Dentals (or Linguals), Gutturals (or Palatals), p, b, ph. t, d, th. c, k, q, s, ch. 5. The Liquids are l, r. These sounds were voiced. 6. The Nasals are m, n. These were voiced. Besides its ordinary sound, n, when followed by a guttural mute, also had another sound, — that of ng in sing, — the so- called n adulterinum ; as, — anceps, dotible, pronounced angceps. 7. The Spirants (sometimes called Fricatives) are f, s, h. These were voiceless. 8. The Semivowels are j and v. These were voiced. 9. Double Consonants are x and z. Of these, x was equivalent to cs, while the equivalence of z is uncertain. See § 3. 3. 10. The following table will indicate the relations of the consonant sounds : — Mutes, Liquids, Nasals, Spirants, Semivowels, Voiceless. Voiced. Aspirates. P. b, pb, (Labials). t, d, th, (Dentals). c, k, q. m, n. Ch, (Gutturals), f, (Labial). s, (Dental). H, (Guttural) . ], V. The Double Consonants, x and z, being compound sounds, do not admit of classification in the above table. SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS. SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS. 3. The following pronunciation (often called Roman) is substantially that employed by the Romans at the height of their civilization ; i,e. roughly, from 50 B.C. to 50 a.d. 1. Vowels. a as m father ; S as in the first syllable of aM; e as in t/iey ; 6 as in met ; * 1 as in viachine ; 1 as in pzn ; o as in note ; 6 as in oJyey, melody ; u as in rude ; ti as in put ; y like French ?/, German u. 2. Diphthongs. ae like ai in aisle ; eu with its two elements, S and li, oe like oi in oil; pronounced in rapid succession; ei as in rein ; ui occurs almost exclusively in cui au like ow in how; and huic. These words may be pronounced as though written kwee and wheek. 3. Consonants. b, d, f, h, k, 1, m, n, p, qu are pronounced as in English, except that bs, bt are pronounced ps^ pt. c is always pronounced as k. t is always a plain t, never with the sound of sh as in Eng. oration. g always as mget ; when ngu precedes a vowel, gu has the sound of gw, as in anguis, languidus. j has the sound of y as in yei. r was probably slightly trilled with the tip of the tongue, s always voiceless as in sin ; in suadeo, suavis, suesco, and in com- pounds and derivatives of these words, su has the sound oisw. V like w. X always like ks ; never like Eng. gz or 2. z uncertain in sound ; possibly like Eng. zd, possibly like 2. The latter sound is recommended. The aspirates ph, ch, th were pronounced very nearly like our stressed Eng. ^, c, t — so nearly so, that, for practical purposes, the latter sounds suffice. Doubled letters, like 11, mm, tt, etc., should be so pronounced that both members of the combination are distinctly articulated. SOUNDS, ACCENT, QUANTITY. SYLLABLES. 4. There are as many syllables in a Latin word as there are separate vowels and diphthongs. In the division of words into syllables, — 1. A single consonant is joined to the following vowel ; as, vo-lat, ge-rit, pe-rit, a-dest. 2. Doubled consonants, like tt, ss, etc.^ are always separated; as, vit-ta, mis-sus. 3. Other combinations of two or more consonants are regularly separated, and the first consonant of the combination is joined with the preceding vowel ; as, ma-gis-tri, dig-nus, mon-strum, sis-te-re. 4. An exception to Rule 3 occurs when the two consonants consist of a mute followed by 1 or r (pi, cl, tl ; pr, cr, tr, etc.^. In such cases both consonants are regularly joined to the following vowel ; as, a-gri, vo-Iu-cris, pa-tris, ma-tris. Yet if the 1 or r introduces the second part of a compound, the two consonants are separated ; as, ab-rump6, ad-Iatus. 5. The double consonant x is joined to the preceding vowel ; as, ax-is, tex-i. QUANTITY. 5. A. Quantity of Vowels. A vowel is long or short according to the length of time required for its pronunciation No absolute rule can be given for determining the quantity of Latin vowels. This knowledge must be gained, in large measure, by experience ; but the following principles are of aid : — 1. A vowel is long,i — a) before nf or ns ; as, infans, inferior, consumo, censeo, insum. b) when the result of contraction ; as, nilum for nihilum. 2. A vow^el is short, — a) before nt, nd ; as, amant, amandus. A few exceptions occur in compounds whose first member has a long vowel ; as, non- dum (n5n dum). b) before another vowel, or h ; as, mens, traho. Some excep- tions occur, chiefly in proper names derived from the Greek ; as, Aeneas. 1 In this book, long vowels are indicated by a horizontal line above them ; as, a, i, 6, etc. Vowels not thus marked are short. Occasionally a curve is set above short vowels; as, 6, ii. ACCENT. 5 B. Quantity of Syllables. Syllables are distinguished as lotig or short according to the length of time required for their pronunciation. 1 . A syllable is long, i — a) if it contains a long vowel ; as, mater, regnum, dius. ^) if it contains a diphthong; as, causae, foedus. c) if it contains a short vowel followed by x, z, or any two con- sonants (except a mute with 1 or r) ; as, axis, gaza, resto. 2. A syllable is short, if it contains a short vowel followed by a vowel or by a single consonant ; as, mea, amat. 3. Sometimes a syllable varies in quantity, viz. when its vowel is short and is followed by a mute with 1 or r, i.e. by pi, cl, tl ; pr, cr, tr, etc. ; as, agri, volticris.^ Such syllables are called common. In prose they were regularly short, but in verse they might be treated as long at the option of the poet. Note. — These distinctions of long- and s/iort a.re not arbitrary and artificial, but are purely natural. Thus, a syllable containing a short vowel followed by two consonants, as ng, is long, because such a syl- lable requires more time for its pronunciation; while a syllable con- taining a short vowel followed by one consonant is short, because it takes less time to pronounce it. In case of the common syllables, the mute and the liquid blend so easily as to produce a combination which takes no more time than a single consonant. Yet by sepa- rating the two elements (as ag-ri) the poets were able to use such syllables as long. ACCENT. 6. I. Words of two syllables are accented upon the first ; as, t^git, xuorem. 2. Words of more than two syllables are accented upon the penult (next to the last) if that is a long syllable, otherwise upon the ante- penult (second from the last) ; as, amtvi, amdntis, miserum. 3. When the enclitics -que, -ne, -ve, -ce, -met, -dum are appended to words, if the syllable preceding the enclitic is long (either originally or as a result of adding the enclitic) it is accented ; as, miseroque, hominlsque. But if the syllable still remains short after the enclitic has been added, it is not accented unless the word originally took the accent on the antepenult. Thus, pdrtaque ; but mfserdque. 1 To avoid confusion, the quantity of syllables is not indicated by any sign. 2 But if the 1 or r introduces the second part of a compound, the preceding syllable is always long; as, abrumpo. SOUNDS, ACCENT, QUANTITY. 4. Sometimes the final -e of -ne and -ce disappears, but without affecting the accent ; as, tan ton, is tic, iliac. 5. In utraque, each^ and plerSque, most^ -que is not properly an .enclitic; yet these words accent the penult, owing to the influence of their other cases, — utdrque, utrumque, pleriimque. VOWEL CHANGES.i 7. I . In Compounds, — a) g before a single consonant becomes i ; as, — colligo for con-lego. b) S. before a single consonant becomes i ; as, — adigo for ad-ago. c) a before two consonants becomes S ; as, — expers for ex-pars. d) ae becomes 1 ; as, — conquiro for con-quaero. e) au becomes u, sometimes 6 ; as, — concludd for con-claudo ; explode for ex-plaudo. 2. Contraction. Concurrent vowels were frequently contracted into one long vowel. The first of the two vowels regularly prevailed ; as, — tres for tre-es ; copia for co-opia ; malo for nia(v)elo; cogo for co-ago; amasti for ama(v)isti ; como for co-emo ; debeo for de(h)abe6 ; junior for ju(v)enior. nil for nihil; 3. Parasitic Vowels. In the environment of liquids and nasals a parasitic vowel sometimes develops ; as, — vinculum for earlier vinclum. So periculum, saeculum. 4. Syncope. Sometimes a vowel drops out by syncope ; as, — , ardor for aridor (compare dridus) ; valde for valide (compare validus). 1 Only the simplest and most obvious of these are here treated. PECULIARITIES OF ORTHOGRAPHY. 7 CONSONANT CHANGES.i 8. I. Rhotacism. An original s between vowels became r; as, — arbos, Gen. arboris (for arbosis) ; genus, Gen. generis (for genesis) ; dirimo (for dis-emo) . 2. dt, tt, ts each give £ or ss ; as, — pensiim for pend-tum ; versum for vert-tum ; miles for milet-s ; sessus for sedtus ; passus for pattus. 3. Final consonants were often omitted ; as, — cor for cord ; lac for lact. A. Assimilation of Consonants. Consonants are often assimilated to .* following sound. Thus : accurro (adc-) ; aggero (adg-) assero (ads-) ; allatus (adl-) ; apporto (adp-) ; attuli (adt-) arrideo (adr-) ; affero (adf-) ; occurro (obc-) ; supp5no (subp-) offers (obf-) ; corruo (comr-) ; coUatus (coml-) ; etc. 5. Partial Assimilation. Sometimes the assimilation is only partial. Thus: — a) b before s or t becomes p ; as, — scrips! (scrib-si), scriptum (scrib-tum). b) g before s or t becomes c ; as, — actus (ag-tus). c) m before a dental or guttural becomes n ; as, — eundem (eum-dem) ; princeps (prim-ceps). PECULIARITIES OF ORTHOGRAPHY; 9. Many words have variable orthography. I. Sometimes the different forms belong to different periods of the language. Thus, quom, voltus, volnus, volt, etc.^ were the prevail- 1 Only the simplest and most obvious of these are here treated. 8 SOUNDS, ACCENT, QUANTITY. ing forms almost down to the Augustan age ; after that, cum, vultus, vulnus, vult, eta. So optumus, maxumus, lubet, lubido, etc.^ down to about the same era ; later, optimus, maximus, libet, libido, etc. 2. In some words the orthography varies at one and the same period of the language. Examples are exspecto, expect 6 ; exsisto, exist5 ; epistula, epistola ; adulescens, adolescens ; paulus, paullus ; cottidie, cotidie ; and, particularly, prepositional compounds, which often made a concession to the etymology in the spelling ; as, — ad-gero or aggero ; ad-sero or assero ; ad-licio or allicio ; in-latus or illatus ; ad-rogans or arrogans ; sub-moveo or summoveo ; and many others. 3. Compounds of jacio were usually written eicio, deicio, adicio, obicio, etc.^ but were probably pronounced as though written adjicio, objicio, etc. 4. Adjectives and nouns in -quus, -quum; -vus, -vum ; -uus, -uum preserved the earlier forms in -quos, -quom; -vos, -vom; -uos, -uom, down through the Ciceronian age; as, antiques, anti- quom; saevos ; perpetuos ; equos ; servos. Similarly verbs in the 3d plural present indicative exhibit the terminations -quont, -quontur; -vont, -vontur; -uont, -uontur, for the same period; as, relinquont, loquontur ; vivont, metuont. The older spelling, while generally followed in editions of Plautus and Terence, has not yet been adopted in our prose texts. Part II INFLECTIONS. 10. The Parts of Speech in Latin are the same as in English, viz. Nouns, Adjectives, Pronouns, Verbs, Adverbs, Prepositions, Conjunctions, and Interjections ; but the Latin has no article. 11. Of these eight parts of speech the first four are capable of Inflection, i.e. of undergoing change of form to express modifications of meaning. In case of Nouns, Adjectives, and Pronouns, this process is called Declen- sion; in case of verbs. Conjugation. Chapter I. — Declension. A. NOUNS. .12. A Noun is the name of a person^ place, thing, or quality; as, Caesar, Caesar; 'Rom.a,, Rome ; ^enns., feather ; virtus, courage. 1 . Nouns are either Proper or Common. Proper nouns are perma- nent names of persons or places ; as, Caesar, R5ma. Other nouns are Common ; as, penna, virtus. 2. Nouns are also distinguished as Concrete or Abstract. a) Concrete nouns are those which designate individual objects ,• as, m5ns, mountain] pea, foot ; dies, day ; mens, mind. 9 lO INFLECTIONS. Under concrete nouns are included, also, collective nouns ; as, legio, /eg-ion ; comitatus, retinue. b) Abstract nouns designate qualities ; as, constantia, stead' fastness; paupertas, poverty. GENDER OF NOUNS. 13. There are three Genders, — MascuUne, Feminine, and Neuter. Gender in Latin is either natural or gram- matical. Natural Gender. 14. The gender of nouns is natural when it is based upon sex. Natural gender is confined entirely to names of persons ; and these are — 1 . Masculine, if they denote males ; as, — nauta, sailor ; agricola, farmer. 2. Feminine, if they denote females ; as, — mater, mother ; regina, queen. Grammatical Gender. 15. Grammatical gender is determined not by sex, but by the general signification of the word, or the ending of its Nominative Singular. By grammatical gender, nouns denoting things or qualities are often Masculine or Femi- nine, simply by virtue of their signification or the ending of the Nominative Singular. The following are the gen- eral principles for determining grammatical gender : — A, Gender determined by Signification. 1. Names of Rivers^ Winds ^ and Months are Mascu- line ; as, — Sequana, 6'2 SINGULAR. Masculine. Feminink. Neuter. Nom. acer acris acre Gen. acris acris acris Dat. acri acri acri Ace. acrem acrem acre Voc. acer acris acre Abl. acrl acri PLURAL. acri Nom. acres acres acria Gen. acrium acrium acrium Dat. acribus acribus acribus Ace. acres, -is acres, is acria Voc. acres acres acria Abl. acribus acribus acribus 1. Like acer are declined alacer, lively', csun-pester, level ; cele- her, /amous ; equester, equestrian ', paluster, marshy; pedester, pedestrian; puter, rotten; saluber, wholesome; Silvester, woody; terrester, terrestrial; volucer, winged; also names of months in -ber, as Septemiber. 2. Celer, celeris, celere, swift, retains the e before r, but lacks the Genitive Plural. 3. In the Nominative Singular of Adjectives of this class the Femi- nine form is sometimes used for the Masculine. This is regularly true of salubris, silvestris, and terrestris. In case of the other words in the list, the use of the Feminine for the Masculine is confined chiefly to early and late Latin, and to poetry. 38 INFLECTIONS. Adjectives of Tw^o Terminations. 69. These are declined as follows : — Fortis, , strong. Fortior, stronger. SINGULAR. M. AND F. Neut. M. AND F. Neut. Nom. fortis forte fortior fortius Gen. fortis fortis fortioris fortioris Dat. forti forti fortiori fortiori Ace. fortem forte fortiorem fortius Voc. fortis forte fortior fortius Abl forti forti fortiore fortiore PLURAL. Nom- fortes fortia fortiores fortiora Gen. fortium fortium fortiorum fortiorum Dat. fortibus fortibus fortioribus fortioribus Ace. fortes, -is fortia fortiores, -is fortiora Voc. fortes fortia fortiores fortiora Abl. fortibus fortibus fortioribus fortioribus I. Fortior is th le Comparative of fortis. All Comparatives are yularh r declined in the same way. The Ace. Plu. in -is is rare. Adjectives of One Termination. 70. Felix, happy. Prudens, prudent. SINGULAR. M. AND F. - Neut. M. AND F. Neut. Nom. felix felix prudens prudens Gen. felicis felicis prudentis prudentis Dat. felTci felTci prudent! prudent! Ace, felicem felix prudentem priidens Voc. fellx felTx prudens prudens Abl. fellcl felici PLURAL. prudent! prudent! Nom. felTces felTcia prudentes prudentia Gen. felTcium felicium prudentium prudentium Dat. felicibus felicibus prudentibus prudentibus Ace. felTces, -is felTcia prudentes, -is prudentia Voc, felTces felicia priidentes prudentia Abl. felicibus felicibus prOdentibus prudentibus ADJECTIVES OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 39 Vetus, old. SINGULAR. Plus, more. M. AND F. Neut. M. AND F. Neut. Nom, vetus vetus plus Gen. veteris veteris pluris Dat. veteri veteri Ace. veterem vetus plus Voc. vetus vetus Abl. vetere vetere plure PLURAL. Nom. veteres Vetera plures plura Gen. veterum veterum plurium plurium Dat. veteribus veteribus pluribus pluribus Ace. veteres Vetera plures, -is plura Voc. veteres Vetera Abl. veteribus veteribus pluribus pluribus 1 . It will be observed that vetus is declined as a pure Consonant- Stem ; i.e. Ablative Singular in -e. Genitive Plural in -um, Nominative Plural Neuter in -a, and Accusative Plural Masculine and Feminine in -es only. In the same way are declined compos, controlling ', dives, rich] particeps, sharing; pauper, poor; princeps, chief; sospes, safe; superstes, surviving. Yet dives always has Neut. Plu. ditia. 2. Inops, needy ^ and memor, mindful^ have Ablative Singular inopi, memori, but Genitive Plural inopum, memorum. 3. Participles in -ans and -ens follow the declension of i-stems. But they do not have -i in the Ablative, except when employed as adjec- tives ; when used as participles or as substantives, they have -e ; as, — a sapieuti viro, by a wise man ; but a sapiente, by a philosopher. Tarquinio regnante, under the reign of Tarquin. 4. Plus, in the Singular, is always a noun. 5. In the Ablative Singular, adjectives, when used as substantives, — a') usually retain the adjective declension ; as, — aequalis, contemporary^ Abl. aequali. consularis, ex-consul, Abl. c6nsul5ri. So names of Months; as, Aprili, April; Decembri, De- cember. ^) But adjectives used as proper names have -e in the Ablative Singular ; as, Celere, Celer ; JuvenSle, Juvenal. 40 INFLECTIONS. c) Patrials in -as, -atis and -Is, -itis, when designating places, regularly have -i ; as, in Arpinati, on the estate at Arpinum ; yet -e, when used of persons ; as, ab Arpinate, dy an Arpi- natian. 6. A very few indeclinable adjectives occur, the chief of which are irvi^i, frugal ; nequam, worthless. 7. In poetry, adjectives and participles in -ns sometimes form the Gen. Plu. in -um instead of -ium; as, venientum, of those coming. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 71. I. There are three degrees of Comparison, — the Positive, the Comparative, and the Superlative. 2. The Comparative is regularly formed by adding -ior (Neut. -ius), and the Superlative by adding -issimus (-a, -um), to the Stem of the Positive deprived of its final vowel ; as, — altus, high. altior, higher, altissimus, \ ^^ ^^, '. ^ ( very high. fortis, brave, fortior, fortissimus. iB\x, fortjmate, felTcior, felicissimus. So also Participles, when used as Adjectives ; as, — doctus, learned, doctior, doctissimus. egens, needy, egentior, egentissimus. 3. Adjectives in -er form the Superlative by appending -rimus to the Nominative of the Positive. The Comparative is regular. Thus : — asper, rough, asperior, asperrimus. pulcher, beautiful, pulchrior, pulcherrimus. acer, sharp, acrior, acerrimus. celer, swift, celerior, celerrimus. a. Notice maturus, maturior, maturissimus or maturrimus. 4. Five Adjectives in -ills form the Superlative by adding -limus to the Stem of the Positive deprived of its final vowel. The Comparative is regular. Thus : — facilis, easy, facilior, facillimus. difficilis, difficult, difficiiior, difficillimus. similis, like, similior, simillimus. dissimilis, unlike, dissimilior, dissimillimus. humilis, low, humilior, humillimus. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 41 5. Adjectives in -dicus, -ficus, and -volus form the Comparative and Superlative as though from forms in -dicens, -iicens, -vol§ns. Thus : — maledicus, slanderous^ maledlcentior, maledfcentissimus. magnificus, magnificent^ magnificentior, magnificentissimus. benevolus, kindly^ benevolentipr, benevolentissimus. a. Positives in -dicens and -volens occur in early Latin ; as, maledioens, benevolens. 6. Dives has the Comparative divitior or ditior ; Superlative divitissimus or ditissimus. Irregular Comparison. 72. Several Adj ectives vary the Stem in Comparison; viz. — bonus, good^ melior, optimus. malus, bad^ pejor. pessimus. parvus, small, minor, minimus. magnus, large^ major, maximus. multus, much, plus. plurimus. frugi, thrifty, frugalior, frugalissimus. nequam, worthless, nequior. nequissimus. 73. Defective Comparison. I . Positive lacking entirely, — (Cf. prae, in front of) (Cf. citra, this side of) (Cf. ultra, beyond.) (Cf. intra, within.) (Cf. prope, near.) (Cf. de, down.) (Cf. sirchzic-potis, possible.) prior, foriner, primus, first. citerior, on this side, citimus, near. ulterior, farther, ultimus, farthest. mtenor, inner, propior, nearer, deterior, inferior, potior, preferable, 2. Positive occurring only in special cases,— posterd die, ann5, etc., the following day, etc. intimus, iimiost. proximus, nearest. deterrimus, worst. potissimus, chiefest. posterior, later. poster!, descendants, exteri, foreigners, nationes exterae, foT' eign nations, postremus, postumuB, I latest, I last. .1 exterior, outer, extremus, extimus, f late-born, { posthumous. \ outermost. 42 INFLECTIONS. lowest. inferl, gods of the lower world, \ Mare Inferum, Mediterranean \ inferior, lower, Sea, J superi, gods above, 1 . J supremus, last. Mare Superum, Adriatic Sea, \ > 5 > j summus, highest. infimus, imus. 3. Comparative lacking. vetus, old, fidxxs, faithful, novus, new, 1 2 veterrimus. fidissimus. novissimus,3 last sacer, sacred, i2^s,\i?,, false, . sacerrimus. falsissimus. so in some other words less frequently used. 4. Superlative lacking, alacer, lively, ingens, great, salutaris, wholesome, alacrior, ingentior, salutarior. juvenis, young, senex, old, junior, senior. 4 5 a. The Superlative is lacking also in many adjectives in -alis, -ilis, -ilis, -bills, and in a few others. Comparison by Magis and Majcime. 74. Many adjectives do not admit terminational compar- ison, but form the Comparative and Superlative degrees by prefixing magis {more) and maxime {most). Here belong — 1. Many adjectives ending in -alis, -aris, -idus, -Ilis, -icus, imus, inus, -orus. 2. Adjectives in -us, preceded by a vowel; as, idoneus, adapted; arduus, steep ; necessarius, necessary. a. Adjectives in -quus, of course, do not come under this rule. The first u in such cases is not a vowel, but a consonant. 1 Supplied by vetustior, from vetustus. 2 Supplied by recentior. 3 For newest, recentissimus is used. * Supplied by minimus natu. 5 Supplied by maximus natu. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS. 43 Adjectives not admitting Comparison. 75. Here belong — ^ 1 . Many adjectives, which, from the nature of their signification, do not admit of comparison ; as, hodiernus, of to-day, annuus, annual; mortalis, mortal. 2. Some special words; as, mirus, gnarus, merus ; and a few others. FORMATION AND COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. 76. Adverbs are for the most part derived from adjec- tives, and depend upon them for their comparison. 1. Adverbs derived from adjectives of the First and Second Declensions form the Positive by changing -1 of the Genitive Singular to -e ; those derived from adjectives of the Third Declension, by changing -is of the Genitive Singular to -iter ; as, — cams, care, dearly ; pulcher, pulchre, beautifully \ acer, ^cxiX.G,x, fiercely i levis, leviter, lightly. a. But Adjectives in -ns, and a few others, add -er (instead of -iter), to form the Adverb ; as, — sapiens, sapienter, wisely ; sollers, sollerter, skillfully. Note audax, audacter, boldly. 2. The Comparative of all Adverbs regularly consists of the Accu- sative Singular Neuter of the Comparative of the Adjective ; while the Superlative of the Adverb is formed by changing the -1 of the Genitive Singular of the Superlative of the Adjective to -e. Thus — (carus) car§, dearly, carius, carissime. (pulcher) pulchre, beautifully^ pulchrius. pulcherrime. (acer) acriter, fiercely, acrius. acerrime. (levis) leviter, lightly, levius. levissime. (sapiens) sapienter, wisely, sapientius. sapientissime, (audax) audacter, boldly, audacius, audacissimS. 44 INFLECTIONS. Adverbs Peculiar in Comparison and Formation. 77. I. bene, well, male, ///, melius, pejus. optime. pessime. magnopere, greatly, multum, 7nuch, magis, plus, maxim e. pliirimum n5n multum, ] ,.,^, \ little, parum, J diu, lo7ig. minus, diutius. minime. diutissime. nequiter, worthlessly, saepe, often, mature, betimes, , nequius, saepius, maturius, nequissime. saepissimS. matiirrime. maturissime. prope, near, nuper, recently, secus, otherwise. propius, potius, rather, \ Previously, prius, \\ . -^' ^ ' 1 before, setius, less. proxime. nuperrime. potissimum, especially. \ primum,yfrj/. 2. A number of adjectives of the First and Second Declensions form an Adverb in -6, instead of -e ; as, — crebro, frequently ; falso, falsely ; continuo, immediately ; subito, suddenly, rar5, rarely ; and a few others. a. cito, quickly, has -6. 3. A few adjectives employ the Accusative Singular Neuter as the Positive of the Adverb ; as, — multum, much ; paulum, little ; facile, easily. 4. A few adjectives of the First and Second Declensions form the Positive in -iter ; as, — firmus, ilx'xvit^x, firmly ', humanus, hiimaniter, hu7nanly ; largus, largiter, copiously ; alius, aliter, otherwise, a. violentus has violenter. 5. Various other adverbial suffixes occur, the most important of which are -tus and -tim; as, antiquitus, anciently; paulatim, gradually. NUMERALS. 45 NUMERALS. 78. Numerals may be divided into — L Numeral Adjectives, comprising — a. Cardinals', 2is, vLnns, orte ; duo, two ; etc, b. Ordinals; as, primus, yfrj-/; secundLMS, second ; etc. c. Distributives ; as, singuli, one by one ; bini, two by two ; etc, II. Numeral Adverbs ; as, semel, once; bis, twice ; etc. 79. Table of Numeral Adjectives and Adverbs. Cardinals. Ordinals. Distributives. Adverbs. I. unus, una, unum primus, ^rj/ singuli, one by one semel, once 2. duo, duae, duo secundus, second binl, two by two bis 3- tres, tria tertius, third terni (trini) ter 4. quattuor qua-rtus, fourth quaterni quater 5- quinque qulntus.y?/?/^ quini quinquies 6. sex sextus seni sexies 7. septem Septimus septeni septies 8. octo octavus octoni octies 9- novem nonus noveni novies lO. decern decimus deni decies II. undecim undecimus undeni iindecies 12. duodecim duodecimus duodeni duodecies 13- tredecim tertius decimus ternI denI terdecies 14. quattuordecim quartus decimus quaterni denI quaterdecies 15- qulndecim quintus decimus quIni deni • quinquies decies 16. j sedecim | j sexdecim f sextus decimus senI denI sexies decies 17- septendecim Septimus decimus septem deni septies decies 18. duodevTginti duodevlcesimus duodevlceni octies decies 19. undevlgintl ilndevlcesimus ilndevlceni novies decies 20. vigintl vicesimus viceni vicies 21. ■ vigintl unus unus et vigintl vicesimus primus unus et vicesimus vTcenI singuli singuli et vIcenI vicies semel 22, vigintl duo vicesimus secundus vIcenI binl j vicies bis duo et vigintl alter et vicesimus binl et vlcenl 30. triginta tricesimus trlceni tricies 40. quadraginta quadragesimus quadragem quadragies SO. quinquaginta quinquagesimus quinquageni quinquagies 60. sexaginta sexagesimus sexageni sexagies 70. septuaginta septuagesimus septuageni septuagies 80. octoginta octogesimus octogeni octogies 90. nonaginta nonagesimus nonageni nonagies 100. centum centesimus centeni centies 46 INFLECTIONS. Cardinals. Ordinals. Distributives. Adverbs. lOI. centum unus centum et unus centesimus primus centesimus et primus centeni singull ) ^- - ^ . ,- [ centies semel centeni et smguh j 200. ducenti, -ae, -a ducentesimus duceni , ducenties 300. trecenti trecentesimus treceni trecenties 400. quadringenti quadringentesimus quadringeni quadringenties Soo- quingenti quingentesimus quingeni quingenties 600. sescenti sescentesimus sescenT sescenties 700. septingenti septingentesimus septingem septingenties 800. octingenti octingentesimus octingeni octingenties 900. nongenti nongentesimus nongeni nongenties 1,000. mille mlUesimus singula milia milies 2,000. duo milia bis millesimus bina milia bis milies 100,000. centum mllia centies millesimus centena milia centies milies 1,000,000. decies centena decies centies mille- decies centena decies centies milia simus milia milies Note . ensimus and -iens are" often written in the numerals instead of -esimus and [ -igs. Declension of the Cardinals. 80. I . The declension of unus has already been given under § 66. 2. Duo is declined as follows : — A/bm. duo duae duo Gen. duorum duarum duorum Dat. duobus duabus duobus Ace. duos, duo duas duo Adl. duobtis duabus duobus a. So ambo, dot/t, except that its final o is long. 3. Tres is declined, — A^om. tres tria Gen. trium trium Z>aL tribus tribus Ace. tres (tris) tria Al>/. tribus tribus 4. The hundreds (except centum) are declined like the Plural of bonus. 5. Mille is regularly an adjective in the Singular, and indeclinable. In the Plural it is a substantive (followed by the Genitive of the objects enumerated; § 201. i), and is declined, — JVom. milia Ace. milia Gen. milium Voc. milia DaL milibus Adl. milibus NUMERALS. 47 Thus mille homines, a thousand meti; but duo milia hominum, two thousand tnen^ literally two thousands of men. a. Occasionally the Singular admits the Genitive construction ; as, mille hominum. 6. Other Cardinals are indeclinable. Ordinals and Distributives are declined like Adjectives of the First and Second Declensions. Peculiarities in the Use of Numerals. 81. I. The compounds from 21 to 99 may be expressed either with the larger or the smaller numeral first. In the latter case, et is used. Thus : — triginta sex or sex et triginta, thirty-six. 2. The numerals under 90, ending in 8 and 9, are often expressed by subtraction ; as, — duodeviginti, eighteen (but also octodecim) ; undequadraginta, thirty-nine (but also triginta novem or novem et triginta). 3. Compounds over 100 regularly have the largest number first; the others follow without et ; as, — centum viginti septem, 07te hundred and twenty-seven. anno octingentesimo octogesimo secundo, in the year 882. Yet et may be inserted where the smaller number is either a digit or one of the tens ; as, — centum et septem, one hujtdred and seven ; centum et quadraginta, one hundred and forty. 4. The Distributives are used — ^) To denote so 7nuch each, so many apiece ; as, — bina talenta eis' dedit, he gave them two talents each. h) When those nouns that are ordinarily Plural in form, but Singular in meaning, are employed in a Plural sense ; as, — binae litterae, two epistles. But in such cases, uni (not singuli) is regularly employed for one, and trini (not terni) for three ; as, — unae litterae, one epistle ; trinae litterae, three epistles. c) In multiplication ; as, — bis bina sunt quattuor, twice two are four. d^ Often in poetry, instead of the cardinals ; as, — bina hastilia, two spears. +8 INFLECTIONS. C. PRONOUNS. 82. A Pronoun is a word that indicates something with- out naming it. 83. There are the following classes of pronouns : — I. Personal. V. Intensive. II. Reflexive. VI. Relative. III. Possessive. VII. Interrogative. IV. Demonstrative. VIII. Indefinite. , • I. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 84. These correspond to the English /, you, he, she, it, etc., and are declined as follows : — First Person. Second Person. SINGULAR. Third Person. Norn, ego, / tu, thou is, he ; ea, she ; id, // Gen. mei tuT (For declension see § 87.) Dat. mihi ^ tibii Ace. me te Voc. tu AM. me te PLURAL. Nam. nos, we vos,jj/^« _ ( nostrum Gen. \ ( nostri ( vestrum \ vestri Dat. nobis vobis Ace. nos vos Voc. vos Adl. nobis vobTs 1 . A Dative Singular mi occurs in poetry. 2. Empiiatic forms in -met are occasionally found; as, egomet, I myself ; tibimet, to you yourself ; tu has tute and tutemet (written also tutimet). 1 The final i is sometimes long in poetry. PRONOUNS. 49 3. In early Latin, med and ted occur as Accusative and Ablative forms. II. REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS. 85. These refer to the subject of the sentence or clause in which they stand ; like myself, yourself , in * I see myself,' etc. They are decHned as follows : — First Person. Second Person. Third Person. Supplied by oblique Supplied by oblique cases of ego. cases of tu. Gen. mei, of myself tuT, of thyself SUl Dat. mihi, to viyself tibi, to thyself Sibil Ace. Voc. Abl. me, myself te, thyself se or sese me, with myself, etc. te, with thyself, etc. se or sese 1. The Reflexive of the Third Person serves for all genders and for both numbers. Thus sui may mean, of hi?nself herself, itself or of themselves ; and so with the other forms. 2. All of the Reflexive Pronouns have at times a reciprocal force ; as, — inter se pugnant, they fight with each other. 3. In early Latin, sed occurs as Accusative and Ablative. III. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 86. These are strictly adjectives of the First and Second Declensions, and are inflected as such. They are — First Person. Second Person. • meus, -a, -um, my ; tuus, -a, -um, thy ; noster, nostra, nostrum, otir ; vester, vestra, vestrum, your ; Third Person. suus, -a, -um, his, her, its, their. I. Suus is exclusively Reflexive; as, — pater liber os suos amat, the father loves his children. Otherwise, his, her, its are regularly expressed by the Genitive Singular of is, viz. ejus ; and their by the Genitive Plural, eorum, earum. 1 The final i is sometimes long in poetry. so INFLECTIONS. 2. The Vocative Singular Masculine of meus is mi, 3. The enclitic -pte may be joined to the Ablative Singular of the Possessive Pronouns for the purpose of emphasis. This is particularly common in case of suo, sua ; as, suopte, suapte. IV. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 87. These point out an object as here or there, or as previously mentioned. They are — hic, this (where I am) ; iste, that (where you are) ; ille, that (something distinct from the speaker) ; is, that (weaker than ille) ; idem, the same. HTc, iste, and ille are accordingly the Demonstratives of the First, Second, and Third Persons respectively. Hie, this. SINGULAR. PLURAL. Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. Nom . hic haec hoc hi hae haec Gen. hiijus 1 hQjus hujus horum harum horum Dat. huic huic huic his his his Ace. hunc hanc hoc hos has haec Abl. hoc hac hoc his his his Iste, that, that of yours. SINGULAR. PLURAL. Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. Nom . iste ista istud 2 istl istae ista 2 Gen. istius istius istius istorum istarum istorum Dat. isti istI isti istis istis istis Ace. istum istam istud istos istas ista 2 Abl. isto ista istd istls istis istis Ille (archaic oUe), that, that one, he, is declined like iste.^ 1 Forms of hic ending in -s sometimes append -ce for emphasis ; as, hiljusce, this . . . here ; hosce, hisce. When -ne is added, -c and -ce become -ci ; as, huncine, hoscine. 2 For istud, Istuc sometimes occurs ; for ista, istaec. 3 For illud, illuc sometimes occurs. INTENSIVE PRONOUN. — RELATIVE PRONOUN. 5 1 Is, he^ ihis, thai. SINGULAR. PLURAL. Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. Masculine, Feminine. Neuter. Norn. is ea id el, il, (I) eae ea Gen. ejus ejus ejus e5rum earum eorum Dai. el ei el eis, iis els, iis els, iis Ace. eum earn id eos eas ea Abl. eo ea SINGULAR. eo Idem, ihe eis, ils ■ same. els, iis PLURAL. els, iis Mascuune. Feminine. Neuter. Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. No7n. idem eadem idem J eidem 1 \ildem J eaedem eadem Gen. ejusdem ejusdem ejusdem eorundem earundem eorundem Dai. eidem eidem eidem eisdem eisdem eisdem Ace. eundem eandem idem eosdem easdem eadem Abl. eodem eadem eodem eisdem eisdem eisdem The Nom. Plu. Masc. also has idem, and the Dat. Abl . Plu. isdem or iisdem. V. THE INTENSIVE PRONOUN. 88. The Intensive Pronoun in Latin is ipse. It corre- sponds to the English myself, etc., in * / myself, he himself.' SINGULAR. PLURAL. Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. Nom. ipse ipsa ipsum ipsI ipsae ipsa Gen. ipslus ipslus ipslus ipsdrum ipsarum ipsorum Dai. ipsi ipsI ipsI ipsis ipsis ipsis Ace. ipsum ipsam ipsum ipsos ipsas ipsa Abl. ipso ipsa ipso ipsis ipsis ipsis VI. THE RELATIVE PRONOUN. 89. The Relative Pronoun is qm, who. It is declined : — SINGULAR. PLURAL. Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. Nom. qui quae quod qui quae quae Gen. cujus cujus cujus quorum quarum quorum Dai. cui cui cui quibus 2 quibus 2 quibus 2 Ace. quem quam quod quos quas quae Abl. quo 1 quai qu5i quibus ^ quibus 2 quibus 2 1 An ablative qui occurs in quicum, with whom. 2 Sometimes quia. 52 INFLECTIONS. VII. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 90. The Interrogative Pronouns are quis, whof (sub- stantive) and qui, what? what kind off (adjective). PLURAL. Neuter . quid cujus cui quid quo 2. Qui, what f what kind of? is declined precisely like the Relative Pronoun ; viz. qui, quae, quod, etc. a. An old Ablative qui occurs, in the sense oihow? why f b. Qui is sometimes used for quis in Indirect Questions. c. Quis, when limiting words denoting persons, is sometimes an adjective. But in such cases quis homo = what man? whereas qui homo = what sort of man ? d. Quis and qui may be strengthened by adding -nam. Thus: — Substantive : quisnam, who, pray ? quidnam, what, pray ? Adjective : quinam, quaenam, quodnam, of what kind, pray? I. Q uis, who ? SINGULAR Masc. and Fem. Nom. quis Gen. cujus Dat. cui Ace. quem AbL quo The rare Plural follows the de- clension of the Relative Pronoun. VIII. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 91. These have the general force of some one, any one, SUBSTANTIVES. Neut. any one, anything, some one, something. M. AND F. quis, aliquis, quisquam quid, aliquid, quidquam, \ -^ , . \ anything. ';v.ispiam, quidpiam, | ^^-^ ""^' \ anything. quisque, quidque, each. any one {anything) you wish. [ a certain quidam, quae dam, quiddam, | person, \ or thing. quivis, quaevis, quidvis, quilibet.quaelibet, quidlibet, Masc. qui, aliqul. ADJECTIVES. Fem. quae, qua, aliqua, Neut. quod, any. aliquod, any. quisquam, quispiam, quaepiam, quisque, quaeque, quTvis, quaevis, quilibet, quaelibet, quidquam, any I (rare), quodpiam, any. quodque, each. quodvTs, [ ^'^ i you quodlibet, . , [Tmsh. quidam, quaedara, quoddam, acer* tain. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.— PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 53 1. In the Indefinite Pronouns, only the pronominal part is declined. Thus : Genitive Singular alicujus, cujuslibet, etc. 2. Note that aliqui has aliqua in the Nominative Singular Femi- nine, also in the Nominative and Accusative Plural Neuter. Qui has both qua and quae in these same cases. 3. Quidam forms Accusative Singular quendam, quandam ; Geni- tive Plural quorundam, quarundam ; the m being assimilated to n before d. 4. Aliquis may be used adjectively, and (occasionally) aliqui sub- stantively. 5. In combination with ne, si, nisi, num, either quis or qui may stand as a Substantive. Thus : si quis or si qui. 6. Ecquis, any one, though strictly an Indefinite, generally has interrogative force. It has both substantive and adjective forms, — substantive, ecquis, ecquid ; adjective, ecqui, ecquae and ecqua, ecquod. 7. Quisquam is not used in the Plural. 8. There are two Indefinite Relatives, — quicumque and quisquis, whoever. Quicumque declines only the first part ; quisquis declines both, but has only quisquis, quidquid, quoquo, in common use. PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 92. The following adjectives, also, frequently have pro- nominal force : — I . alius, another ; alter, the other ; uter, which of two? (interr.) ; neuter, neither ; whichever of two (rel.) ; unus, one ; nuUus, no one (in oblique cases). 2. The compounds, — uterque, utraque, utrumque, each of two ; utercumque, utracumque, utrumcumque, whoever of two; uterlibet, utralibet, utrumlibet, either one you please ; uter vis, utravis, utrumvis, either one yon please ; alteruter, alterutra, alterutrum, the Ofie or the other. In these, uter alone is declined. The rest of the word remains unchanged, except in case of alteruter, which may decline both parts ; as, — Noin. alteruter altera utra alterum utrum Gen. alterius utrius, etc. 54 INFLECTIONS. Chapter II. — Conjugation, 93. A Verb is a word which asserts something ; as, est, he is ; amat, he loves. The Inflection of Verbs is called Conjugation. 94. Verbs have Voice, Mood, Tense, Number, and Person : — 1 . Two Voices, — Active and Passive. 2. Three Moods, — Indicative, Subjunctive, Imperative. 3. Six Tenses, — Present, Perfect, Imperfect, Pluperfect, Future, Future Perfect. But the Subjunctive lacks the Future and Future Perfect ; while the Imperative employs only the Present and Future. 4. Two Numbers, — Singular and Plural. 5. Three Persons, — ^ First, Second, and Third. 95. These make up the so-called Finite Verb. Besides this, we have the following Noun and Adjective Forms: — 1. Noun Forms, — Infinitive, Gerund, and Supine. 2. Adjective Forms, — Participles (including the Gerundive). 96. The Personal Endings of the Verb are, — Active. Passive. Sing. I. -6; -m; -1 (Perf. Ind.) ; -r. 2. -s ; -sti (Perf. Ind.) ; -to or wanting (Impv.) ; -ris, -re ; -re, -tor (Impv.). 3- -t ; -to (Impv.) ; -tur ; -tor (Impv.).' Plu. I. -mus; -mur. 2. -tis; -stis (Perf. Ind.); -te, -tote (Impv.) ; -mini. 3- -nt ; -erunt (Perf. Ind.) ; -nto (Impv.) ; -ntur; -ntor (Impv.). VERB STEMS. 97. Conjugation consists in appending certain endings to the Stem. We distinguish three different stems in a fully inflected verb, — VERB-STEMS. — THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS. SS I. Present Stem, from which are formed — 1. Present, Imperfect, and Future Indicative, 2. Present afid Imperfect Subjunctive, Active and Pas- 3. The Imperative, 4. The Present Infinitive, 5. The Present Active Participle, the Gerund, and Gerundive. II. Perfect Stem, from which are formed — 1. Perfect, Pluperfect, and Future Perfect Indicative, 1 2. Perfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive, > Active. 3. Perfect Infinitive, J III. Participial Stem, from which are formed — 1 . Perfect Participle, \ 2. Perfect, Pluperfect, and Future Perfect Indicative, 1 3. Perfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive, f 4. Perfect Infinitive, J Apparently from the same stem, though really of different ori- gin, are the Supine, the Future Active Participle, the Future Infinitive Active and Passive. THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS. 98. There are in Latin four regular Conjugations, dis- tinguished from each other by the vowel of the termination of the Present Infitiitive Active, as follows : — Conjugation. Infinitive Termination. Distinguishing Vowel. 1. -are a II. -€re g III. -6re g IV. -Ire i 99. Principal Parts. The Present Indicative, Present Infinitive, Perfect Indicative, and the Perfect Participle ^ constitute the Principal Parts of a Latin verb, — so called because they contain the different stems, from which the full conjugation of the verb may be derived. 1 Where the Perfect Participle is not in use, the Future Active Participle, if it occurs, is given as one of the Principal Parts. S6 INFLECTIONS. CONJUGATION OF SUM. 100. The irregular verb sum is so important for the conjugation of all other verbs that its inflection is given at the outset. PRINCIPAL PARTS. Pres. Ind. Prbs. Inf. Perf. Ind. Fut. Partic.^ sum fui futurus SINGULAR. sum, I am^ es, thou arty est, he is ; eram, /was, eras, th(?7i wast, erat, he was ; ero, / shall be, eris, thou wilt be, erit, he will be ; INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. PLURAL. sumus, we are, estis, you are, sunt, they are. Imperfect. eramus, we were, eratis, you were, erant, they were. Future. erimus, we shall be, eritis, you will be, enint, they will be. fui, / have been, I was, fuisti, thoti hast been, thou wast, fuit, he has been, he was ; Perfect. fuimus, we have been, we were, fuistis, you have been, you were, fuerunt. fuere, J [ they have been, they were. fueram, I had been, fiieras, thou hadst been, fuerat, he had bee7i ; Pluperfect. fueramus, we had been, fueratis, you had been, fuerant, they had been. Future Perfect. fuero, / shall have been, fuerimus, we shall have been, fiieris, thou wilt have been, fueritis, you will have been, fuerit, he will have been ; fuerint, they will have been. 1 The Perfect Participle is wanting in sum. CONJUGATION OF SUM. 57 SUBJUNCTIVE.^ ♦ Present, singular. plural. Sim, may I be, simus, let us be, sis, mayst thou be, sitis, be ye, may you be^ sit, let him be, may he be ; sint, let them be. Imperfect. essem,2 / should be, essemus, ive should be, esses,2 thou wouldst be, essetis, j6>// would be, esset,2 he would be ; essent,2 ^/^^y would be. Perfect. fuerim, / 7nay have been, fuerimus, we may have been, fueria, thoti mayst have been, fueritis, you may have been, fuerit, he may have been ; fuerint, they may have been. Pluperfect. fuissem, / should have been, fuissemus, we should have been, fuisses, thou wouldst have been, fuissetis, you would have been, fuisset, he would have been ; fuissent, they would have been. IMPERATIVE. Pres. ts, be thou; • este,beye, Fut. est 6, thou shall be, estote, ye shall be, esto, he shall be; sunto, they shall be, INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. Pres. esse, to be. Per/, fuisse, to have been. Fid. futurus esse,3 to be about to be. Fut. futurus,* about to be. 1 The meanings of the different tenses of the Subjunctive are so many and so varied, particularly in subordinate clauses, that no attempt can be made to give them here. For fuller information the pupil is referred to the Syntax. 2 For essem, esses, esset, essent, the forms forem, fores, foret, forent are sometimes used. 8 For futurus esse, the form fore is often used. 4 DQclined like bonus, -a, -um. 58 INFLECTIONS. 101. Pres. Ind. am 6 FIRST (OR A-) CONJUGATION. Active Voice. — Amo, / love. PRINCIPAL PARTS. Pres. Inf. Perf. Ind. Perf. Pass. Partic amare amavi amatus INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. SINGULAR. amo, I love, amas, you love, amat, he loves ; amabam, / was loving,^ amabas, you were loving, amabat, he was loving i amabo, I shall love, amabis, you will love, amabit, he will love ; amavi, / have loved, I loved, amavisti, you have loved, you loved, amavit, he has loved, he loved ; PLURAL. amamus, we love, amatis, you love, amant, they love. Imperfect. amabamus, we were loving, amabatis, you were loving, amabant, they were loving. Future. amabimus, we shall love, amabitis, you will love, amabunt, they will love. Perfect. amavimus, we have loved, we loved, amavistis, yotc have loved, you loved. amaverunt, -ere, they have loved,they loved. amaveram, / had loved, amaveras, you had loved, amaverat, he had loved; Pluperfect. amaveramus, we had loved, amaveratis, you had loved, amaverant, they had loved. Future Perfect. amavero, / shall have loved, amaverimus, we shall have loved, amaveris, you will have loved, amaveritis, you will have loved, amaverit, he will have loved; amaverint, they will have loved. 1 The Imperfect also means / loved. FIRST CONJUGATION. 59 SUBJUNCTIVE. Present. SINGULAR. amem, may I love, ames, may you love, amet, let him love ; amarem, / should love, amares, you would love, amaret, he would love ; PLURAL. amemus, lei 7/s love, ametis, inay you love, ament, let them love. Imperfect. amaremus, we shotdd love, amaretis, you would love, amarent, they would love. Perfect. amaverim, / may have loved, amaveris, you tnay have loved, amaverit, he tnay have loved; amaverimus, we may have loved, amaveritis, you 7nay have loved, amaverint, they 7nay have loved. Pluperfect. amavissem, amavisses, you would have loved, amavisset, he would have loved; 2im.diVisseinxLS,wesho7dd have loved, amavissetis, you would have loved, amavissent, they would have loved. IMPERATIVE. Pres. 2X0^, love thou ; amate, love ye. Fut. amato, thou shall love, amatote, /ed. PARTICIPLE. Perfect. amatus, loved, having been loved. Gerundive, amandus, to be loved, deserving to be loved. 1 Fuerim, etc., are sometimes used for sim ; so fuissem, etc., for essem. 2 In actual usage passive imperatives occur only in deponents (§ 112). 62 INFLECTIONS. 103. SECOND (OR B-) CONJUGATION. Active Voice. — Mone5, I advise. PRINCIPAL PARTS. Pres. Ind. Pres. Inf. Perf. Ind. Perf. Pass. ] moneo monere monui INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. moniti SINGULAR. / advise. PLURAL. moneo monemus mones monetis monet Imperfect. monent / was advising^ or / advised. monebam monebamus monebas monebatis monebat Future. / shall advise. monebant monebo monebimus monebis monebitis monebit monebunt Perfect. / have advised, or / advised. monui monuimus monuisti monuistis monuit Pluperfect. I had advised. monuerunt, or -§re monueram monueramus monueras monueratis monuerat Future Perfect. / shall have advised. monuerant monuero monuerimus monueris monueritis monuerit monuerint SECOND CONJUGATION. 63 SINGULAR. moneam moneas moneat SUBJUNCTIVE. Present. May I advise^ let him advise. PLURAL. moneamus moneatis moneant Imperfect. monerem moneres moneret monuenm monuerls monuerit Perfect. / may have advised. moneremus moneretis monerent monuerimus monueritis monuerint Pluperfect I should have advised, he would have advised. monuissem monuisses monuisset Pres. mone, advise thou ; Fut. moneto, thou shall advise^ moneto, he shall advise ; monuissemus monuissetis monuissent IMPERATIVE. monete, advise ye. monetote, ye shall advise, monento, they shall advise. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. Pres. monere, to advise. Pres. monens, advising. Perf. monni'&se, to have advised. (Gen. monentis.) Fut. moniturus esse, to be about F'ut. moniturus, about to advise, to advise. GERUND. Gen. monendi, of advising^ Dat. monendib, for advising. Ace. monendum, advisittg., Abl. monendo, by advising. SUPINE. Ace. monitum, to advise, Abl. monitu, to advise, be advised* 64 INFLECTIONS. 104. SECOND (OR E-) CONJUGATION. Passive Voice. - — Moneor, / am advised. Pres. Ind. moneor PRINCIPAL PARTS. Pres. Inf. moneri Perf. Ind. monitus sum SINGULAR. moneor moneris monetur monebar monebaris, or -re INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. / am advised. Imperfect. I was advised. PLURAL. monemur monemini monentur monebamur monebamini monebantur monebatur Future. I shall be advised. monebor monebimur moneberis, or -re monebimini monebitur monebuntur Perfect. / have been advised^ I was advised. monitus sum moniti sumus monitus es moniti estis monitus est moniti sunt Pluperfect. / had been advised. monitus eram monitus eras monitus erat moniti eramus moniti eratis moniti erant Future Perfect. / shall have been advised. monitus ero monitus eris monitus erit moniti erimua moniti eritis moniti erunt SECOND CONJUGATION. 65 SUBJUNCTIVE. Present. May I be advised, let him be advised. SINGULAR. PLURAL. monear ' moneamur monearis, or -re moneamini moneatur moneantur Imperfect. / should be advised, he would be advised. monerer moneremur monereris, or -re moneremini moneretur monerentur Perfect. / may have been advised. monitus sim moniti simus monitus sis moniti sitis monitus sit moniti sint Pluperfect. / should have been advised, he woidd have been advised. monitus essem moniti essemus monitus esses moniti essetis monitus esset moniti essent IMPERATIVE. Pres. monere, be thou advised ; monemini, be ye advised. Fut. monetor, thou shall be ad- vised, monetor, he shall be advised. monentor, they shall be advised. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. Pres. moneri, to be advised. Perfect. monitus, advised, Perf. monitus esse, to have been having been advised. advised. Gerundive, monendus, to be ad- Fut. monitum iri, to be about to vised, deserving to be advised. be advised. 66 INFLECTIONS. THIRD (OR CONSONANT-) CONJUGATION. 105. Active Voice. — Ktgb, I rule. PRINCIPAL PARTS. Pres. Ind. Pres. Inf. Perf. Ind. Perf. Pass. Partic rego regere rexi rectus INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. SINGULAR. I rule. PLURAL. rego regimus regis regitis regit Imperfect. / was ruling.) or / ruled. regunt regebam regebamus regebas « regebatis regebat Future. I shall rule. regebant regam regemus reges regetis reget Perfect. I have ruled, or / ruled. regent rexi reximus rexisti rexistis rexit Pluperfect. I had ruled. rexerunt, or -ere rexeram rexeramus rexeras rexeratis rexerat Future Perfect. / shall have ruled. rexerant rexero rexerimus rexeris rexeritis rexerit rexerint THIRD CONJUGATION. 67 SUBJUNCTIVE. Present. May I rule, let hitn rule. SINGULAR. plural. regam regas regat Imperfect. regamus regatis regant / should rule, he would rtde. regerem regeres regeret Perfect. / may have rtded. regeremus regeretis regerent rexerim rexerimus rexeris rexeritis rexerit rexerint Pluperfect. / should have ruled, he would have ruled. rexissem rexissemus rexisses rexissetis rexisset rexissent IMPERATIVE. Pres. rege, rule thou ; regite, ride ye. Fut. regito, thou shall rule, regitote, ye shall rule, regito, he shall rule ; regunto, they shall rule. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. Pres. regere, to rule. Pres. regens, ruling. Per/. rexisse, to have ruled. (Gen. regentis.) Fut. recturus esse, to be about to rule. Fut. recturus, about to rule. GERUND. SUPINE. Gen. regendi, of ruling. Dat. regendo, for ruling, Ace. regendum, ruling. Ace. rectum, to rule, Abl. regendo, by ruling. Abl. rectu, to ride, be ruled. 68 INFLECTIONS. THIRD (OR CONSONANT-) CONJUGATION. 106. Passive Voice. — Regor, / am ruled. PRINCIPAL PARTS. Pres. Ind. Pres. Inf. Perf. Ind. regor regi INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. rectus sum SINGULAR. I am ruled. PLURAL. regor regimur regeris regimini regitur Imperfect. I was r tiled. reguntur regebar regebamur regebaris, or - re regebamini regebatur Future. I shall be ruled. regebantur regar regemur regeris, or -re regemini regetur Perfect. regentur / kave been ruled, or / was ruled. rectus sum recti sumus rectus es recti estis rectus est Pluperfect. I had been ruled. recti sunt rectus eram recti eramus rectus eras recti eratis rectus erat Future Perfect. I shall have been ruled. recti erant rectus ero recti erimuB rectus eris recti eritis rectus erit recti erunt THIRD CONJUGATION. 69 SUBJUNCTIVE. Present. May I be ruled, let him be ruled. SINGULAR. regar regaris, or -re regatur PLURAL. regamur regamini regantur MPERFECT. / should be ruled, he would be ruled. regerer regeretuf rectus sim rectus sis rectus sit Perfect. / may have been ruled. regeremur regeremini resferentur recti simus recti sitis recti sint Pluperfect. / should have been ruled, he would have been ruled. rectus essem rectus esses rectus esset recti essemus recti essetis recti essent IMPERATIVE. Pres. vegere, be thou ruled ; regimini, be ye ruled. Fut. regit or, thou shall be rided, regitor, he shall be ruled; reguntor, they shall be ruled. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. Pres. regi, to be ruled. Perfect. rectus, ruled, having Perf. rectus esse, to have been been ruled. rtded. Gerundive, regendus, to be ruled^ Fut. rectum iri, to be about to deserving to be be ruled. ruled. . 70 INFLECTIONS. FOURTH (OR I-) CONJUGATION. 107. Active Voice. — Audio, / hear. PRINCIPAL PARTS. Pres. Ind. Pres. Inf. Perf. Ind. Perf. Pass. Partic. audio audire audivi auditus INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. SINGULAR. / hear. plural. audio audimus audis auditis audit Imperfect. audiunt I was hearings or I heard. audiebam audiebamus audiebas * audiebatis audiebat Future. / shall hear. audiebant audiam audiemus audies audietis audiet Perfect. audient I have heard, or I heard. audfvi audivimus audivisti audi vis tis audivit Pluperfect. I had heard. au diver unt, or -ere audiveram audiveramus audiveras audiveratis audiverat Future Perfect. I shall have heard. audiverant audivero audiverimus audiveris audiveritis audiverit audlverint FOURTH CONJUGATION. 71 SUBJUNCTIVE. Present. May I hear, let him hear. SINGULAR. PLURAL. audiam audiamus au(^ias audiatis audiat audiant Imperfect. / should hear, he would hear. audirem audiremus audires audiretis audiret audirent Perfect. / may have heard. audiverim audiverimus audiveris audiveritis audlverit audiverint Pluperfect. / should have heard, he would have heard. audlvissem audivissemus audivisses audivissetis audivisset audivissent IMPERATIVE. Pres. ZMdi, hear thou ; B.udite, hear ye. Put. audits, thou shall hear, auditote, ye shall hear, audits, he shall hear ; audiunto, they shall hear. INFINITIVE. Pres. audire, to hear. Perf. audivisse, to have heard. Put. to hear. PARTICIPLE. Pres. audiens, hearing. (Gen. audientis.) Put. auditurus, about to hear. GERUND. Gen. audiendi, of hearing, Dat. audiend6,/i?r hearing, Ace. audiendum, hearing, Abl. audiendo, by hearing. Ace. Abl. SUPINE. audi turn, to hear. 72 INFLECTIONS. 108. FOURTH (OR i-) CONJUGATION. Passive Voice. — Audior, / a^n heard. PRINCIPAL PARTS. Pres. Ind. Pres. Inf. Perf. Ind. audior audiri INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. auditus sum SINGULAR. / am heard. plural. audior audimur audiris audimini auditur Imperfect. / was heard. audiuntur audiebar audiebamur audiebaris, or -re audiebamini audiebatur • Future. / shall be heard. audiebantur audiar audiemur audieris, or -re audiemini audietur Perfect. audientur / have been heard, or / was heard. auditus sum audlti sumus auditus es audit! estis auditus est Pluperfect. / had been heard. audlti sunt auditus eram audlti eramus auditus eras audlti eratis auditus erat Future Perfect. / shall have been heard. audlti erant auditus ero audit! erimus auditus eris audlti eritis auditus erit audlti erunt FOURTH CONJUGATION. 73 SUBJUNCTIVE. Present, May I be heard, let him be heard. SINGULAR. PLURAL. audiar audiamur audiaris, or -re audiamini audiatur audiantur Imperfect. / should be heard, he would be heard. audirer audiremur audireris, or -re audiremini audiretur audirentur Perfect. / may have been heard. auditus Sim auditi simus auditus sis auditi sitis auditus sit auditi sint Pluperfect. r should have been heard, he would have bee ft heard. auditus essem auditi essemus auditus esses auditi essetis auditus esset auditi essent IMPERATIVE. Pres. audire, be thou heard] audimini, be ye heard. Fut. auditor, thou shall be heard, auditor, he shall be heard-, audiuntor, they shall be heard. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. Pres. audiri, to be heard. Perfect. auditus, heard. Per/, auditus esse, to have been having been heard. heard. Gerundive, audiendus, to be Fut. audltum iri, to be about to be heard, deserving heard. to be heard. 74 INFLECTIONS. VERBS IN -lO OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 109. I. Verbs in -io of the Third Conjugation take the endings of the Fourth Conjugation wherever the latter endings have two successive vowels. This occurs only in the Present System. 2. Here belong — a) capio, to take ; cupio, to desire ; facio, to make ; f odio, to dig; fugio, to flee; jacio, to throw; pario, to bear; quatio, to shake ; rapio, to seize ; sapio, to taste. b) Compounds of lacio and specie (both ante-classical) ; as, allicio, entice ; conspicio, behold. c) The deponents gradior, to go ; morior, to die ; patior, to suffer. 110. Pres. Ind. capio, Active Voice. — Capio, I take. PRINCIPAL PARTS. Pres. Inf. Perf. Ind. Perf. Pass. Partic. capere, cepT, captus. I . SINGULAR. capi5, capis, capit ; capiebam, -iebas, -iebat ; capiam, -ies, -iet ; cepT, -istl, -it ; ceperam, -eras, -erat; cepero, -eris, -erit ; INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. PLURAL. capimus, capitis, capiunt. Imperfect. capiebamus, -iebatis, -iebant. Future. capiemus, -ietis, -ient. Perfect. cepimus, -istis, -erunt or -ere. Pluperfect. ceperamus, -eratis, -erant. Future Perfect. ceperimus, -eritis, -erint. VERBS IN -10 OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 75 SUBJUNCTIVE. SINGULAR. PRESENT. PLURAL. capiam, -ias, -iat ; capiarnus, -iatis, -iant. Imperfect. caperem, -eres, -eret ; caperemus, -eretis, -erent. Perfect. ceperim, -eris, -erit ; ceperlmus, -erltis, -erint. Pluperfect. cepissem, -isses, -isset ; cepisse mus, -issetis, -issent. IMPERATIVE. Pres. cape; capite. Fut. capito, capitate, capita ; capiunto. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. Pres. capere. .Pres. capiens. Perf. cepisse. Fut. capturus esse. Fut. capturus. GERUND. SUPINE. Gen. capiendT, Dat. capiend5, Ace. capiendum, Ace. captum, Abl. capiendo. Abl. captu. 111. Passive Voice. — Capior, I atn taken. PRINCIPAL PARTS. Pres. Ind. Pres. Inf. Pkrf. Ind. capior, capT, captus sum. singular. capior, caperis, capitur ; INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. PLURAL. capimur, capimini, capiuntur. Imperfect. capiebar, -iebaris, -iebatur ; capiebamur, -iebamini, -iebantur Future. capiar, -ieris, -ietur ; capiemur, -iemini, -ientur. 76 INFLECTIONS. SINGULAR. captus sum, es, est ; captus eram, eras, erat ; captus ero, eris, erit ; capiar, -iaris, -iatur ; caperer, -ereris, -eretur ; captus sim, sTs, sit ; ^ captus essem, esses, esset ; Pres. capere ; Fut. capitor, capitor ; INFINITIVE. Pres. capi. Perf. captus esse. Fut. captum irl. PERFECT. ^^^^^^^ capti sumus, estis, sunt. Pluperfect. capti eramus, eratis, erant. Future Perfect. capti erimus, eritis, erunt. SUBJUNCTIVE. Present. capiamur, -iamini, -iantur. Imperfect. caperemur, -ereminl, -erentur. Perfect. capti simus, sTtis, sint. Pluperfect. capti essemus, essetis, essent. IMPERATIVE. capimini. capiuntor. PARTICIPLE. Perfect. captus. Gerundive, capiendus. DEPONENT VERBS. 112. Deponent Verbs have in the main Passive forms with Active or Neuter meaning. But — a. They have the following Active forms : Future Infinitive, Present and Future Participles, Gerund, and Supine. b. They have the following Passive meanings : always in the Gerundive, and sometimes in the Perfect Passive Participle ; as, — sequendus, to be followed; adeptus, attained. DEPONENT VERBS. 77 113. Paradigms of Deponent Verbs are — I. Conj. miror, mirari, miratus sum, admire, II. Conj. vereor, vereri, veritus sum,y^^r. III. Conj. sequor, sequi, secutus snxn., follow. IV. Conj. largior, largiri, largitus sum, ^/z/^. III. (in -ior) patior, pati, passus sum, suffer. INDICATIVE MOOD. I. II. III. IV. Ill (in -ior), Pres. mIror vereor sequor largior patior mlraris vereris sequeris largiris pateris miratur veretur sequitur largitur patitur miramur veremur sequimur larglmur patimur mlramini veremini sequimini largimini patimini mirantur verentur sequuntur largiuntur patiuntur Imp/. mlrabar verebar sequebar largiebar patiebar Fut. mlrabor verebor sequar largiar patiar Per/. miratus sum veritus sum secutus sum largltus sum passus sum Plup. miratus eram veritus eram secutus eram largltus eram passus eram P.P. miratus ero veritus ero secutus ero largltus ero passus ero SUBJUNCTIVE. Pres. mirer verear sequar largiar patiar Imp/ mirarer vererer sequerer larglrer paterer Per/ miratus sim veritus sim secutus sim largltus sim passus sim Plup. miratus essem veritus essem secutus essem largltus essem passus essem IMPERATIVE. Pres. mirare, etc. verere, etc. sequere, etc. largire, etc. patere. etc. Fut. mirator, etc. veretor, etc. sequitor, etc. largltor, etc. patitor, etc. INFINITIVE. Pres. mirarl vereri sequi larglrl pati Per/ miratus esse veritus esse secutus esse largltus esse passus esse Fut. miraturus esse veriturus esse ; secuturus esse larglturus esse passurus esse PARTICIPLES. Pres. mirans verens sequens largiens patiens Fut. miraturus veriturus secuturus larglturus passurus Per/ miratus veritus secutus largltus passus Ger. mirandus verendus sequendus GERUND. largiendus patiendus mirandl verendi sequendl largiendi patiendl mirando, etc. verendo, etc. sequendo, etc. SUPINE. laigiendo, etc. patiend5, etc. miratum, -tu veritum, -tu secutum, -tu largltum, -tu passum, -sS 78 INFLECTIONS. SEMI-DEPONENTS. 114. I. Semi-Deponents are verbs which have the Pres- ent System in the Active Voice, but the Perfect System in the Passive without change of meaning. Here belong — audeo, audere, ausus sum, to dare, gaudeo, gaudere, gavisus sum, to rejoice. soleo, solere, solitus sum, to be wont. fido, fidere, fisus sum, to trust. 2. The following verbs have a Perfect Passive Participle with Active meaning : — adolesco, grow up ; adultus, having grown up. cenare, dine ; cenatus, having dined. pla-cere, please ; placitus, having pleased, agreeable. prandere, lunch ; pransus, having lunched. potare, drink ; potus, having drunk. jurare, swear ; juratus, having sworn. a. Juratus is used in a passive sense also. 3. Reverter and devertor both regularly form their Perfect in the Active Voice ; viz. — reverter, revert! (Inf.), reverti (Perf.), to return. devertor, deverti (Inf.), deverti (Perf.), to turn aside. PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION. 115. There are two Periphrastic Conjugations, — the Active and the Passive. The Active is formed by com- bining the Future Active Participle with the auxiliary sum, the Passive by combining the Gerundive with the same auxiUary. Active Periphrastic Conjugation. INDICATIVE MOOD. Pres. amattirus (-a, -um) gum, / am about to love. Imp. amattirus eram, / was about to love. Put. amattirus ero, / shall be about to love. Perf. amattirus fui, / have been {was) about to love. Plup. amaturus fueram, / had been about to love. Put. P. amaturus fuero, I shall have been about to love. PECULIARITIES OF CONJUGATION. 79 SUBJUNCTIVE. Pres. amaturus sim, may I be about to love. Imp. amaturus essem, I should be about to love. Per/. amaturus fuerim, / may have been about to love. Plup. amattirus fuissem, / should have been about to love. INFINITIVE. Pres. amaturus esse, to be about to love. Per/. amaturus fuisse, to have been about to love. Passive Periphrastic Conjugation. INDICATIVE. Pres. amandus (-a, -um) sum, / a7n to be loved, must be loved. Imp. amandus eram, / was to be loved. Put. amandus ero, / shall deserve to be loved. Per/. amandus fui, / was to be loved. Plup. amandus fueram, / had deserved to be loved. Put. P. amandus fuero, / shall have deserved to be loved. SUBJUNCTIVE. Pres. amandus sim, may I deserve to be loved. Imp. amandus essem, / should deserve to be loved. Per/. amandus fuerim, / may have deserved to be loved. Plup. amandus fuissem, / should have deserved to be loved. INFINITIVE. Pres. amandus esse, to deserve to be loved. Per/, amandus fuisse, to have dese?-ved to be loved. PECULIARITIES OF CONJUGATION. 116. I. Perfects in -avi, -evi, and -ivi, with the forms derived from them, often drop the ve or vi before endings beginning with r or s. So also novi (from nosco) and the compounds of movi (from moveo). Thus: — amavisti amasti delevisti delesti amavisse amasse delevisse delesse amaverunt amarunt deleverunt delerunt amaverim amarim deleverim delerim amaveram amaram deleveram deleram amaver5 amaro delevera delero novisti nosti noverim norim n5visse nosse n5veram noram audivisti audlsti audivisse audisse 8o INFLECTIONS. 2. In the Gerund and Gerundive of the Third and Fourth Conju- gations, the endings -undus, -undi, often occur instead of -endus and -endi, as faciundus, faciundi. 3. Dico, duco, facio, form the Imperatives, die, due, fae. But compounds of faeio form the Imperative in -fiee, as eonfiee. Com- pounds of dieo, dueo, accent the ultima; as, e due, edic. 4. Archaic and Poetic forms : — a. The ending -ier in the Present Infinitive Passive ; as, amarier, monerier, dieier, for amari, moneri, diei. b. The ending -ibam for -iebam in Imperfects of the Fourth Conjugation, and -ibo for -iam in Futures ; as, seibam, seibo, for seiebam, seiam. c. Instead of the fuller forms, in such words as dixisti, serip- sistis, surrexisse, we sometimes find dixti, seripstis, surrexe, etc. d. The endings -im, -is, etc, (for -am, -as, etc.') occur in a few Subjunctive forms ; as, edim {eat)^ duint, perduint. 5. In the Future Active and Perfect Passive Infinitive, the auxiliary esse is often omitted ; as, aeturum for aeturum esse ; ejeetus for ejeetus esse. FORMATION OF THE VERB STEMS. Formation of the Present Stem. 117. Many verbs employ the simple Verb Stem for the Present Stem ; ^ as, dleere, amare, monere, audire. Others modify the Verb Stem to form the Present, as follows : — 1. By appending the vowels, a, e, 1; as, — juvare. Present Stem juva- (Verb Stem juv-). augere, " " auge- ( " " aug-). vineire, " " vinel- ( " " vine-). 2. By adding i, as eapio, Present Stem eapi- (Verb Stem cap-). 3. By the insertion of n (m before labial-mutes) before the final con- sonant of the Verb Stem ; as, fundo (Stem fud-), rumpo (Stem rup-) . 4. By appending -n to the Verb Stem ; as, — cern-6 pell-6 (for pel-no). 1 Strictly speaking, the Present Stem always ends in a Thematic Vowel (§ or 6) ; as, dic-§-, dic-o- ; ania-§-, ama-o-. But the multitude of phonetic changes involved prevents a scientific treatment of the subject here. See the author's Latin Language. FORMATION OF THE VERB STEMS. 8 1 5. By appending t to the Verb Stem ; as, — flect-6. 6. By appending sc to the Verb Stem ; as, — cresc-6. scisc-6. 7. By Reduplication, that is, by prefixing the initial consonant of the Verb Stem with i ; as, — gi-gii-6 (root gen-), si-st-6 (root sta-). Formation of the Perfect Stem. 118. The Perfect Stem is formed from the Verb Stem ^ 1. By adding v (in case of Vowel Stems) ; as, — amav-i, delev-I, audiv-i. 2. By adding u (in case of some Consonant Stems) ; as, — strepu-i, genu-i, alu-i. 3. By adding s (in case of most Consonant Stems) ; as, — oarp-6, Perfect carps-i. scrib-6, " scrips-i (for scrib-si). rid-eo, " ris-i (for rid-si) . sent-io, " sens-i (for sent-si) . dIc-6, " dix-I {i.e. dic-si). a. Note that before the ending -si a Dental Mute (t, d) is lost ; a Guttural Mute (c, g) unites with s to form x ; while the Labial b is changed to p. 4. Without addition. Of this formation there are three types : — a) The Verb Stem is reduplicated by prefixing the initial con- sonant with the following vowel or e ; as, — curro, Perfect ou-curri. posco, " po-posci. pello, " pe-puli. Note i. — Compounds, with the exception of do, sto, sisto, disco, posco, omit the reduplication. Thus : com-puli, but re-poposci. Note 2. — Verbs beginning with sp or st retain both consonants in the redu- plication, but drop s from the stem ; as, spondeo, spo-pondi ; sto, steti. b) The short vowel of the Verb Stem is lengthened ; as, lego, leg! ; ago, egi. Note that S by this process becomes e, c) The vowel of the Verb Stem is unchanged ; as, verto, verti ; minuo, minui. 82 INFLECTIONS. Formation of the Participial Stem. 119. The Perfect Passive Participle, from which the Participial Stem is derived by dropping -us, is formed : — I . By adding -tus (sometimes to the Present Stem, sometimes to the Verb Stem) ; as, — ama-re, Participle ama-tus. dele-re. a dele-tus. audi-re, a audi-tus. leg-ere, li lec-tus. scrib-ere. a scrip-tus. senti-re. a sen-sus (for sent-tus). caed-ere. u cae-sus (for caed-tus) . a. Note that g, before t, becomes c (see §8,5); b becomes p ; while dt or tt becomes ss, which is then often simpHfied to S (§ 8, 2). 2. After the analogy of Participles like sensus and caesus, where -sus arises by phonetic change, -sus for -tus is added to other Verb Stems ; as, — lab-i. Participle lap-sus. fig-ere, " fi-xus. a. The same consonant changes occur in appending this ending -sus to the stem as in the case of the Perfect ending -si (see § 118, 3, a). 3. A few Verbs- form the Participle in -itus ; as, — doma-re, dom itus. mone-re, mon-itus. 4. The Future Active Participle is usually identical in its stem with the Perfect Passive Participle ; as, ama-tus, amaturus ; moni-tus, moniturus. But — juva-re, Perf. Partic. jutus, has Fut. Act. Partic. juvaturus.i lava-re, u lautus. U i i a lavaturus. • par-ere. ti partus, a i i u pariturus. ru-ere. u -rutus. U i i ii ruiturus. seoa-re. a sectus. U i i a secaturus. fru-i, a -fructus, a i i a f ruiturus. mor-i, a a mortuus, u a i i u moriturus. orl-ri, a a ortus. a U ( i u oriturus. 1 But the compounds of juvo sometimes have -juturus ; as, adjuturus. LIST OF THE MOST IMPORTANT VERBS. 83 . LIST OF THE MOST IMPORTANT VERBS, WITH PRINCIPAL PARTS. First (A-) Conjugation. 120. I. Perfect in -VI. amo amare amavi amatus love All regular verbs of the First Conjugation follow this model. poto potare potavi potus (§114, 2) drink II. Perfect in - ui. crepo crepare crepuT crepiturus rattle cubo cubare cubui cubiturus lie down domo domare do mm domitus tame fried fricare fricui frictus and fricatus rub mico micare micul glitter dimico dimicare dimicavi dimicatum (est)i fight ex-plic5 explicare explicavi (-uT) explicatus (-itus) mifold im-plic5 implicare : implicavi (-uT) implicatus (-itus) entwine seco secare secuT sectus cut sono sonare sonuT sonata rus sound tono tonare tonuT thunder veto vetare vetuT vetitus forbid III. Perfect in -i with Lengthening of the Stem Vow] juvo juvare juvi jutus help lav5 lavare lavl lautus wash IV. Perfect Reduplicated. sta stare steti staturus V. Deponents. These are all regular, and follow miror^ mirdri^ 7nirdtus sum. Second (^-) Conjugation. 121. I. Perfect in -VI. dele5 delere delevi deletus destroy flea flere flevi fletus weep, lament com-plea 2 complere complevi completus fill up aboleo abolere abolevi abolitus destroy deas ciere cTvi citus set in motion 1 Used only impersonally. 2 §© impUo, expleo. 3 Compounds follow the Fourth Conjugation : accio, acclre, etc. 84 INFLECTIONS. II. Perfect in -UI. a. Type -eo, -ere, -ui, -itus. arceo arcere coerceo coercere exerceo exercere caleo calere careo doleo habeo debe5 praebeo jace5 mere5 mone5 no ceo pare5 placed tace5 terre5 valeo carere dolere habere debere praebere j ace re merere monere nocere parere placere tacere terrere valere arcui coercui exercui calul carui dolui habui debui praebui jacuT menii monul nocui paruT placui tacul terrui valuT coercitus exercitus caliturus cariturus doliturus habitus debitus praebitus jaciturus meritus monitus nocitum (est) pariturus placiturus taci turns territus valiturus keep off hold in check practise be warm be without grieve have owe offer lie earn. advise injure obey please be silent frighten be strong deserve Note i. — The following lack the Participial Stem : — egeo emineo flore5 horred lateo niteo oleo palle5 pate5 rubeo siled splendeo studeo stuped timeo torpeo vigeo vireo egere eminere florere horrere latere nitere olere pall ere patere rubere silere splendere studere stupere timere torpere vigere virere egui eminuT * - florui horruT latui nitui olui pallul patuT rubui siluT splendui studui stupui timui torpui vigui virui and others. want stand forth bloom bristle hirk gleam smell be pale lie open be red be silent gleam study be amazed fear be dull flourish be green LIST OF THE MOST IMPORTANT VERBS. 85 Note 2. — The following are used only in the Present aveo avere frigeo frige re immineo imminere maereo maerere polled pollere System : — wish be cold overhang mourn be strong and others. b. Type -eo, -ere, -ui, -tus (-sus). censeo censere censul census estimate doceo docere docuT doctus teach misceo miscere miscui mixtus mix teneo tenere tenui hold So contineo and sustineo . ; but — retineo retinere retinui retentus retain obtineo obtinere obtinui obtentus maintain torreo torrere torrui tostus bake III. Perfect in -SI. augeo augere auxT auctus increase torqueo torquere tors! tortus twist indulged indulge re indulsi indulge luce5 luce re luxi be light lugea lugere luxT mourn jubeo jubere jussi jussus order per-mulceo permulcere permulsi permulsus soothe rideo ride re rIsT risum (est) laugh suadeo suadere suasi suasum (est) advise abs-tergeo abstergere abstersi abstersus wipe off arde5 ardere arsi arsurus burn haereo haerere haesi haesurus stick maneo manere raansi mansurus stay algeo algere alsi be cold fulgeo fulgere fulsi gleam urged urgere ursi press IV. Perfect in -I with Reduplication. mordeo mordere momordi morsus bite spondeo spondere spopondi spdnsus pro7nise tonded tondere totondi tdnsus shear pended pendere pependi hang 86 INFLECTIONS. V. Perfect in -I WITH Lengthening of Stem Vowel. caveo cave re cavi cauturus take care faveo favere favi fauturus favor fovea fovere fovi fatus cherish moved movere mo VI motus move pave5 pavere pavl fear sede5 sedere sedi sessurus sit vide5 videre vidi visus see voveo vovere VOVl votus vow VI. Perfect in -1 without either Reduplication or Length- ening OF Stem Vowel. fervea fervere (fervi, ferbui) boil prandea prandere prandi pransus (§ 114, 2 ) lunch stridea stride re stridi creak VIL Deponents. liceor liceri licitus sum bid polliceor polliceri pollicitus sum promist^ mereor merer! meritus sum earn misereor misereri miseritus sum pity vereor vereri veritus sum fear fateor fateri fassus sum confess canfiteor canfiterl confessus sum confess reor reri ratus sum think medeor mederl V heal tueor tueri protect Third (Consonant) Conjugation. 122. L Verbs with Present Stem ending in a Consonant. 1. Perfect in -si. a. Type -6, -gre, -SI, -tus. carpa carpere carpsi carptus pluck sculpa sculpere sculps! sculptus chisel repo repere reps! creep serpa serpere serps! crawl scrlba scribere scrips! scriptus write nuba nubere nupsi nupta (woman only) marry rega regere rex! rectus govern LIST OF THE MOST IMPORTANT VERBS. 87 tego tegere texT tectus cover af-flTg5 affllgere affllxi afflictus shatter ^ dico dicere dixi dictus say duco ducere duxT ductus lead coqu5 coquere COXl coctus cook traho trahere traxi tfactus draw veho vehere vexl vectus carry cingo cingere cTnxT cTnctus gird ting5 . tingere tlnxl tinctus dip jungo jungere junxi junctus join fingo fingere flnxl ffctus mould pingo pingere pTnxT pTctus paint stringo stringere strinxT strictus bind -stinguo 1 -stinguere -stinxT -stinctus blot out unguo unguere unxi unctus anoint VIVO vivere vixi vTctum (est) live gero gerere gessi gestus carry uro urere ussT ustus burn temn5 temnere con-tempsT con-temptus despise b. Type -6, -ere, -si, -sus. figo figere fixT fixus fasten merg5 mergere mersi mersus sink spargo spargere sparsT sparsus scatter flecta flectere flexl flexus bend necta nectere nexui (nexl) nexus twine mitta mittere mTsi missus send rada radere rasT rasus shave roda radere rasi rasus gnaw vado vadere -vasi 2 -vasum (est)' ^ march, walk luda ludere lusT lusum (est) play truda trudere trusT trusus push laeda laedere laesi laesus injure, hurt clauda claudere clausT clausus close plauda plaudere plausT plausum (est) clap explado expladere explasT explasus hoot off ceda cedere cessT cessum (est) withdraw divida ■ dividere divisT divisus divide prema pre mere press! pressus press 1 Fully conjugated only in the compounds : exstinguo^ restinguo, distinguo. 2 Only in the compounds : evado, invado, pervado. 88 INFLECTIONS. 2. Perfect in -i with Reduplication. ab-do abdere abdidi abditus conceal red-d5 red-dere reddidi redditus return So addo , condoj dedo , per do, pro do, trddo, etc. c5n-sisto consistere constiti take one'^s stand resisto resistere restiti resist circumsisto circumsister£ circumsteti surround cado cadere cecidi casurus fall caeda caedere cecidi caesus kill ' pendo pendere pependi pensus weigh, pay tendo tendere tetendi tentus stretch tundo tundere tutudi tusus, tunsus beat fallo fallere fefelli (falsus, as Adj.^ ) deceive pello pellere pepulT pulsus drive out curr5 currere cucurrT cursum (est) rim parco parcere pepercT parsurus spare can5 canere cecini sing tango tangere tetigi tactus touch pungo pungere pupugi punctus prick Note. - - In the following verbs the perfects were originally redupli- cated, but have lost the reduplicating syllable : — per-cello percellere percuH perculsus strike down findo findere fidi fissus split scindo scindere scidi scissus tear apart tollo tollere sus-tulr sublatus remove 3. Perfect in -i with Lengthening \ of Stem Vowel. ago agere eg! actus drive, do perag5 peragere peregi peractus finish subigo subigere subegl subactus subdue cogo cogere coegi coactus force, gather frango frangere fregi fractus break perfringo perfringere perfregi perfractus break down lego legere leg! lectus gather, read perleg5 perlegere perlegi perlectus read through colligo colligere collegi collectus collect deligo deligere delegi delectus choose diligo dlligere dilexi dilectus love intelleg5 intellegere intellexi intellectus understand neglegd neglegere neglexi neglectus neglect LIST OF THE MOST IMPORTANT VERBS. 89 emo emere emi emptus btiy coemo coemere coemi coemptus buy up redimo redimere rede ml redemptus buy back dirim5 dirimere dire ml diremptus destroy demo demere dempsi demptus take away sumo sumere sumpsi sumptus take promo promere prampsi (pramptus, as Adj.) take out vinco vincere vTcT victus conquer re-linquo relinquere reliquT rellctus leave rumpo rumpere rupi ruptus break edo esse (§ 128) edi esus eat funda fundere fudi fusus pour 4. Perfect in -1 without either Reduplication or Lengthening U Stem Vowel. excudo excudere excudi excusus hammer consTdd cansTdere cansedi take one's seat possid5 possTdere possedi possessus take pos- session accenda accendere accendl accensus kindle a-scendo ascendere ascend! ascensum (est) climb de-fen do defendere defend! defensus defend pre-hendo prehendere prehendi prehensus seize ic5 icere ICl ictus strike vello vellere vein vulsus pluck verto vertere vert! versus turn panda pandere pandT passus spread solvo solvere solvT solutus loose vis5 vis ere visi visus visit volva vol V ere volvT volutus roll verra verrere verri versus sweep 5. Perfect in -ui. in-cumbo incumbere incubui incubiturus lean on gigno gignere genu! genitus bringforth mola molere moluT molitus grind voma vomere vomul vomitus vomit frema fremere fremuT snort gemo gemere gemuT sigh meto metere messui messus reap 90 INFLECTIONS. tremo tremere tremuT tremble strep5 strepere strepui rattle alo alere aim altus (alitus) nourish colo colere coluT cultus cultivate incolo incolere incolui inhabit excolo excolere excolui excultus perfect consulo consulere consulul consul tus consult c5nsero conserere conserui consertus join desero deserere deseniT desertus desert disserd disserere disseruT discourse tex5 texere texuT textus weave 6. Perfect in -VI. sin5 sinere sivi situs allow desino desinere desii desitus cease pono ponere posul positus place ob-lino oblinere oblevT oblitus smear sero serere sevT satus sow c5nsero conserere consevi consitus plant cern5 cernere separate discerno discernere discrevi discretus distinguish decerno decernere decrevi decretus decide spernd spernere sprevi spretus scorn sterno sternere stravi stratus spread pro-sterno prosternere pr5stravi prostratus overthrow peto petere petivT (petii) petitus seek appeto appetere appetivl appetltus long for tero terere trivi tritus rub quaero quaerere quaesTvT quaesTtus seek acqulr5 acquTrere acquTsTvI acquTsitus acquire arcess5 arcessere arcessTvI arcessitus summon capess5 capessere capessTvT capessltus seize lacesso lacessere lacessivi lacessitus provoke 7. Used only in Present System. ango angere choke lamb5 lambere lick claudo claudere be lame fiird fiirere rave vergd vergere bend and a few others. LIST OF THE MOST IMPORTANT VERBS. 91 II. Verbs with Present Stem ENDING IN -U. induo induere indui indutus put on imbu5 imbuere imbui imbutus moisten luo luere luT wash pollu5 polluere pollu! pollutus defile minu5 minuere minuT minutus lessen statu5 statuere statu! statutus set up constituo constituere constituT constitutus determine suo suere SUl sutus sew tribuo tribuere tribul tributus allot ruo mere nil ruiturus fall diruo diruere dirui dirutus destroy obruo obruere obrui obrutus overwhelm. acuo acuere acuT sharpen arguo arguere argui acctise congruo congruere congruT agree metuo metuere metuT fear ab-nuo abnuere abnui decline re-spu5 respuere respui reject struo struere struxl structus build fluo fluere - fluxi (fluxus, as Adj.) flow III. Verbs with Present Stem ENDING IN -I. cupio cupere cupivi cup!tus wish sapid sapere sapTvT taste rapio rapere rapuT raptus snatch diripio diripere diripuT d!reptus plunder conspicio c5nspicere conspexi conspectus gaze at aspicio aspicere aspexl aspectus behold illicio illicere illexT ijlectus allure pellicio pellicere pellexi pellectus allure elicio elicere elicui elicitus elicit c(liatio quatere quassus shake concutio concutere concuss! concussus shake pari5 parere peper! partus bring forth capio capere cep! captus take accipio accipere accep! acceptus accept incipio incipere incep! inceptus begin facio facere fee! factus 7nake afficio afficere affec! affectus affect Passive, afficior, afific!, affectus sum. 92 INFLECTIONS. So other prepositional compounds, perficio, perficior ; interficio. inter ficior ; etc. But — assuefacio assuefacere assuefecl assuefactus accustom Passive, assuefio, assuefieri, assuefactus sum. So also patefacio, pate/id ; cale/acid, cale/id ; and all non-prepositional com- pounds. jacio abicio fodio fugio eifugio jacere abicere fodere fugere effugere jeci abjeci fodi fug! eflfugi jactus abjectus fossus fugitOrus IV. I. posco disco pasco pascor cresco consuesc5 quiesc5 adolesco obsolesco nosco ignosco agnosc5 Verbs in -SCO. Verbs in -sco from Simple Roots. poscere discere pascere pascT crescere consuescere quiescere adolescere obsolescere noscere ignoscere agnoscere poposci didici pavi pastus sum crevi c5nsuevl quievi adolevi obsolevi novi ignovT agnovi cognosco cognoscere cognovi pastus cretus consuetus quietiirus adultus ignoturus agnitus cognitus hurl throw away dig flee escape demand learn feed graze grow accustom one^s self be still grow up grow old I become acquainted \ with pardon recognize get acquainted with 2. Verbs in -sco formed from other Verbs. These usually have Inchoative or Inceptive meaning (see § 155. i). When they have the Perfect, it is the same as that of the Verbs from which they are derived. • floresco florescere floruT begin to bloom (floreo) scisc5 scTscere scTvi enact (scia) aresco calesco arescere calescere anil calui becojne dry become hot (areo) (caleo) consenesco consenescere consenui grow old (seneo) extimesco extimescere extimui fear greatly (timeo) ingemTsc5 adhaeresco ingemiscere adhaerescere ingemuT adhaesi sigh stick (gem5) (haereo) LIST OF THE MOST IMPORTANT VERBS. 93 3. Verbs in -SCO derived from Adjectives, usually with Inchoative meaning. obduresco obdurescere obdurul grow hard (durus) evanesco evanescere evanuT disappear (vanus) percrebresco percrebrescere percrebrul grow fresh (creber) maturesco maturescere matiirui grow ripe (maturus) obmutesco obmutescere obmutui grow dumb (mutus) V. Deponents. fungor fungi functus sum perform queror queri questus sum complain loquor loquT locutus sum speak sequor sequT secutus sum follow fruor frul fruitiirus enjoy perfruor perfrui perfructus sum thoroughly enjoy labor labi lapsus sum glide amplector amplect! amplexus sum embrace nltor niti nlsus sum, nixus sum strive gradior gradi gressus sum walk patior pati passus sum suffer perpetior perpetl perpessus sum endure utor uti usus sum use morior mori mortuus sum die adipTscor adipiscT adeptus sum acquire comminlscoi comminTsci commentus sum" invent remimscor reminiscT reinember nan CIS cor nancTsci nanctus (nactus) sum acquire nascor nasci natus sum be born oblivTscor oblivTscT oblitus sum forget paciscor pacTscT pactus sum covenant proficTscor proficTscI profectus sum set out ulcTsror ulclscl ultus sum avenge Trascor irascT (Tratus, as Adj.) be angry vescor vescT eat Fourth Conjugation. 123. I. Perfect ends in -VI. audio audire audlvi auditus hear So all regular Verbs of the Fourth Conjugation, sepelio sepelTre sepellv'i sepultus bury 94 INFLECTIONS. II. ] Perfect ends IN -ui. aperio aperire aperui apertus open operia operire operuT opertus cover salio salire saluT leap III. Perfect ends IN -si. saepio saepTre saepsT saeptus hedge in sancid sancTre sanxi sanctus ratify vincio vincTre vinxi vinctus bind amici5 amicire amictus envelop fulcio fulcTre fulsT fultus prop up refercio refercire refers! refertus fill sarcio sarcTre sarsi sartus patch haurid haurire hausi haustus draw sentio sentire sens! sensus feel IV. Perfect in -I WITH LENGTHENING OF Stem Vowel, venio venire vem ventum ( est) come advenio advenire adveni adventum (est) arrive invenio invemre invenl inventus find V. Perfect with Loss of Reduplication. reperio reperire repperi repertus find comperid comperire comperl compertus learn VI. Used only in the Present. ferio ferire strike esuria esurire be hungry VII. Deponents. largior largiri largitus sum bestow So many others. experior experiri expertus sum try opperior opperirT oppertus sum await ardior ardiri arsus sum begin orior oriri ortus sum arise Orior usually follows the Third Conjugation in its inflection ; as^ oreris, oritur, or^mur ; orerer (Imp. Subj.) ; orere (Imper.). metior metiri mensussum 7neasure^ sissentior assentiri assensussum assent IRREGULAR VERBS. 95 IRREGULAR VERBS. 124. A number of Verbs are called Irregular. The most important are sum, do, edo, fero, volo, nolo, malo, eo, fio. The peculiarity of these Verbs is that they append the personal endings in many forms . directly to the stem, instead of employing a connecting vowel, as fer-s (2d Sing, of fer-6), instead of fer-i-s. They are but the relics of what was once in Latin a large class of Verbs. 125. The Inflection of sum has already been given. Its various compounds are inflected in the same way. They are — absum abesse afui am absent Pres. Pariic. absens (absentis), absent. adsum adesse adfui am present desum deesse defuT am lacking insum inesse infui am in intersum interesse interful atn among praesum praeesse praeful am in charge of Pres. Partic. praesens (praesentis),/r^ is it honorable or base ? honestum est an turpe, J suntne di annon, are there gods or not ? a. An was not originally confined to double questions, but in- troduced single questions, having the force of -ne, nonne, or num. Traces of this use survive in classical Latin ; as, — A rebus gerendis abstrahit senectus. Quibus? An eis quae juventute geruntur et viribus ? Old age (it is alleged) withdraws men from active pursuits. From what pursidts ? Is it not jnerely from those which are carried on by the strength of youth ? SIMPLE AND COMPOUND SENTENCES. II9 5. Answers. a. The answer Yes is expressed by ita, etiam, vero, sane, or by repetition of the verb ; as, — *visne locum mutemus?' 'sane.' '•Shall we change the place f ' ' Certainly.'' '■ estisne vos legati? ' ' sumus.' ' Are you envoys ? ' * Ves.'' b. The answer No is expressed by non, minime, minime vero, or by repeating the verb with a negative ; as, — ' jam ea praeteriit ? ' '• non.' < Has it passed? ' ' No.'' '■ estne f rater intus ? ' * non est.' * Is your brother within f ' 'No.'' SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 163. The two essential parts of a sentence are the Sub- ject and Predicate. The Subject is that concerning which something is said, asked, etc. The Predicate is that which is said, asked, etc., concerning the Subject. * SIMPLE AND COMPOUND SENTENCES. 164. Sentences containing but one Subject and one Predicate are called Simple Sentences, those containing more are called Compound Sentences. Thus puer libros legit, the boy reads books, is a Simple Sentence ; but puer libros legit et epistulas scribit, the boy reads books and writes letters, is a Compound Sentence. The different members of a Compound Sentence are called Clauses. 165. Coordinate and Subordinate Clauses. Clauses which stand upon an equality are called Coordinate; a Clause dependent upon another is called Subordinate. Thus in puer libros legit et epistulas scribit the two clauses are Coordinate ; but in puer libros legit quos pater scribit, the boy reads the books which his father writes^ the second clause is Subordinate to the first. I20 SYNTAX. Chapter II. — Syntax of Nouns, SUBJECT. 166. The Subject of a Finite Verb (i.e. any form of the Indicative, Subjunctive, or Imperative) is in the Nomi- native Case. 1. The Subject may be — a) A Noun or Pronoun; as, — puer scribit, the boy writes ; hic scribit, th's man writes. b) An Infinitive ; as, — decdrum est pro patria xnori, to die for one's country is a noble thing. c) A Clause ; as, — opportune aocidit quod vidisti, it happened opportunely that you saw. 2. A Personal Pronoun as Subject is usually implied in the Verb, and is not separately expressed ; as,. — scribo, / write ; videt, he sees. a. But for the purpose of emphasis or contrast the Pronoun is expressed ; as, — ego scribo et tu legis, Iwrite, and you read. 3. The verb is sometimes omitted when it can be easily supplied from the context, especially the auxiliary sum ; as, — recte ille {sc. facit), he does rightly ; consul profectus (sc. est), the consul set out. PREDICATE NOUNS. 167. A Predicate Noun is one connected with the Sub- ject by some form of the verb Sum or a similar verb. , 168. A Predicate Noun agrees with its Subject in v^ase , as, 1 For the Predicate Genitive, see \\ 198, 3; 203, 5. PREDICATE NOUNS.— APPOSITIVES. 121 Cicero orator f uit, Cicero was an orator ; Numa creatus est rex, Nu7na was elected king. 1 . When possible, the Predicate Noun usually agrees with its Sub- ject in Gender also ; as, — philosophia est vitae m3.^i^tia., philosophy is the guide of life. 2. Besides sum, the verbs most frequently accompanied by a Predi- cate Noun are — ^) fio, evado, exsisto ; maneo ; videor ; as, — Croesus non seniper mansit rex, Croesus did not always remain king. b) Passive verbs of making, calling, regarding, etc. ; as, creor, appellor, habeor ; as, — Romulus rex appellatus est, Romulus was called kifig ; habitus est deus, he was regarded as a god. APPOSITIVES. 169. I. An Appositive is a Noun explaining or defin- ing another Noun denoting the same person or thing; as, — ■ Cicero consul, Cicero, the Consul; urbs Roma, the city Rome. . 2. An Appositive agrees with its Subject in Case; as, — opera Ciceronis oratoris, the works of Cicero, the orator ; apud Herodotum, patrem historiae, in the works of Herodotus, the father of history. 3. When possible, the Appositive agrees with its Subject in Gen- der also ; as, — assentatio adjutrix v\t\.bx\x.va., flattery , the promoter of evils. 4. A Locative may take in Apposition the Ablative of urbs or oppidum, with or without a preposition ; as, — Corinthi, Achaiae urbe, or in Achaiae urbe, at Corinth, a city of Greece. 5. Partitive Apposition. A Noun denoting a whole is frequently followed by an Appositive denoting a part ; as, — milites, fortissimus quisque, hostibus restitgrunt, the soldiers, all the bravest of them, resisted the enemy. 122 SYNTAX. THE CASES. THE NOMINATIVE. 170. The Nominative is confined to its use as Subject, Appositive, or Predicate Noun, as already explained. See §§ 166-169. THE VOCATIVE. 171. The Vocative is the Case of direct address ; as, — credite mihi, judices, believe 7ne^ judges. 1. By a species of attraction, the Nominative is occasionally used for the Vocative, especially in poetry and formal prose ; as, audi tii, populus Albanus, hear ye^ Alban people I 2. Similarly the Appositive of a Vocative may, in poetry, stand in the Nominative ; as, nate, mea magna poteutia solus, O son, alone the source of my great power. THE ACCUSATIVE. 172. The Accusative is the Case of the Direct Object. 173. The Direct Object may express either of the two following relations : — A . The Person or Thing Affected by the action ; as, — consulem interfecit, he slew the consul; lego librum, I read the book. B. The Result Produced by the action ; as, — librum scrips!, I wrote a book {i.e. produced one) ; templum struit, he constructs a temple. 174. Verbs that admit a Direct Object of either of these two types are Transitive Verbs. a. Verbs that regularly take a Direct Object are sometimes used without it. They are then said to be employed absolutely; as, — rumor est meum gnatiun amare, it is rumored that my son is in love. THE ACCUSATIVE. 1 23 Accusative of the Person or Thing Affected. 175. I. This is the most frequent use of the Accu- sative ; as in — parentes amamus, we love our parents ; mare aspicit, he gazes at the sea. 2. The following classes of Verbs taking an Accusative of this kind are worthy of note : — «) Many Intransitive Verbs, when compounded with a Preposi- tion, become Transitive. Thus : — i) Compounds of circum, praeter, trans ; as, — hostes circumstare, to surround the enemy ; urbem praeterire, to pass by the city ; muros transcendere, to climb over the walls. 2) Less frequently, compounds of ad, per, in, sub ; as, — adire urbem, to visit the city ; peragrare Italiam, to travel through Italy ; inire magistratum, to take office ; subire periculum, to undergo danger. b) Many Verbs expressing emotions, regularly Intransitive, have also a Transitive use ; as, — queror fatum, I la?nent 7ny fate ; doleo ejus mortem, I grieve at his death ; rideo tuam stultitiam, I laugh at your folly. So also lugeo, maereo, i7iotirn ; gemo, bemoan ; horreo, shudder, and others. c) The impersonals decet, // becomes ; dedecet, it is unbecom- ing; juvat, it pleases, take the Accusative of the Person Affected ; as, — me decet haec dicere, // becomes me to say this. d) In poetry many Passive Verbs, in imitation of Greek usage, are employed as Middles (§ 256, i ; 2), and take the Accu- sative as Object; as, — galeam induitur, he puts on his helmet ; cinctus tempera hedera, having bound his temples with ivy ; nodo sinus collecta, having gathered her dress in a knot. 124 SYNTAX. Accusative of the Result Produced. 176. I. The ordinary type of this Accusative is seen in such expressions as — librum scribo, / write a book ; domum aedifico, / dm7d a house. 2. Many Verbs usually Intransitive take a Neuter Pronoun, or Adjective, as an Accusative of Result. Thus : — a) A Neuter Pronoun ; as, — haec gemebat, he made these moans ; idem gloriari, to make the same boast ; eadem peccat, he makes the same mistakes. b) A Neuter Adjective, — particularly Adjectives of nufnber or amount, — multum, multa, pauca, etc. ; also nihil ; as, — multa egeo, / have many needs ; pauca studet, he has few interests; multum valet, he has great strength ; nihil peccat, he makes no mistake. Note. — In poetry other Adjectives are freely used in this construction ; as, — minitantem vana, making vain threats ; acerba txxeiis, giving a fierce look ; dulce loquentem, sweetly talking. 3- The adverbial use of several Neuter Pronouns and Adjectives grows out of this Accusative ; as, — multum sunt in vSnatione, they are much eiigaged in hunting. a. So also plurimum, very greatly; plerumque, generally; aliquid, somewhat; quid, why? nihil, not at all; etc. 4. Sometimes an Intransitive Verb takes an Accusative of Result which is of kindred etymology with the Verb. This is called a Cog- nate Accusative, and is usually modified by an Adjective ; as, — sempiternam servitutem serviat, let him serve an everlasting slavery ; vitam duram vixi, / have lived a hard life. a. Sometimes the Cognate Accusative is not of kindred ety- mology, but merely of kindred meaning ; as, — stadium currit, he runs a race ; Olympia vincit, he wins an Olympic victory. THE ACCUSATIVE. 12$ 5. The Accusative of Result occurs also after Verbs of tastzn^" a.nd smelling] as, — piscis mare sapit, the fish tastes of the sea ; orationes antiquitatem redolent, the speeches smack of the past. • Tw^o Accusatives — Direct Object and Predicate Accusative. 177. I. Many Verbs of Making, Choosing, Calling, Showing, and the like, take two Accusatives, one of the Person or Thing Affected, the other a Predicate Accusa- tive; as, — me heredem fecit, he 7Hade me heir. Here me is Direct Object, heredem Predicate Accusative. So also — eum judicem cepere, they took hitn as judge', urbem Romam vocavit, he called the city Rome', se virum praestitit, he showed himself a man. 2. The Predicate Accusative may be an Adjective as well as a Noun ; as,— homines caecos reddit cupiditas, covetousness renders men blind', Apollo Socratem sapientissimum judicavit, Apollo adjudged Soc- rates the wisest man. a. Some Verbs, as reddo, usually admit only an Adjective as the Predicate Accusative. 3. In the Passive the Direct Object becomes the Subject, and the Predicate Accusative becomes Predicate Nominative (§ 168. 2. <^) ; as,-- urbs Roma vocata est, the city was called Rome. a. Not all Verbs admit the Passive construction ; reddo and efQcio, for example, never take it. Two Accusatives — ; Person and Thing. 178. I. Some Verbs take two Accusatives, one of the Person Affected, the other of the Result Produced. Thus : — ^) Vtrhs oi requesting 2LTid demanding; as, — otium' divos rogat, he asks the gods for rest ; me duas orationes postulSs, you demand two speeches of me. 126 SYNTAX. So also oro, posco, reposco, exposco, flagito, though some of these prefer the Ablative with ab to the Accusative of the Person ; as, — opera a te posoo, / demand aid of you. b) Verbs of teaching (doceo and its compounds) ; as, — te litter as doceo, I teach you yoiir letters. c) Y trhs oi inquiring ; as, — te haec rogo, I ask you this ; te sententiam rogo, I ask you your opinion. a) Several Special Verbs ; viz. moneo, admoneo, commoneo, cogo, accuso, arguo, and a few others. These admit only a Neuter Pronoun or Adjective as Accusative of the Thing ; as, — hoc te moneo, I give you this advice; me id accusas, you bring this accusation against me ; id cogit nos natura, nature compels us (to) this. e) One Verb of conceali?ig, celo ; as, — non te celavi sermonem, / have not concealed the conver- sation from you. 2. In the Passive construction the Accusative of the Person becomes the Subject, and the Accusative of the Thing is retained ; as, — omnes artes edoctus est, he was taught all accomplishments ; rogatus sum sententiam, / was asked jny opinion ; multa admonemur, we are given many ad7nonitions . a. Only a few Verbs admit the Passive construction. Two Accusatives -with Compounds. 179. I. Transitive compounds of trans may take two Accusatives, one dependent upon the Verb, the other upon the Preposition ; as, — milites flumen transportat, he leads his soldiers across the river. 2. With other compounds this construction is rare. 3. In the Passive the Accusative dependent upon the preposition is retained ; as, — ■ milites flumen traducebantur, the soldiers were led across the river. THE ACCUSATIVE. \^J Synecdochical (or Greek) Accusative. 180. I . The Synecdochical (or Greek) Accusative denotes the pari to which an action or quahty refers ; as, — tremit arttis, literally, he trembles as to his limbs, i.e. his limbs tremble; ntida genu, lit. bare as to the knee, i.e. witH knee bare ; * mantis revinctus, lit. tied as to the hands, i.e. with hands tied. 2. Note that this construction — a) Is borrowed from the Greek. b) Is chiefly confined to poetry. c) Usually refers to a part of the body. d) Is used with Adjectives as well as Verbs. Accusative of Time and Space. 181. I. Duration of Time and Extent of Space are denoted by the Accusative ; as, — quadraginta annos vixit, he lived forty years ; hie locus passus sescentos aberat, this place was six hundred paces away ; arbores quinquaginta pedes altae, trees fifty feet high ; abhinc septem annos, seven years ago. 2. Emphasis is sometimes added by using the Preposition per; as, per biennium laboravi, I toiled throughout two years. Accusative of Limit of Motion. 182. I. The Accusative of Limit of Motion is used — ^) With names of Towns, Small Islands, and Peninsulas ; as, — Romam veni, / ca^/^e to Rome ; Athenas proficiscitur, he sets out for Athens', Delum perveni, I arrived at Delos. b) With domum, domos, rus ; as, — domum revertitur, he returns hojtie ; rus ibo, / shall go to the coimtry. Note. — When domus means house {i.e. building), it takes a prep- osition; as, — in domum veterem remigrare, to move back to an old house. 128 SYNTAX. 2. Other designations of place than those above mentioned require a Preposition to denote Limit of Motion ; as, — ad Italiam venit, he came to Italy. a. The Preposition is also customary with the Accusatives urbem or oppidum when they stand in apposition with the name of a town ; as, — Thalam, in oppidum magnum, to Thala, a large town ; Genavam ad oppidum, to the town Geneva. b. The name of a town denoting limit of motion may be com- bined with the name of a country or other word dependent upon a preposition ; as, — Thurios in Italiam pervectus, ca?'ried to Thurii in Italy ; cum Acen ad exercitum venisset, when he had come to the army at Ace. 3. To denote toward^ to the vicinity of, in the vicinity of., ad is used ; as, — ad Tarentum veni, / came to the vicinity of Tarentum ; ad Cannas pugna facta est, a battle was fought near Cannae. 4. In poetry the Accusative of any noun denoting a place may be used without a preposition to express the limit of motion ; as, — Italiam venit, he cattie to Italy. 5. The goal notion seems to represent the original function of the Accusative Case. Traces of this primitive force are recognizable in the phrase infitias ire, to deny (lit. to go to a denial), and a few other similar expressions. Accusative in Exclamations. 183. The Accusative, generally modified by an Adjec- tive, is used in Exclamations ; as, — me miserum, ah, wretched me ! O fallacem spem, oh, deceptive hope I Accusative as Subject of the Infinitive. 184. The Subject of the Infinitive is put in the Accusa- tive ; as, — video hominem abire, I see that the man is going away. THE ACCUSATIVE. — THE DATIVE. 1 29 Other Uses of the Accusative. 185. Here belong — 1. Some Accusatives which were originally Appositives ; viz. — id genus, of that kind ; as, homines id genus, men of that kind (originally homines, id genus hominum, men^ that kind of men) ; virile secus, muliebre secus, of the 7nale sex^ of the female sex; meam vicem, tuam vicem, etc., for my part, etc. ; bonam partem, magnam partem, in large part ; maximam partem, for the most part. 2. Some phrases of doubtful origin ; as, — id temporis, at that time ; quod si, dut if; id aetatis, at that time ; cetera, in other respects. THE DATIVE. 186. The Dative case, in general, expresses relations which are designated in English by the prepositions to and for. Dative of Indirect Object. 187. The commonest use of the Dative is to denote the person to whom something is given, said, or done. Thus : — I. With transitive verbs in connection with the Accu- sative ; as, — hanc pecuniam mihi dat, he gives me this money ; haec nobis dixit, he said this to us. a. Some verbs which take this construction (particularly dono and circumdo) admit also the Accusative of the per- son along with the Ablative of the thing. Thus : — Either Themistocli munera donavit, he presented gifts to Themistocles, or Themistoclem mijneribus donavit, he presented Themis- tocles with gifts ; urbi muros circumdat, he btiilds walls around the city, or urbem muris circumdat, he surrounds the city with walls. I30 SYNTAX. II. With many intransitive verbs; as, — nulli labor! cedit, he yields to no labor. a. Here belong many verbs signifying favor^ help, injure, please, displease, trust, distrust, command, obey, serve, resist, indulge, spare, pardon, envy, threaten, be angry, believe, persuade, and the like ; as, — Caesar popularibus favet, Caesar favors (i.e. is favor- able to) the popular party ; amicis conf ido, / trust {to) my friends ; Orgetorix Helvetiis persuasit, Orgetorix persuaded {made it acceptable to) the Helvetians ; bonis nooet qui mails parcit, he injures {does harm to) the good, who spares the bad. Note. — It is to be borne in mind that these verbs do not take the Dative by virtue of their apparent Enghsh equivalence, but simply because they are m transi- tive, and adapted to an indirect object. Some verbs of the same apparent English equivalence are transitive and govern the Accusative; as, juvo, laed5, delecto. Thus : audentes deus juvat, God helps the bold; nerainem laesit, he injured no one. b. Verbs of this class are used in the passive only impersonally ; as, — tibi parcitur, you are spared; mihi persuadetur, I am being persuaded] ei invidetur, he is envied. c. Some of the foregoing verbs admit also a Direct Object in connection with the Dative ; as, — mihi mortem mlnitatur, he threatens me with death {threatens death to me) . III. With many verbs compounded with the preposi- tions : ad, ante, circum, com,^ in, inter, ob, post, prae, pro, sub, super. These verbs fall into two main classes, — I . Many simple verbs which cannot take a Dative of the indirect object become capable of doing so when compounded with a preposi- tion ; as, — afflictis succurrit, he helps the afflicted; exercitui praef uit, he was in^ command of the army ; intersum consiliis, / share in the deliberations. 1 Many such verbs were originally intransitive in English also, and once gov- erned the Dative. " This was the original form of the preposition cum. THE DATIVE. TJI 2. Many transitive verbs which take only a direct object become capable, when compounded, of taking a dative also as indirect object; as, — pecuniae pudorem anteponit, he puts honor before money ; inicere spem amicis, to inspire hope in one'^s frie7ids ; munitioni Labienum praefecit, he put Labienus in charge of the fortifications. Dative of Reference. 188, I. The Dative of Reference denotes the person to whom a statement refers^ of whom it is true^ or to whom, it is of interest ; as, — mihi ante ooulos versaris, jj/^?/ hover before my eyes (lit. hover before the eyes to me^ ; illi severitas amorem non deminuit, in his case severity did not diminish love (lit. to him severity did not dijninish') ; interoludere inimiois commeatuui, to cut off the supplies of the enemy. a. Note the phrase alicui interdicere aqua et igni, to interdict one from fire and water. Note. — The Dative of Reference, unlike the Dative of Indirect Object, does not modify the verb, but rather the sentence as a whole. It is often used where, according to the English idiom, we should expect a Genitive ; so in the first and third of the above examples. 2. Special varieties of the Dative of Reference are — ^) Dative of the Local Standpoint. This is regularly a participle; as, — oppidum primum Thessaliae venientibus ab Epiro, the first town of Thessaly as you come from Epirus (lit. to those C07ning from Epirus') . b) Ethical Dative. This name is given to those Dative con- structions of the personal pronouns in which the connection of the Dative with the rest of the sentence is of the very slightest sort ; as, — tu mihi istius audaoiam dSf endis ? tell me, do you defend that man''s audacity f quid mihi Celsus agit ? what is my Celsus doing f 132 SYNTAX. c) Dative of Person Judging ; as, — erit ille mihi semper deus, ke will always be a god to me {i.e. in my opinion) ; quae ista servitus tarn claro homini, how can that be slavery to so illustrious a rnan (i.e. to his mind) ! d) Dative of Separation. Some verbs of taking away, especially compounds of ab, de, ex, ad, govern a Dative of the person, less often of the thing ; as, — hondrem detraxerunt homini, they took away the honor from the man ; Caesar regi tetrarchiam eripuit, Caesar took the tetrarchy away from the king ; silici sointillam exoudit, he struck a spark from the flint. Dative of Agency. 189. The Dative is used to denote agency — 1 . Regularly with the Gerundive ; as, — haec nobis agenda sunt, these things must be done by us ; mihi eundum est, / must go (lit. it must be gone by me). a. To avoid ambiguity, a with the Ablative is sometimes used with the Gerundive; as, — hostibus a nobis parcendum est, ike enemy must be spared by us. 2. Much less frequently with the compound tenses of the passive voice and the perfect passive participle ; as, — disputatio quae mihi nuper habit a est, the discussion which was recently conducted by me. 3. Rarely with the uncompounded tenses of the passive ; as, — honesta bonis viris quaeruntur, noble ends are sought by good men. Dative of Possession. 190. The Dative of Possession occurs with the verb esse in such expressions as : — mihi est liber, / have a book ; mihi nomen est Marcus, / have the name Marcus. I. But with nomen est the name is more commonly attracted into the Dative ; as, mihi Marco nomen est. THE DATIVE. 1 33 Dative of Purpose or Tendency. 191. The Dative of Purpose or Tendency designates the end toward which an action is directed or the direction in which it tends. It is used — 1 . Unaccompanied by another Dative ; as, — castris locum deligere, to choose a place for a camp ; legiones praesidio relinquere, to leave the legions as a guard (lit. for a guard ) ; receptui canere, to sound the signal for a retreat. 2. Much more frequently in connection with another Dative of the person : — a) Especially with some form of esse ; as, — fortunae tuae mihi curae Bunt, your fortunes are a care to me {lit. for a care) ; quibus sunt odio, to whom they are an object of hatred', cui bono ? to whom is it of advantage ? b) With other verbs ; as, — hos tibi muneri misit, he has sent these to you for a present ; Pausanias Atticis venit auxilio, Pausanias came to the aid of the Athenians (lit. to the Athenians for aid). 3. In connection with the Gerundive ; as, — decemviri legibus scribundis, decemvirs for codifying the laws; me gerendo bello ducem creavere, me they have made leader for carrying on the war. Note. — This construction with the gerundive is not common till Livy. Dative with Adjectives. 192. The use of the Dative with Adjectives corresponds very closely to its use with verbs. Thus : — I. Corresponding to the Dative of Indirect Object it occurs with adjectives signifying : friendly, unfriendly, similar, dissimilar, equal, near, related to, etc. ; as, — mihi inimicus, hostile to me ; sunt proximi Germanis, they are next to the Germans ; noxiae poena par esto, let the penalty be equal to the damage. 134 SYNTAX. a. For propior and proximus with the Accusative, see §141,3- 2. Corresponding to the Dative of Purpose, the Dative occurs with adjectives signifying : suitable, adapted^ fit ; as, — castris idoneus locus, a place fit for a camp ; apta dies sacriflcio, a day suitable for a sacrifice. Note. — Adjectives of this last class often take the Accusative with ad. Dative of Direction. 193. In the poets the Dative is occasionally used to denote the direction of motion ; as, — it clamor caelo, tke shout goes heavenward', cineres rivo fluent! jace, cast the ashes toward a flowing stream. I. By an extension of this construction the poets sometimes use the Dative to denote the limit of motion ; as, — dum Latio deos inferret, till he should bring his gods to Latium. THE GENITIVE. 194. The Genitive is used with Nouns, Adjectives, and Verbs. GENITIVE WITH NOUNS. 195. With Nouns the Genitive is the case which defines the meaning of the limited noun more closely. This relation is generally indicated in English by the preposition of. There are the following varieties of the Genitive with Nouns : — Genitive of Origin, Objective Genitive, Genitive of Material, Genitive of the Whole, Genitive of Possession, Appositional Genitive, Subjective Genitive, Genitive of Quality. 196. Genitive of Origin ; as, — Marcl filius, the son of Marcus., 197. Genitive of Material ; as, — talentum auri, a talent of gold ; acervus frumenti, a pile of grain. THE DATIVE.— THE GENITIVE. I35 198. Genitive of Possession or Ow^nership ; as, — domus Ciceronis, Cicero's house. 1. Here belongs the Genitive with causa and gratia. The Geni- tive always precedes ; as, — \iorcL\vi\iTCi C2i\is>2i, for the sake of men', meorum amicorum gratia, y^r the sake of my friends. 2. The Possessive Genitive is often used predicatively, especially with esse and fieri ; as, — domus est regis, the house is the king's ; stulti est in err ore manere, it is (the /fart) of a fool to rertiain in error ; de bello judicium imperatoris est, non militum, the decision con- cerning war belongs to the general, not to the soldiers. a. For the difference in force between the Possessive Genitive and the Dative of Possession, see \ 359, i. 199. Subjective Genitive. This denotes the person who makes or produces something or who has a feeling ; as, — dicta Platonis, the utterances of Plato ; timores liberorum, the fears of the children. 200. Objective Genitive. This denotes the object of an action or feeling; as, — metus deorum, the fear of the gods ', amor libertatis, love of liberty ; consuetude bonorum hominum, intercourse with good men. I. This relation is often expressed by means of prepositions ; as, — amor erga parentes, love toward one''s parents. 201. Genitive of the "Whole. This designates the whole of which a part is taken. It is used — I. With Nouns, Pronouns, Comparatives, Superlatives, and Ordinal Numerals ; as, — magna pars hominum, a great part of mankind; duo milia peditum, two thousand foot-soldiers ; quis mortalium, who of mortals f major fratrum, the elder of the brothers ; gens maxima German orum, the largest tribe of the Germans; primuB omnium, the frst of all. 136 SYNTAX. a. Yet instead of the Genitive of the Whole we often find ex or de with the Ablative, regularly so with Cardinal numbers and quidain ; as, — fldelissimus de servis, the most trusty of the slaves ; quidain ex amicis, certain of his friends ; unus ex militibus, 07ie of the soldiers. b. In English we often use of where there is no relation of whole to part. In such cases the Latin is more exact, and does not use the Genitive ; as, — quot VOS estis, how many of you are there ? trecenti conjuravimus, three hundred of us have conspired {i. e. we, three hundred in number). 2. The Genitive of the Whole is used also with the Nominative or Accusative Singular Neuter of Pronouns, or of Adjectives used sub- stantively; also with the Adverbs parum, satis, and partim when used substantively ; as, — quid consili, what purpose ? tantum cibi, so much food; plus auctdritatis, 7nore authority ; minus lab oris, less labor ] satis pecuniae, enough money; parum industriae, too little industry. a. An Adjective of the second declension used substantively may be em- ployed as a Genitive of the Whole ; as, nihil boni, nothing good. b. But Adjectives of the third declension agree directly with the noun they limit; as, nihil dulcius, nothing sweeter. 3. Occasionally we find the Genitive of the Whole dependent upon Adverbs of place ; as, — ubi terrarum ? ubi gentium ? where in the world f a. By an extension of this usage the Genitive sometimes occurs in depend- ence upon pridie and postridie, but only in the phrases pridie ejus diei, on the day before that ; postridie ejus diei, on the day after that. 202. Appositional Genitive. The Genitive sometimes has the force of an appositive ; as, — nomen regis, the name of king ; poena mortis, the penalty of death; ars scribendi, the art of writing. 203. Genitive of Quality. The Genitive modified by an Adjec- tive is used to denote quality. This construction presents several varieties. Thus it is used — THE GENITIVE. 1 37 1 . To denote some internal or permanent characteristic of a person or thing ; as, — vir magnae virtutis, a 7nan of great virtue ; rationes ejus modi, considerations of that sort. a. Only a limited number of Adjectives occur in this construction, chiefly mag-nus, maximus, summus, tantus, along with ejus. 2. To denote measure {breadth, length, etc.') ; as, — fossa quindecim pedum, a trench fifteen feet wide (or deep) ; exsilium deoem anuorum, an exile of ten years. 3. Equivalent to the Genitive of Quality (though probably of different origin) are the Genitives tanti, quanti, parvi, magni, minoris, pluris, minimi, plurimi, maximi. These are used predicatively to denote indefinite value ; as, — nulla studia tanti sunt, no studies are of so nnich value ; magni opera ejus existimata est, his assistance was highly esteemed. 4. By an extension of the notion of value, quanti, tanti, pluris, and minoris are also used with verbs of buying and sellifig, to denote indefinite price ; as, — quanti aedes emisti, at how high a price did you purchase the house f 5. Any of the above varieties of the Genitive of Quality may be used predicatively; as, — tantae molis erat Romanam condere gentem, of so great difficulty was it to found the Roman race. GENITIVE WITH ADJECTIVES. 204. The Genitive is used with many Adjectives to limit the extent of their application. Thus : — I . With adjectives signifying desire, knowledge, familiarity, mem- ory, participation, power, fullness, and their opposites ; as, — studiosus disoendi, desirous of learning', peritus belli, skilled iii war ; insuetus laboris, unused to toil ; immemor mandati tui, unmindful of your commission ; plena perioulorum est vita, life is full of dangers, a. Some participles used adjectively also take the Genitive ; as, — dilig-ens veritatis,/i7«d? of truth ; amans patriae, devoted to one's country. 138 SYNTAX. 2. Sometimes with proprius and communis ; as, — viri propria est fortitude, bravery is characteristic of a man. memoria est communis omnium artium, memory is common to all professions. a. proprius and comraunis are also construed with the Dative. 3. With similis the Genitive is the commoner construction in Cicero, when the reference is to living objects ; as, — filius patris simillimus est, the son is exactly like his father; mei similis, like me \ vestri similis, like you. When the reference is to things, both Genitive and Dative occur ; as, — mors somno (or somni) similis est, death is like sleep. 4. In the poets and later prose writers the use of the Genitive with Adjectives is extended far beyond earher limits; as, atrox 2^n\vc^, fierce of temper ; incer- tus consili, undecided in purpose. GENITIVE WITH VERBS. 205. The Genitive is used with the following classes of Verbs : — Memini, Reminiscor, Obliviscor. 206. I. When referring to Persons — a. mem.ini always takes the Genitive of personal or reflexive pronouns ; as, — mei m.emineris, remember me ! nostri meminit, he reinembers us. With other words denoting persons memini takes the Accusative, rarely the Genitive ; as, — SuUam memini, / recall Sulla ; vivorum memini, / remember the living. b. obliviscor regularly takes the Genitive ; as, — Epicuri non licet oblivisci, we mustnH forget Epicurus. 1. When referring to Things, memini, reminiscor, oblivis- cor take sometimes the Genitive, sometimes the Accusative, without difference of meaning ; as, — animus praeteritorum meminit, the mind remetnbers the past ; meministine nomina, do you remember the names ? reminiscere veteris incommodi, remember the former disaster : reminiscens acerbitatem, re7nembering the bitterness. THE GENITIVE. 1 39 a. But neuter pronouns, and adjectives used substantively, regularly stand in the Accusative ; as, — haec memini, / reynember this ; multa reminiscor, / remember many things. 3. The phrase mihi (tibi, etc.) in mentem venit, following the analogy of memini, takes the Genitive ; as, — mihi patriae veniebat in mentem, / remembered my country. Admoneo, Commoneo, Commonefacio. 207. These verbs, in addition to an Accusative of the person, occasionally take a Genitive of the thing; as, — te veteris amicitiae commonefacio, / remind you of our old friendship . a. But more frequently (in Cicero almost invariably) these verbs take de with the Ablative ; as, — me admones de ^ovovq, you remind me of your sister. b. A neuter pronoun or adjective used substantively regularly stands in the Accusative (178. 1. d)\ as, — te hoc admoneo, I give you this warning. Verbs of Judicial Action. 208. I. Verbs of Accusing, Convicting, Acquitting take the Genitive of the charge ; as, — me fiirti accusat, he accuses me of theft ; Verrem avaritiae coarguit, he convicts Verres of avarice ^ impietatis absolutus est, he was acquitted of blasphemy. 2. Verbs of Condemning take — a. The Genitive of the charge ; as, — pecuniae publicae condemnatus, condemned (on the cha?ge) of embezzlement (lit. public 7noney') ; capitis damnatus, condemned on a capital charge (lit. on a charge involving his head). b. The Ablative of the penalty ; as, — capite damnatus est, he was condemned to death ; mille nummis damnatus est, he was condemned (to pay) a thousand sesterces (lit. by a thousand sesterces, Abl. of Means). I40 SYNTAX. 3. Note the phrases : — VOti damnatus, voti reus, having attained ones prayer (lit. condemned on the score of one's vow) ; de vi, {accused, convicted, etc.) of assault ; inter sicarios, {accused, convicted, etc.) of murder. Genitive -w^ith Impersonal Verbs. 209. I. The Impersonals pudet, paenitet, miseret, taedet, piget take the Accusative of the person affected^ along with the Genitive of the person or thing toward whom the feeling is directed ; as, — pudet me tui, / am ashamed of yoii (Ht. it shames m,e of you) \ paenitet me hujus facti, I repent of this act ; eum taedet vitae, he is weary of life; pauperum te miseret, you pity the poor. a. Instead of the Genitive of the thing we often find an Infinitive or Neuter Pronoun used as subject of the verb. Thus : — me paenitet hoc fecisse, / repent of having done this ; me hoc pudet, / am ashamed of this. 2. Misereor and miseresco also govern the Genitive; as, — miseremini soci5rum, pity the allies. Interest, RSfert 210. With interest, it concerns^ three points enter into consideration ; viz. — a) t)\Q person concerned ; b) the thing about which he is concerned ; ^) the extent of his concern. 211. I. The person concerned is regularly denoted by the Genitive; as, — patris interest, it concerns the father. a. But instead of the Genitive of the personal pronouns, mei, tui, nostri, vestri, the Latin uses the Ablative Singular Feminine of the Possessive, viz. : mea, tua, etc. ; as, — mea interest, it concerns me. THE GENITIVE. I41 2. The thing about which a person is concerned is denoted — a) by a Neuter Pronoun as subject ; as, — hoc rei publicae interest, this concerns the state. F) by an Infinitive ; as, — omnium interest valere, // concerns all to keep well. c) by an Indirect Question ; as, — mea interest quando venias, / a^n concerned as to when you are coming. 3. The degree of concern is denoted — a) by the Genitive (cf. § 203, 3) : magni, parvi, etc. ; as, — mea magni interest, it concerns me greatly. b) by the Adverbs, magnopere, magis, maxime, etc. ; as, — civium minime interest, it concerns the citizefis very little. c) by the Neuters, multum, plus, minus, etc. ; as, — multum vestra interest, // concerns you much. 4. Refert follows interest in its construction, except that it rarely takes the Genitive of the person. Thus : — mea refert, // concerns me ; but rarely illius refert, it concerns him. Genitive -with Other Verbs. 212. I. Verbs of Plenty and Want sometimes govern the Genitive ; as, — pecuniae indiges, you need money. a. These verbs more commonly take the Ablative (§ 214, i) ; indiged is the only verb which has a preference for the Genitive. 2. Potior, though usually followed by the Ablative, sometimes takes the Genitive, almost always so in Sallust ; and regularly in the phrase : potiri rerum, to get control of affairs. 3. In poetry some verbs take the Genitive in imitation of the Greek; as, — desine querellarum, cease your complaints ; operum ^o\xiX\, freed from their tasks. 142 SYNTAX. THE ABLATIVE. 213. The Latin Ablative unites in itself three cases which were originally distinct both in form and in meaning ; viz. — The Ablative or from-case. The Instrumental or with- case. The Locative or where-case. The uses of the Latin Ablative accordingly fall into Genuine Ablative uses, Instrumental uses, and Locative uses. < GENUINE ABLATIVE USES. Ablative of Separation. 214. The Ablative of Separation is construed sometimes with, sometimes without, a preposition. I. The following words regularly take the Ablative without a preposition : — a) The Verbs oi freeing: libero, solvo, levo ; b) The Verbs of depriving: privo, spolio, exuo, fraudo, niido ; c) The Verbs oi lacking: egeo, careo, vaco ; d^ The corresponding Adjectives, liber, inanis, vacuus, nudus, and some others of similar meaning. Thus : — curls Vi}ciQX2it\x&^ freed from cares] Caesar hostes armis exuit, Caesar stripped the enemy of their arms ; caret sensu communi, he lacks common sense', auxilio eget, he needs help ; bonorum vita vacua est metii, the life of the good is free from fear. Note i. — Yet Adjectives and libero may take the preposition ab, — regu- larly so with the Ablative of persons ; as, — urbem a tyranno liber arunt, they freed the city from ike tyrant. Note 2. — Indigeo usually takes the Genitive. See § 212, i, a. THE ABLATIVE. I43 2. Of Verbs signifying to keep from, to remove, to withdraw, some take the preposition, others omit it. The same Verb often admits both constructions. Examples :' — abstinere cibo, to abstain from food ; hostes finibus prohibuerunt, they kept the enemy from their borders] praeddnes ab insula prohibuit, he kept the pirates from the island. 3. Other Verbs of separation usually take the Ablative with a Prep- osition, particularly compounds of dis- and se- ; as, — dissentid a te, / dissent from you ; secernantur a nobis, let them be separated from us. 4. The Preposition is freely omitted in poetry. Ablative of Source. 215. The Ablative of Source is used with the participles natus and ortus (in poetry also with editus, satus, and some others), to designate /^;r«/^^^ or station ; as, — Jove natus, son of Jupiter ; summo loco natus, high-born (lit. born from a very high place) ; nobili genere ortus, born of a noble family. 1 . Pronouns regularly (nouns rarely) take ex ; as, ex me natus, sprung frojn me* 2. To denote remoter descent, ortus ab, or oriundus. (with or without ab), is used ; as, — ab Ulixe oriundus, descended from Ulysses. Ablative of Agent. 216. The Ablative accompanied by a (ab) is used with passive verbs to denote the personal agent ; as, — a Caesaire accusatus est, he was arraigned by Caesar. 1. Collective nouns referring to persons, and abstract nouns when personified, may be construed as the personal agent. Thus : — hostes a fortuna deserebantur, the enemy were deserted by Fortune ; a multitudine hostiuni mdntes tenebantur, the motmtains were held by a midtitude of the enemy. 2. Names of animals sometimes admit the same construction. Thus : — a canibus laniatus est, he was torn to pieces by dogs. 144 SYNTAX. Ablative of Comparison. 217. I. The Ablative is often used with Comparatives in the sense of than ; as, — melle duloior, sweeter than honey, patria mihi vita carior est, my country is dearer to fne than life. 2. This construction, as a rule, occurs only as a substitute for quam (Jhan) with the Nominative or Accusative. In other cases quam must he used ; as, — tui studiosior sum quam illius, I am fonder of you than of him. Studiosior illo would have meant, / am fonder of you than he is. Plus, minus, amplius, longius are often employed as the equiv- alents of plus quam, minus quam, etc. Thus : — amplius viginti urbes inoenduntur, tnore than twenty cities are fired] minus quinque milia processit, he advanced less than five miles. 3. Note the use of opinione with Comparatives ; as, — opinione celerius venit, he comes more quickly than expected (lit. than opinion) . INSTRUMENTAL USES OF THE ABLATIVE. Ablative of Means. 218. The Ablative is used to denote means or instru- ment ; as, — Alexander sagitta vulneratus est, Alexander was wounded by an arrow. There are the following special varieties of this Ablative : — I. Utor, fruor, fungor, potior, vesoor, and their compounds take the Ablative ; as, — divitiis utitur, he uses his wealth (lit. he benefits hims^f by his wealth) ; vita fruitur, he enjoys life (lit. he enjoys himself by life) ; munere fungor, I perform my duty (lit. I busy myself with duty) ; carne vesountur, they eat flesh (\ii. feed themselves by 7neans of) ; castris potitus est, he got possession of the camp (lit. made himself powerful by the camp) . a. Potior sometimes governs the Genitive. See § 212, 2. I THE ABLATIVE. I45 2. With opus est (rarely usus est), there is need; as, — duce nobis opus est, we need a leader. a. A Neuter Pronoun or Adjective often stands as subject with opus as predicate. Thus : — hoc mihi opus est, this is necessary for me. b. An ordinary substantive rarely stands as subject. Thus dux n5bis opus est is a rare form of expression. c. Note the occasional use of a perfect passive participle with opus est ; as, — opus est properato, there is need of haste. 3. With nitor, innixus, and fretus ; as, — nititur hasta, he rests on a spear (lit. supports himself by a spear) ; fretus virtute, relying on virtice (lit. supported by virtue) . 4. With contineri, consistere, constare, consist of ; as, — i nervis et ossibus continentur, they consist of sinews and bones (lit. they are held together by sinews and bones) ; mortal! consistit corpore mundus, the world consists of mortal sub- stance (lit. holds together by means of etc.). 6. In expressions of the following type : — quid hoc homine facias, what ca7i you do with this man f quid mea Tulliola fiet, what will become of my dear Tullia f (lit. what will be done with my dear Tullia f) 7. In the following special phrases at variance with the ordinary English idiom : — proelio contendere, vincere, to contend, conquer in battle ; proelio lacessere, to provoke to battle ; curru vehl, to ride in a chariot ; pedibus Ire, to go on foot ; castris se tengre, to keep in camp. 8. With Verbs oi filling and Adjectives oi plenty ; as, — fossas virgultis complerunt, they filled the trenches with brush. a. But plenus more commonly takes the Genitive. See ^ 204, i. 9. Under 'Means' belongs also the Ablative of the Way by Which ; as, — vinum Tiber! devectum, wine brought down {by) the Tiber. 146 SYNTAX. 10. The means may be a person as well as a thing. Thus : — militibus a lacu Lenianno ad montein Juram murum perdticit, with (i.e. by means of) Ms troops he runs a wall from Lake Geneva to Mt. Jura. Ablative of Cause. 219. The Ablative is used to denote cause ; as, — miilta gloriae cupiditate fecit, he did many things on account of his love of glory. 1 . So especially witb verbs denoting mental states ; as, delector, gaudeo, laetor, glorior, fido, confido. Also with contentus; as, — f ortuna amici gaudeo, / rejoice at the fortune of my friettd {i.e. on account of it) ; victoria sua gloriantur, they exult over their victory ; natura loci confidebant, they trusted in the character of their cotmtry (lit. were confdent on accomit of the character). a. fido and confido always take the Dative of the person (§ 187. II. a) ; sometimes the Dative of the thing. 2. As Ablatives of Cause are to be reckoned also such Ablatives as jussu, by order of injussu, without the order, rogatu, etc. Ablative of Manner. 220. The Ablative with cum is used to denote manner ; as, — cum gravitate loquitur, he speaks with dignity. 1. The preposition may be absent when the Ablative is modified by an adjective ; as, — magna gravitate loquitur, he speaks with great dignity. 2. The preposition is regularly absent in the expressions jure, injuria, joco, vi, fraude, voluntate, furto, silentio. 3. A special variety of the Ablative of Manner denotes that in ac- cordance with which or in pursuance of which anything is or is done. It is generally used without a preposition. Thus : — mea sententia, according to my opinion ; suis moribus, in accordance with their custom ; sua sponte, voluntarily, of his (their) own accord; ea condicione, on these terjns. THE ABLATIVE. 1 47 Ablative of Attendant Circumstance. 221. The Ablative is often used to denote an attendant circumstance of an action or an event ; as, — bonis auspiciis, under good auspices ; nulla est altercatid clamoribus umquam. habita majoribus^ na debate was ever held binder circumstances of greater applause ; exstinguitur ingenti luctu provinciae, he dies under circumstances of great grief on the part of the province ; longo intervallo sequitur, he follows at a great distance. Ablative of Accompaniment. 222. The Ablative with cum is used with verbs of motion to denote accompaniment ; as, — cum comitibus profectus est, he set out with his attendants ', Cum febri domum rediit, he returned home with a fever. I. In military expressions the Ablative may stand without cum when modified by any adjective except a numeral ; as, — omnibus copiis, ingenti exercitu, magna manu ; but usually cum exercitu, cum duabus legionibus. Ablative of Association. 222 A. The Ablative is often used with verbs oi joinings mixings clinging^ exchanging ; also with assuesco, consuesco, assuefacio, and some others to denote association ; as, — improbitas scelere juncta, badness joined with criitte ; aer calore admixtus, air mixed with heat ; assuetus labore, accustomed to (lit. familiari:sed with) toil; pacem bello permutant, they change peace for (lit. with) war. Ablative of Degree of Difference. 223. The Ablative is used with comparatives and words involving comparison (as post, ante. Infra, supra) to denote the degree of difference ; as, — dimidid minor, sjnaller by a half; tribus pedibus altior, three feet higher ; pau^o post, a little afterwards ; quo plura habemus, eo cupimus ampliora, the more we have, the more we want. 148 SYNTAX. Ablative of Quality. 224. The Ablative, modified by an adjective, is used to denote quality; as, — ^ puella eximia forma, a girl of exceptional beauty ; vir singular! industria, a man of singular industry. 1 . The Ablative of Quality may also be used predicatively ; as, — est magncL prudentia, he is (a man^ of great wisdom ; bono animo sunt, I hey are of good courage. 2. In place of the Adjective we sometimes find a limiting Genitive ; as, — sunt specie et colore taun, they are of the appearance and color of a bull, 3. In poetry the Ablative of Quality sometimes denotes material ; as, — scopulis pendentibus antrum, a cave of arching rocks. Ablative of Price. 225. With verbs of buying and sellings price is desig- nated by the Ablative ; as — servum quinque minis emit, he bought the slave for five minae. 1. The Ablatives magno, plurimo, parvo, minimo (by omission of pretio) are used to denote indefinite price ', as, — aedes magno vendidit, he sold the house for a high price. 2. For the Genitive of Indefinite Price, see § 203. 4. Ablative of Specification. 226. The Ablative of Specification is used to denote that in respect to which something is or is done ; as, — Helvetii omnibus Gallis virtiite praestabant, the Helvetians sur* passed all the Gaids in valor ; pede claudus, lame in his foot. *, 1 . Note the phrases : — major natu, older (lit. greater as to age) ; minor natu, younger. 2. Here belongs the use of the Ablative with dignus, worthy^ indignus, unworthy, and dignor, deem worthy of; as, — digni honore, worthy of honor {i.e. in point of honc') ; fide indigni, unworthy of confidence ; me dignor honore, I deem myself worthy of honor. THE ABLATIVE. 1 49 Ablative Absolute. 227. The Ablative Absolute is grammatically inde- pendent of the rest of the sentence. In its commonest form it consists of a noun or pronoun limited by a participle ; as, — urbe capta, Aeneas fugit, when the city had been captured^ Aeneas fled (lit. the city having been captured^. 1. Instead of a participle we often find an adjective or noun ; as, — vivo Caesare res publioa salva erat, while Caesar was alive the state was safe (lit. Caesa?' being alii'e) ; Tarquinio rege, Pythagoras in Italiam venit, in the reign of Tar- quin Pythagoras cajne into Italy (lit. Tarquin being king) ; Cn. Pompejo, M. CrassS consulibus, in the consulship of Gnaeus Pompey and Marcus Crassus (lit. P. and C. being consuls') . 2. The Ablative Absolute is generally used in Latin where in English we employ subordinate clauses. Thus the Ablative Absolute may correspond to a clause denoting — a) Time, as in the foregoing examples. b) Condition ; as, — omnes virtutes jacent, voluptate dominante, all virtues lie prostrate, if pleasure is master, c) Opposition; as, — perditis omnibus rebus, virtus se sustentare potest, though everything else is lost, yet Virtue can maintain herself. d) Cause; as, — null5 adversante regnum obtinuit, since no one opposed him, he secured the throne. e) Attendant circumstance ; as, — passis palmis paoem petiverunt, with hands outstretched, they sued for peace. 3. An Infinitive or clause sometimes occurs in the Ablative Absolute construction, especially in Livy and later writers ; as, — auditd eum fugisse, when it was heard that he had fled. 4. A noun or pronoun stands in the Ablative Absolute construction only when it denotes a different person or thing from any in the clause in which it stands. Exceptions to this principle are extremely rare. ISO SYNTAX. LOCATIVE USES OF THE ABLATIVE. Ablative of Place. A. Place where. 228. -The place where is regularly denoted by the Ab- lative with a preposition /, as, — in urbe habitat, he dwells in the city. I. But certain words stand in the Ablative without a prepo- sition; viz. — ■ a) Names of towns, — except Singulars of the First and Second Declensions (see § 232. i) ; as, — Carthagini, at Carthage ; Athenis, at Athens ; Vejis, at Veil. b) The general words loco, locis, parte; also many words modified by totus or even by other Adjectives ; as, — hoc loco, at this place ; totis castris, in the whole camp. c) The special words : foris, out of doors ', ruri, iii the country] terra marique, on land and sea. //) The poets freely omit the preposition with any word denot- ing place ; as, — stant litore puppes, the sterns rest on the beach. B. Place from which. '^ 229. Place from which is regularly denoted by the Ablative with a preposition ; as, — ab Italia profectus est, he set out fro?n Italy ; ex urbe rediit, he returned from the city. I. But certain words stand in the Ablative without a prepo- sition ; viz. — «) Names of towns and small islands ; as, — Roma profectus est, he set out from Rome ; Rhodo revertit, he retu7'ned from Rhodes. 1 Place from which, though strictly a Genuine Ablative use, is treated here foi sake of convenience. THE ABLATIVE. I?! b) domo, from ho jne ; ixLxe,fro?n the country. c) Freely in poetry ; as, — Italia decessit, he withdrew from Italy. 2. With names of towns, ab is used to mean from the vicinity of. or to denote the point whence distance is measured; as, — a Gergovia discessit, he withdrew from the vicinity of Gergovia ; a Roma X milia aberat, he was ten miles distant from Rotne. Urbe and oppido, when standing in apposition with a town name,, are accompanied by a preposition ; as, — Curibus ex oppido Sabinorunij/r^/^z Cures., a town of the Sabines.. Ablative of Time. A. Time at which. 230. The Ablative is used to denote the time at which ; as, — quarta hora mortuus est, he died at the fotirth hour ; anno septuagesimo consul creatus, elected consul in his seventieth year. 1 . Any word denoting a period of time may stand in this con- struction, particularly annus, ver, aestas, hiems, dies, nox, hora, comitia {Election Day), ludi {the Gaines), etc. 2. Words not denoting time require the preposition in, unless accompanied by a modifier. Thus : — in pace, in peace ; in bello, in war ; but secundo bello Punico, in the second Punic War. 3. Expressions like in eo tempore, in summa senectute, take the preposition because they denote situation rather than tirne. B. Time within which. 231. Time within which is denoted by the Ablative either with or without a preposition ; as, — Stella Saturn! triginta annis cursum conficit, the planet Saturn completes its orbit within thirty years ; ter in anno, thrice in the course of the year. I. Occasionally the Ablative denotes duration of time ; as, — biennio prosperas res habuit , /i?r two years he had a prosperous administration. 1 52 SYNTAX. THE LOCATIVE. 232. The Locative case occurs chiefly in the following words : — 1. Regularly in the Singular of names of towns and small islands of the first and second declensions, to denote the place in which ; as, — Romae, a^ Rome ; Corinthi, al Corinth ; Rhodi, at Rhodes. 2. In the following special forms : — domi, at home] humi, on the ground ', belli, in war ,* militiae, in war ; vesperi, at evening; heri, yesterday. 3. Note the phrase pendere animi, lit. to be in suspense in one'^s mind. 4. For urbs and oppidum in apposition with a Locative, see § 169. 4. Chapter III. — Syntax of Adjectives, 233. I. The word with which an Adjective agrees is called its Subject. 2. Attributive and Predicate Adjectives. An Attributive Adjective is one that limits its subject directly ; as, — vir sapiens, a wise 7nan. A Predicate Adjective is one that limits its subject through the medium of a verb (usually esse) ; as, — vir est sapiens, the man is wise ; vir videbatur sapiens, the man seemed wise ; vir judicatus est sapiens, the man was judged wise; hunc virum sapientem judicavimus, we adjudged this man wise. 3. Participles and Adjective Pronouns have the construction of Adjectives. AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 153 AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 234. Agreement with One Noun. When an Adjective limits one noun it agrees with it in Gender, Number, and Case. 1. Two Adjectives in the Singular may limit a noun in the Plural; as, prima et vicesima legiones, the first and twentieth legions. 2. A Predicate Adjective may stand in the Neuter vi^hen its Subject is MascuHne or Feminine and denotes a thing ; as, — omnium rerum mors est extremum, death is the end of all things. 235. Agreement with Two or More Nouns. A. AGREEMENT AS TO NUMBER. 1. When the Adjective is Attributive, it regularly agrees in number with the nearest noun ; as, — pater tuus et mater, your father and mother ; eademi alacritas et studium, the same eagerness and zeal. 2. When the Adjective is Predicative, it is regularly Plural ; as, — pax et Concordia svLut ^nlchxdLe, peace and concord are glorious . • B. AGREEMENT AS TO GENDER. 1. When the Adjective is Attributive, it regularly agrees in gender with the nearest noun ; as, — res operae multae ac laboris, a matter of fnuch effort and labor. 2. When the Adjective is Predicative — /ask whether it is true or false f quaero utrum verum an falsum sit, quaero verumne an falsum sit, quaero verum an falsum sit, quaero verum falsumne sit, a. ' Or not ' in the second member of the double question is ordinarily expressed by necne, less frequently by an non ; as, — di utrum sint necne, quaeritur, it is asked whether there are gods or not. 5. Hand scio an, nescio an, by omission of the first member of the double question, occur with the Subjunctive in the sense : / am inclined to think, probably, perhaps ; as, — haud scio an ita sit, / am inclined to think this is so. 6. In early Latin and in poetry the Indicative is sometimes used in Indirect Questions. CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 301. Conditional Sentences are compound sentences (§ 164) consisting of two parts, the Protasis (or con- dition), usually introduced by si, nisi, or sin, and the Apodosis (or conclusion^ There are the following types of Conditional Sentences : — J CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. I99 First Type. — Nothing Implied as to the Reality of the Sup- posed Case. 302. I. Here we regularly have the Indicative in both Protasis and Apodosis. Any tense may be used ; as, — SI hoc credis, erras, if you believe this, you are 7nistaken ; naturam si sequemur, numquam aberrabimus, if ive follow Nature, we shall never go astray ; SI hoc dixisti, erras ti, if you said this, you were in error. 2. Sometimes the Protasis takes the Indefinite Second Person Singu- lar (§ 356, 3) of the Present or Perfect Subjunctive, with the force of the Indicative; as, — memoria minuitur, nisi earn exerceas, memory is impaired unless you exercise it. 3. Here belong also those conditional sentences in which the Prot- asis denotes a repeated action (compare §§ 287, 2 ; 288, 3) ; as, — si quis equitum deciderat, pedites circumsistebant, if any one of the horsemen fell, the foot-soldiers gathered about him. a. Instead of the Indicative, Livy and subsequent writers employ the Subjunctive of the Historical tenses in the Protasis to denote repeated action ; as, — si dicendo quis diem eximeret, if {ever) anybody consumed a day in pleading ; si quando adslderet, if ever he sat by. 4. Where the sense demands it, the Apodosis in conditional sen- tences of the First Type may be an Imperative or one of the Inde- pendent Subjunctives (Hortatory, DeHberative, etc.)', as, — si hoc creditis, tacete, if you believe this, be silent ; si hoc credimus, taceamus, tfwe believe this, let us keep silent. Second Type. — 'Shoiild'-' Would' Conditions. 303. Here we regularly have the Subjunctive (of the Pres- ent or Perfect tense) in both Protasis and Apodosis; as, — si hoc dicas, erres, ]^ if you should say this, you would be mis- si hoc dixeris, erraveris, / taken. si velim Hannibalis proelia omnia describere, dies me deficiat, if I shojild wish to describe all the battles of Hannibal, time would fail fne ; 200 SYNTAX. mentiar, si negem, / should lie, if I should deny it ; haec SI tecum patria loquatur, nouue impetrare debeat, if your country sJwuld plead' thus with you, would she not deserve to obtain her request ? a. The Subjunctive in the Apodosis of conditional sentences of this type is of the Potential variety. b. Sometimes we find the Indicative in the Apodosis of sentences of the Second Type, where the writer wishes to assert the accomplishment of a result more positively ; as, — aliter si faciat, nuUam habet auctoritatem, if he should do otherwise, he has no authority. Third Type. — Supposed Case Represented as Contrary to Fact. 304. I. Here we regularly have the Subjunctive in both Protasis and Apodosis, the Imperfect referring to presefzt time, and the Pluperfect referring to past ; as, — si amici mei adessent, opis non indifeerem, if my friends -were here, I should not lack assistance ; si hoc dixisses, errasses, if you had said this, you woidd have e7'red', sapientia non expeteretur, si nihil efficeret, philosophy woidd not be desired, if it accojnplished jiothing ; c5nsiliuni, ratio, sententia.nisi assent in senibus, non summum consilium majorSs nostri appellassent senatum, unless de- liberation, reason, and wisdom existed in old men, our ajices- tors would not have called their highest deliberative body a senate. 2. Sometimes the Imperfect Subjunctive is found referring to the past, especially to denote a continued act, or a state of things still exist- ing; as,— Laelius, Furius, Cat 6 si nihil litteris adjuvarentur, numquam se ad earum studium contulissent, Laelitis, Furius, and Cato would never have devoted thetriselves to the study of letters, unless they had been {constajttly) helped by them ; num igitur si ad centesimum annum vixisset, senectutis eum suae paeniteret, zf he had lived to his hundredth year, would he have regretted {and now be regretting) his old age f CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 20I 3. The Apodosis in conditional sentences of this type sometimes stands in the Indicative (Imperfect, Perfect, or Pluperfect), viz. — a) Frequently in expressions of ability, obligation, or necessity ; . as, — ■ nisi felicitas in socordiam vertisset, exuere jugum potuerunt, unless their prosperity had turned to folly, they cotdd have thrown off the yoke ; Note. — In sentences of this type, however, it is not \he possibility that is repre- • sented as-contrary-to-fact, but something to be supplied in thought from the context. Thus in the foregoing sentence the logical apodosis is et exuissent understood {and they would have shaken it off) . When the posjibility itself is conditioned, the Subjunctive is used. eum patris loc5 colere debebas, si ulla in te pietas esset, you ought to revere him as a father, if you had any sense of devotion. b) With both the Periphrastic Conjugations; as, — si Sestius occisus esset, fuistisne ad arma ituri, if Sestius had been slain, would yoti have proceeded to arms ? si unum diem morati essetis, moriendum. omnibus fuit, if you had delayed one day, you woidd all have had to die. Protasis expressed Tvithout Si. 305. • I. The Protasis is not always expressed by a clause with si, but may be implied in a word, a phrase, or merely by the context; as, — alioqui haeo non scriberentur, otherwise {i.e. if matters were other- wise) these things would not be written ; non potestis, voluptate omnia dirigentes, retinere virtutem, you cannot retain virtue, if you direct everything with reference to pleasure. 2. Sometimes an Imperative, or a Jussive Subjunctive, serves as Protasis. Thus : — eras petito, dabitur, if you ask to-7norrow, it shall be givejt you (lit. ask to-morrow, etc.) ; haeo reputent, videbunt, if they consider this, they will see (lit. let them consider, etc.) ; roges Zenonem, respondeat, zf you shotdd ask Zeno, he would answer. 202 SYNTAX. Use of Nisi, Si Nan, Sin. 306. I. Nisi, unless^ negatives the entire protasis; si non nega- tives a single word ; as, — ferreus essem, nisi te amarem, / should be hard-hearted unless 1 loved y 071 ; but — ferreus essem, si te non amarem, / should be hard-hearted if I did NOT lo7ie yoti. In the first example, it is the notion of loving you that is negatived, in the second, the notion of loving. 2. Si non (si minus) is regularly employed : — a) When an apodosis with at, tamen, certe follows ; as, — dolorem si non potuero frangere, tamen occultabo, if I cannot criish niy sorrow., yet I will hide it. ^) When an affirmative protasis is repeated in negative form ; as, — si feceris, magnam habebo gratiam ; si n5n feceris, ignoscam, if you do it, I shall be deeply grateful; if you do not do it, I shall pardon you. a. But if the verb is omitted in the repetition, only si minus or sin minus is admissible ; as, — hoc si assecutus sum, gaudeo; si minus, me consolor, e/ / have attained this, I am glad ; if not, 1 console myself. 3. Sin. Where one protasis is followed by another opposed in meaning, but affirmative in form, the second is introduced by sin ; as, — hunc mihi timorem eripe ; si verus est, ne opprimar, sin falsus, ut timere desinam, relieve me of this fear; if it is well foimded, that I may not be destroyed; but if it is groundless, that I may cease to fear. 4. Nisi has a fondness for combining with negatives (non, nem5, nihil) ; as, — nihil cogitavit nisi caedem, he had no thought but 7}iurder. a. Non and nisi are always separated in the best Latinity. 5. Nisi forte, nisi vero, nisi si, unless perchance, unless indeed (often with ironical force), take the Indicative ; as, — nisi vero, quia perfecta res non est, non videtur piinienda, unless indeed, because an act is not consimimated, it does not seefn to merit punishment. CONDITIONAL CLAUSES OF COMPARISON. 203 Conditional Clauses of Comparison. 307. I. Conditional Clauses of Comparison are intro- duced by the particles, ac si, ut si, quasi, quam si, tamquam si, velut si, or simply by velut or tamquam. They stand in the Subjunctive mood and regularly involve an ellipsis (see § 374, i), as indicated in the following examples : — tantus patres metus cepit, velut si jam ad portas hostis esset, as great fear seized the senators as {would have seized iheni) if the enemy were already at the gates ; sed quid ego his testibus utor quasi res dubia aut obscura sit, diit why do I use these witnesses, as {I should do) if the 77iatter were doubtful or obscure ; serviam tibi tarn quasi emeris me argento, / will serve you as though you had bought me for 7?toney. 2. Note that in sentences of this kind the Latin observes the regu- lar principles for the Sequence of Tenses. Thus after principal tenses the Latin uses the Present and Perfect (as in the second and third exam- ples), where the English uses the Past and Past Perfect. Concessive. Clauses. 308. The term * Concessive ' is best restricted to those clauses developed from the Jussive Subjunctive which have the force of granted that, etc.; (see § 278) as, — sit fur, sit sacrilegus, at est bonus imperator, granted that he is a thief and a robber, yet he is a good cotnmander ; haec sint falsa, granted that this is false ; ne sit summum malum dolor, malum certe est, granted that ^ain is not the greatest evil, yet it is certainly an evil. Adversative Clauses with Quam vis, Quamquam, etc. 309. Clauses introduced by quamvis, quamquam, etsi, tametsi, cum, although, while often classed as * Conces- sive,' are yet essentially different from genuine Concessive clauses. As a rule, they do not grant or concede any- thing, but rather state that something is true in spite of 204 SYNTAX. something else. They accordingly emphasize the adver- sative idea, and are properly Subordinate Adversative Clauses. The different particles used to introduce these clauses have different meanings and take different con- structions, as follows : — 1 . Quamvis, however iniich, although^ does not introduce a state- ment of fact, but represents an act merely as conceived. It is followed by the Subjunctive, usually of the present tense ; as, — homines quamvis in turbidis rebus sint, tarn en interdum animis relaxantur, in however stirring events 7nejt may engage, yet at times they relax their energies ; non est potestas opitulandi rei publicae quamvis ea prematur periculis, there is no opportunity to succor the state, though it be beset by datigers. 2. Quamquam, etsi, tametsi, although, introduce a statement of fact, and are followed by the Indicative (of any tense) ; as, — quamquam omnis virtus nos allicit, tamen justitia id maxime efficit, although all virtue attracts us, yet justice does so espe- cially ; Caesar, etsi nondum consilium hostium cognoverat, tamen id quod accidit suspicabatur, Caesar, though he did not yet know the plans of the enemy, yet was suspecting what actually occurred. a. Etsi, although, must be distinguished from etsi, even if. The latter is a conditional particle and takes any of the constructions admissible for si. (See \\ 302-304.) 3. Cum, although, is followed by the Subjunctive; as, — Atticus honores non petiit, cum ei paterent, Atticus did not seek honors, thotigh they were open to him. 4. Licet sometimes loses its verbal force (see § 295, 6) and sinks to the level of a conjunction with the force of although. It takes the Subjunctive, Present or Perfect ; as, — licet omnes terrores impendeant, succurram, though all terrors hang over me, {yef) I will lend aid. 5. Quamquam, with the force and yet, is often used to introduce principal clauses ; as, — quamquam quid loquor, and yet why do I speak? CLAUSES OF PROVISO. — RELATIVE CLAUSES. 205 6. In post-Augustan writers quamquam is freely construed with the Sub- junctive, while quamvis is often used to introduce statements of fact, and takes either the Indicative or the Subjunctive. Thus : — quamquam moveretur his vocibus, although he was moved by these words; quamvis multi opinarentur, though many thought; quam.vis infesto animo perveneras, though you had come with hostile intent. Clauses with Dum, Mo do, Dummodo, denoting a Wish or a Proviso. 310. These particles are followed by the Subjunctive (negative ne) and have two distinct uses : — I. They are used to introduce clauses embodying a wish entertained by the subject of the leading verb ; as, — multi honesta neglegunt dununodo potentiam consequantur, many neglect honor in their desire to obtain power ( if otily they may attaiii) ; omnia postposui, dum praeceptis patris parerem, I made everything else secondary, in my desire to obey the injunctions of my father ; nil obstat tibi, dum ne sit ditior alter, nothing hinders you in your desire that yotir jieighbor may not be richer than you. II. They are used to express a proviso {^provided that')) as, — oderint, dum metuant, let theni hate, provided they fear ; manent ingenia senibus, modo permaneat studium et industria, old 7nen retain their faculties, provided only they retai7i their interest and vigor ; nubant, dum ne dos fiat comes, let them marry, provided no dowry goes with it. Relative Clauses. 311. Relative Clauses are introduced by Relative Pro- nouns, Adjectives, or Adverbs. 312. I. Relative clauses usually stand in the Indicative Mood, especially clauses introduced by those General Relatives which are doubled or have the suffix -cumque ; as, — 2o6 SYNTAX. quidquid id est, timeo Danaos et dona ferentes, whatever it 2s, 1 fear the Greeks eveti when they offer gifts ; quidquid oritur, qualeoumque est, causam a natura habet, what- ever comes into beings of whatever sort it is, has its primal cause in Nature. 2. Any simple Relative may introduce a conditional sentence of any of the three types mentioned in §§ 302-304 ; as, — qui hoc dicit, errat, he who says this is 7nistaken (First Type) ; qui hoc dioat, erret, he would be 7nistaken who should say this (Second Type) ; qui hoc dixisset, errasset, the man who had said this would have been mistaken. INDIRECT DISCOURSE (ORATIO OBLIQUA). 313. When the language or thought of any person is reproduced without change, that is called Direct Discourse {Ordtio Recta) ; as, Caesar said, ' The die is cast' When, on the other hand, one's language or thought is made to depend upon a verb of saying, thinkifig, etc., that is called Indirect Discourse ((9m//^ Obllqua^ ; as, Caesar said that the die was cast ; Caesar tJiought that his troops were victorious. a. For the verbs most frequently employed to introduce Indirect Discourse, see § 331. MOODS IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE. Declarative Sentences. 314. I. Declarative Sentences upon becoming Indirect change their main clause to the Infinitive with Subject Accusative, while all subordinate clauses take the Subjunc- tive ; as, — Regulus dixit quam diu jure jurando hostium teneretur non esse se senatdrem, Regulus said that as long as he was held by his pledge to the enemy he was not a senator. (Direct : quam diu teneor 11011 sum senator.) INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 207 2. The verb of sayings thinking, etc., is sometimes to be inferred from the context ; as, — turn Romulus legates circa vicinas gentes misit qui societatem conubiumque peterent : urbes quoque, ut cetera, ex infimo nasci, then Rojnulus sent envoys around aifiong the neighboring tribes, to ask for alliance and the right of inter- marriage, {saying that) cities, like everything else, start frojn a 7nodest beginning. 3. Subordinate clauses which contain an explanatory statement of the writer and so are not properly a part of the Indirect Discourse, or which emphasize the fact stated, take the Indicative ; as, — nuntiatum est Ariovistum ad occupandum Vesontionem, quod est oppidum maximum Sequanorum contendere, // was re- ported that Ariovistiis was hastening to seize Vesontio,*which is the largest town of the Sequajii. 4. Sometimes a subordinate clause is such only in its external form, and in sense is principal. It then takes the Infinitive with Subject Accusative. This occurs especially in case of relative clauses, where qui is equivalent to et hic, nam hic, etc. ; as, — dixit urbem Atheniensium propugnaculum oppositum esse bar- barls, apud quam jam bis classes regias fecisse naufra- gium, he said the city of the Athenians had been set against the barbarians like a bidwark, near which ( = atid near it) the fleets of the King had twice met disaster. 5. The Subject Accusative of the Infinitive is sometimes omitted when it refers to the same person as the subject of the leading verb, or can easily be supplied from the context ; as, — cum id nescire Mago diceret, when Mago said he did not know this (for se nescire). Interrogative Sentences. 315. I. Real questions of the Direct Discourse, upon becoming indirect, are regularly put in the Subjunc- tive ; as, — Ariovistus Caesarl respondit : se prius in Galliam venisse quam populum Romanum. Quid sibi vellet ? Cur in suas pos- sessiones veniret, Ariovistus replied to Caesar that he 2o8 SYNTAX. had come into Gaul before the Roman people. What did he (^Caesa?') mean f Why did he come into his domaiti f (Direct : quid tibi vis ? cur in meas possessiones veins ?) 2. Rhetorical questions, on the other hand, being asked merely for effect, and being equivalent in force to emphatic statements, regularly stand in the Infinitive in Indirect Dis- course. Thus : — quid est levius (lit. what is more trivial, = nothing is more trivial) of the Direct Discourse becomes quid esse levius in the In- direct. 3. Deliberative Subjunctives of the Direct Discourse remain un- changed in mood in the Indirect: as, — quid f aceret, what was he to do ? (Direct : quid f aciat ?) Imperative Sentences. 316. All Imperatives or Jussive Subjunctives of the Direct Discourse appear as Subjunctives in the In- direct ; as, — milites certiores fecit paulisper intermitterent proelium, he told the soldiers to stop the battle for a little. (Direct : intermittite.) a. The negative in such sentences is ne ; as, — ne suae virtuti tribueret, let him not attribide it to his own valor I TENSES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE. A. Tenses of the Infinitive. 317. These are used in accordance with the regular principles for the use of the Infinitive as given in § 270. a. The Perfect Infinitive may represent any past tense of the Indicative of Direct Discourse. Thus : — scio te haec egisse may mean — I know you were doi?tg this. (Direct: haec agebas.) I know you did this. (Direct: haec egisti.) I know you had done this. (Direct : haec egeras.) INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 209 B. Tenses of the Subjiinctive. 318. These follow the regular principle for the Sequence of Tenses, being Principal if the verb of saying is Princi- pal ; Historical if it is Historical. Yet for the sake of vividness, we often find the Present Subjunctive used after an historical tense {Repraesentdtio) ; as, — Caesar respondit, si obsides dentur, sese pacem esse facturum, Caesar replied that, if hostages be given, he would make peace. a. For the sequence after the Perfect Infinitive, see § 268, 2. CONDITIONAL SENTENCES IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE. Conditional Sentences of the First Type. 319. A. The Apodosis. Any tense of the Indicative is changed to the corresponding tense of the Infinitive (§§ 270; 317,^). B. The Protasis. The protasis takes those tenses of the Subjunctive which are required by the Sequence of Tenses. Examples: — Direct. Indirect. SI hoc credis, erras, SI hoc credes, errabis dico, sT hoc credas, te errare ; dixi, sl hoc crederes, te errare. ( dico, sT hoc credas, te erraturum esse ; 1 dixT, si hoc credereSjte erraturum esse. C dico, Sl hoc credideris, te erraturum I esse * Sl hoc credideris, errabis, -{,__' I dixi, Sl hoc credidisses, te erraturum I esse. -,- --,-,- _.^_f dico, sT hoc crederes, te erravisse : SI hoc credebas, erravisti, {.___._ , _ . [ dixi, Sl hoc crederes, te erravisse. a. Note that a Future Perfect Indicative of the Direct Discourse regularly appears in the Indirect as a Perfect Subjunctive after a principal tense, and as a Pluperfect Subjunctive after an historical tense. 2IO SYNTAX. Conditional Sentences of the Second Type. 320. A. The Apodosis. The Present Subjunctive of the Direct Discourse regularly becomes the Future Infini- tive of the Indirect. B. The Protasis. The Protasis takes those tenses of the Subjunctive demanded by the sequence of tenses. Examples: — _ , _ _ __ _ ( dlco, sT hoc credas, te erraturum esse ; SI hoc credas, erres, -^,___,_ _^_ _ _ [ dixi, SI hoc crederes, te erraturum esse. Conditional Sentences of the Third Type. 321. A. The Apodosis. 1. The Imperfect Subjunctive of the Direct Discourse becomes the Future Infinitive. a. But this construction is rare, being represented in the clas- sical Latinity by a single example (Caesar, V. 29. 2). Some scholars question the correctness of this passage. 2. The Pluperfect Subjunctive of the Direct Discourse becomes : — a) In the Active Voice the Infinitive in -urus fuisse. 3) In the Passive Voice it takes the form futurum fuisse ut with the Imperfect Subjunctive. B. The Protasis. The protasis in Conditional Sen tences of this type always remains unchanged. Examples : — 81 h5c crederes, errares, dico (dixT), sT hoc crederes, te er- raturum esse ; si hoc credidisses, erravisses, dico (dixT), si hoc credidisses, te erraturum fuisse ; si hoc dixisses, punitus esses, dico (dixT), sT hoc dixisses, futu- rum fuisse ut punlreris. 322. When an apodosis of a conditional sentence of the Third Type referring to the past is at the same time a Result clause, or a I INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 211 quin-clause (after non dubito, etc.^^ it stands in the Perfect Sub- junctive in the form -urus fuerim ; as, — ita territi sunt, ut arma tradituri fuerint,i nisi Caesar subito advenisset, they were so frightened that they would have given T(p their arms, had not Caesar suddenly arrived ; non dubito quin, si hoc dixisses, erraturus f ueris,i / do not doubt that, if you had said this, you would have made a mistake. a. This peculiarity is confined to the Active Voice. In the Passive, such sentences, when they become dependent, remain unchanged ; as, — non dubito quin, si hoc dixisses, vituperatus esses, / do not doubt that, if you had said this, you would have been blamed. b. When an Indirect Question becomes an apodosis in a con- ditional sentence of the Third Type, -urus fuerim (rarely -urus fuissem) is used ; as, — quaero, num, si hoc dixisses, erraturus fueris (or fuisses) . c. Potui, when it becomes a dependent apodosis in sentences of this Type, usually changes to the Perfect Subjunctive; as, — concursu totius civitatis defensi sunt, ut frig-idissimos quoque oratores populi studia excitare potuerint, they were defended before a gathering of all the citizens^ so that the interest of the people would have been enough to excite even the most apathetic orators. IMPLIED INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 323. The Subjunctive is often used in subordinate clauses whose Indirect character is merely iiTipiied by the context ^ as, — demonstrabantur mihi praeterea, quae Socrates de immortali- tate animorum disseruisset, there were explained to me be- sides., the argumejtts which Socrates had set forth concerning the immortality of the soul {i.e. the arguments which, it was said, Socrates had set forth) ; Paetus omnes libros quos pater suus reliquisset mihi donavit, Paetus gave me all the books which {as he said') his father had left. 1 Tradituri fuerint and erraturus fueris are to be regarded as repre- senting tradituri fuerunt and erraturus fuisti of Direct Discourse. (See 1 304- 3- ^0 212 SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE BY ATTRACTION. 324, I. Subordinate clauses dependent upon the Sub- junctive are frequently attracted into the same mood, especially when they do not express a fact, but constitute un essential part of 07ie complex idea ; as, — nemo avarus adhuc inventus est, cui, quod haberet, esset satis, . no fniser has yet beeii found who was satisfied with what he had; cum diversas causas afferrent, dum formam sul quisque et animi et ingenii redderent, as they brought forward different argu7nents, while each mirrored his own individual type of mind and natural beitt ; quod ego fatear, pudeat ? should I be ashamed of a thing which I admit f 2. Similariy a subordinate clause dependent upon an Infinitive is put in the Subjunctive when the two form one closely united whole; as, — mos est Athenls quotannis in contione laudari eos qui sint in proeliis interfecti, it is the custom at Athens every year for those to be publicly eulogized who have been killed in battle. (Here the notion of 'praising those who fell in battle' forms an inseparable whole.) NOUN AND ADJECTIVE FORMS OF THE VERB. 325. These are the Infinitive, Participle, Gerund, and Supine. All of these partake of the nature of the Verb, on the one hand, and of the Noun or Adjective, on the other. Thus : — ^) They may be limited by adverbs ; ^) They admit an object ; ^) They have the properties of voice and tense. As Nouns or Adjectives, — a^ They are declined ; b) They take Noun or Adjective constructions. NOUN AND ADJECTIVE FORMS OF THE VERB. 213 THE INFINITIVE. Infinitive without Subject Accusative. 326. This is used chiefly as Subject or Object but also as Predicate or Appositive. Note. — The Infinitive was originally a Dative, and traces of this are still to be seen in the poetical use of the Infinitive to express purpose ; as, nec dulces occur- rent oscula nati praeripere, and tto sweet children will run to snatch kisses. A. As Subject. 327. I. The Infinitive without- Subject Accusative is used as the Subject of esse and various impersonal verbs, particularly opus est, necesse est, oportet, juvat, dglectat, placet, libet, licet, praestat, decet, pudet, interest, etc. ; as, — dulce et decorum est pro patria mori, it is sweet and noble to die for one'^s country ] virorum est fortium toleranter dolorem pati, it is the part of brave men to e7idure pain with patie7ice ; senatui placuit legates mittere, the Senate decided (lit. it pleased the Senate) to send envoys. 1. Even though the Infinitive itself appears without Subject, it may take a Predicate Noun or Adjective in the Accusative ; as, — aliud est iracundum esse, aliud iratum, it is one thing to be irasci- ble., another to be angry; impune quaelibet facere, id. est regem esse, to do whatever you please with iinpunity., that is to be a ki?ig. a. But -when licet is followed by a Dative of the person, a Predicate Noun or Adjective with esse is attracted into the same case; as, licuit esse Otioso Themistocli, lit. it was permitted to Themisto- cles to be at leisure. So sometimes with other Impersonals. B, As Object. 328. I. The Infinitive without Subject Accusative is used as the Object of many verbs, to denote another action of the same subject, particularly after — volo, cupiS, malo, nolo ; cogito, meditor, purpose^ intend; debeo, ought ; neglego, neglect ; stsLtuo, constituoy decide ; ^r ex eoi, timed, fear ; 214 SYNTAX. audeo, dare ; matiiro, festino, propero, con- studeo, contends, strive ; tendo, hasten ; paro, prepare (so paratus) ; assuesco, consuesco, accustom incipio, coepi, instituo, begin ; myself (so assuetus, insuetus. pergo, continue ; assuefactus) ; desino, desisto, cease ; disco, learn ; possum, can ; scio, know how ; Conor, try ; soleo, am wont; as, — tu hos intueri audes, do you dare to look on these iTien ? Demosthenes ad fluctus maris declamare solebat, Demosthenes used to declaim by the waves of the sea. 2. A Predicate Noun or Adjective with these Infinitives is attracted into the Nominative ; as, — beatus esse sine virtiite nemo potest, no one can be happy without virtue ; Cat5 esse quam videri bonus malebat, Cato preferred to be good rather than to seem so. Infinitive -with Subject Accusative. 329. This is used chiefly as Subject or Object but also as Predicate or Appositive. A. As Subject. 330. The Infinitive with Subject Accusative (h*ke the simple Infinitive) is used as Subject with esse and Imper- sonal verbs, particularly with aequum est, utile est, turpe est, fama est, spes est, fas est, nefas est, opus est, necesse est, oportet, constat, praestat, licet, etc. ; as, — nihil in bello oportet contemni, nothing ought to be despised in war; apertum est sibi quemque natura esse carum, // is manifest that by nature everybody is dear to himself. B. As Object. 331. The Infinitive with Subject Accusative is used as Object after the following classes of verbs : I. Most frequently after verbs of saying., thinkings knowings per- ceivings and the like {Verba Sentiendl et Decldrandt). This is the NOUN AND ADJECTIVE FORMS OF THE VERB. 21$ regular construction of Principal Clauses of Indirect Discourse. Verbs that take this construction are, among others, the following: sentio, audio, video, cognosco ; puto, judico, spero, confido ; scio, memini ; dico, affirmo, nego {say that . . . not), trado, narro, fateor, respondeo, scriTbo, promitto, glorior. Also the phrases : certiorem facio (m/orm), memoria teneo {re7nember), etc. Examples : — Epiciirei putant cum corporibus simul animos interire, the Epi- cureans think that the soul perishes with the body ; Thales dixit aquam esse initium rerum, Thales said that water was the first principle of the universe ; Democritus negat quicquid esse sempiternum, Democritus says nothing is everlasting ', spero eum venturum esse, I hope thathe^willjrQ^jie. II. With jubeo, t7r^^r, and veto, y^r^zV/,- as, — Caesar milites pontem facere jussit, Caesar ordered the soldiers to make a bridge. a. When the name of the person who is ordered or forbidden to do something is omitted, the Infinitive with jubeo and veto is put in the Passive ; as, Caesar pontem fieri jussit. III. With patior and sino, pe?'7nit, allow; as, — uilllo se implicarl negotio passus est, he did not permit himself to be involved in any difficulty. IV. With volo, nolo, malo, cupio, when the Subject of the Infini- tive is different from that of the governing verb ; as, — neo mihi hunc errorem extorqueri volo, nor do I wish this error to be wrested from 7ne ; eas res jactari nolebat, he was unwilling that these matters should be discussed; t§ tua frui virtute cupimus, we desire that you enjoy your worth. a. When the Subject of both verbs is the same, the simple Infinitive is regularly used in accordance with \ 328. i. But exceptions occur, es- pecially in case of esse and Passive Infinitives ; as, — cupio me esse clementem, / desire to be lenient; Timoleon maluit se diligi quam metui, Timoleon preferred to be loved rather than feared. b. Volo also admits the Subjunctive, with or without ut ; nolo the Sub- junctive alone. (See \ 296. i. a.) 2l6 SYNTAX. V. With Verbs of emotion {Joy, sorrow, regret, etc.), especially gaudeo, laetor, doleo ; aegre fero, moleste fero, graviter fero, am an?ioyed, distressed; miror, queror, indignor ; as, — gaudeo te salvum advenire, I rejoice that you arrive safely ; noil moleste ferunt se libidinum vinculis laxatos gsse, they are not trotcbled at being released from the bonds of passion ; miror te ad me nihil scribere, / wonder that you write 77ie nothing. a. Instead of an Infinitive these verbs also sometimes admit a quod- clause as Object. (See \ 299.) Thus : — miror quod non loqueris, / wonder that you do not speak. VI. Some verbs which take two Accusatives, one of the Person and the other of the Thing (§ 178, i), may substitute an Infinitive for the second Accusative ; as, — cojgo te hoc facere, I compel you to do this {cf te hoc cogo) ; docui te cpntentum esse, / taught you to be content (cf. te modes- tiam docui, I taught you te/nperajice) . Passive Construction of the Foregoing Verbs. 332. Those verbs which m the Active are followed by the Infinitive with Subject Accusative, usually admit the personal construction of the Passive. This is true of the following and of some others : — a) jubeor, vetor, sinor ; as, — milites pontem facere jussi sunt, the soldiers were ordered to build a bridge ; pons fieri jussus est, a bridge was ordered built; milites castris exire vetiti sunt, the troops were forbidden to go out of the ca7np ; Sestius Clodium accusare non est situs, Sestius was not allowed to acciise Clodius. b) yrxdiGor, I am seeti, I seem; as, — videtur comperisse, he seefns to have discovered. c) dicor, putor, exTstimor, judicor (in all persons) ; as, — dicitur in Italiam venisse, he is said to have cojne into Italy ; Romulus primus rex Romanorum fuisse putatur, Romu- lus is thought to have been the first king of the Rojnans. NOUN AND ADJECTIVE FORMS OF THE VERB. 21 7 d^ fertur, feruntur, traditur, trSduntur (only in the third person) ; as, — fertur Homerus caecus fuisse, Hojuer is said to have been blind ; carmina Archilochi contumeliis referta esse traduntur, Archilochus^s poems are reported to have been full of abuse. Note. — In compound tenses and periphrastic forms, the last two classes of verbs, c), d), more commonly take the impersonal construction ; as, — traditum est Homerum caecum fuisse, ^ke story goes that Homer was blind. Infinitive with Adjectives. 333. The Infinitive with Adjectives (except paratus, assuetus, etc.; see § 328, i) occurs only in poetry and post- Augustan, prose writers ; as, — contentus demonstrasse, contented to have proved; audax omnia perpeti, bold for enduring everything. Infinitive in Exclamations. 334. The Infinitive is used in Exclamations implying scorn., indig- nation., or regret. An intensive -ne is often attached to some word in the clause. Examples : — huncine solem tam nigrum surrexe mihi, to think that to-day''s sun rose with such evil 07nen for 7ne I sedere totos dies in villa, to stay whole days at the villa. Historical Infinitive. 335. The Infinitive is often used in historical narrative instead of the Imperfect Indicative. The Subject stands in the Nominative ; as, — interim cottidie Caesar Haeduos frumentum flagitare, meanwhile Caesar was daily demanding grain of the Haedui. PARTICIPLES. Tenses of the Participle. 336. I. The tenses of the Participle, Hke those of the Infinitive (see § 270), express time not absolutely, but with reference to the verb upon which the Participle depends. 2l8 SYNTAX. 2. The Present Participle denotes action contemporary with that of the verb. Thus : — audio te loquentem —you are speaking and I hear you ; audiebam te loquentem = you were speaking and I heard you ', audiam te loquentem —you will be speakirig and I shall hear you. a. The Present Participle is sometimes employed with Conative force ; as, — assurgentem regem resupinat, as the king was trying to rise, he threw hi7n down. 3. The Perfect Passive Participle denotes action prior to that of the verb. Thus : — locutus taced = / have spoken and am silent ; locutus tacui = / had spoken and then was silent ; locutus tacebo = / shall speak and then shall be silent. 4. The absolute time of the action of a participle, therefore, is determined entirely by the finite verb with which it is connected.. 5. Certain Perfect Passive Participles of Deponent and Semi- Deponent Verbs are used as Presents ; viz. arbitratus, ausus, ratus, gavisus, solitus, usus, confisus, diffisus, seoutus, veritus. Use of Participles. 337. As an Adjective the Participle may be used either as an attributive or predicate modifier of a Substantive. 1. Attributive Use. This presents no special peculiarities. Ex- amples are : — gloria est consentiens laus bonorum, glory is the unanimous praise of the good ; Conon muros a Lysandro dirutos reficit, Conon restored the walls destroyed by Lysander. 2. Predicate Use. Here the Participle is often equivalent to a subordinate clause. Thus the Participle may denote : — a) Time ; as, — omne malum nascens facile opprimitur, every evil is easily crushed at birth. b') A Condition ; as, — mente uti non possumus cibo et potione completi, if gorged with food and drink., we cannot use our intellects. NOUN AND ADJECTIVE FORMS OF THE VERB. 219 c) Manner; as, — Solon senescere se dicebat multa in dies addiscentem, Solon said he grew old learning many 7iew things daily. d) Means; as, — sol oriens diem conficit, the sun, by its rising, makes the day. e) Opposition (^ though^) \ as, — mendaci homini ne verum quidem dicenti credimus, we do not believe a liar, though he speaks the truth. y) Cause ; as, — perfidiam veritus ad suos reoessit, since he feared treachery, he returned to his own troops. 3. Video and audio, besides the Infinitive, take the Present Par- ticiple in the Predicate use ; as, — video te fugientem, I see you fleeing, a. So frequently facio, flngo, indtico, etc.; as, — eis Catonem respondentem facimus, we represent Cato reply- ing to them ; Homerus Laertem colentem agrum facit, Homer represents Laertes tilling the field. 4. The Future Active Participle (except futurus) is regularly con- fined to its use in the Periphrastic Conjugation, but in poets and later writers it is used independently, especially to denote purpose ; as, — venerunt castra oppugnaturi, they came to assault the camp. 5. The Perfect Passive Participle is often equivalent to a coordi- nate clause ; as, — urbem captam diruit, he captured and destroyed the city (lit. he de- stroyed the city captured) . 6. The Perfect Passive Participle in combination with a noun is sometimes equivalent to an abstract noun with a dependent Genitive ; as, — post urbem conditam, after the founding of the city ; Quinctius defensus, the defense of Quinctius ; quibus animus occupatus, the preoccupation of the mind with which. 7. Habeo sometimes takes a Perfect Passive Participle in the Predi- cate construction with a force not far removed from that of the Perfect or Pluperfect Indicative ; as, — equitatus quem coactum habebat, the cavalry which he had collected. 220 SYNTAX. 8. The Gerundive denotes obligation^ necessity, etc. Like other Par- ticiples it may be used either as Attributive or Predicate. a) Less frequently as Attributive. Thus : — liber legendus, a book worth reading; Igges observandae, laws deserving of observance. b) More frequently as Predicate. i) In the Passive Periphrastic Conjugation (amandus est, etc.^. In this use Intransitive Verbs can be used only impersonally, but admit their ordinary case-construction (Gen., Dat., Abl.) ; as,— veniendum est, it is necessary to come ; obliviscendum est offensarum, one must forget injuries ; numquam proditori credendum est, you mzist never trust a traitor ; suo cuique uteiidum est judicio, every man must use his own judgment. 2) AitQX euro, provide for ; do, tr ado, giv J over ; relin- quo, leave; concede, hand over j and some other verbs, instead of an object clause, or to denote purpose ; as, — Caesar ponteni in Arari faciendum curavit, Caesar pro- vided for the construction of a bridge over the Arar ; imperator urbem militibus diripiendam concessit, the general handed over the city to- the soldiers to plunder. 9. For the Gerundive as the equivalent of the Gerund, see § 339, i . THE GERUND. 338. As a verbal noun the Gerund admits noun con- structions as follows : — I. Genitive. The Genitive of the Gerund is used — a) With Nouns, as objective or Appositional Genitive (see §§ 200, 202) ; as,— cupiditas dominandi, desire of rulitig ; ars scribendi, the art of writing. b) With Adjectives ; as, — cupidus audiendi, desirous of hearing. c) With causa, gratia ; as, — discendi causa, for the sake of learning. NOUN AND ADJECTIVE FORMS OF THE VERB. 221 2. Dative. The Dative of the Gerund is used — a) With Adjectives ; as, — aqua utilis est bibendo, water is useful for drinking. b) With Verbs (rarely) ; as, — adfui scrlbendo, I was present at the writing. 3. Accusative. The Accusative of the Gerund is used only with Prepositions, chiefly ad and in to denote purpose ; as, — homo ad agendum natus est, ?nan is born for action. 4. Ablative. The Ablative of the Gerund is used — «) Without a Preposition, as an -Ablative of Means, Cause, etc. (see §§ 218, 219) ; as, — mens discendo alitur et cogitando, the 7nind is notirished by learning and reflection. Themistocles maritimos praedones consectando mare tutum reddidit, Themistocles made the sea safe by fol- lowing up the pirates. b) After the prepositions a, de, ex, in; as, — summa voluptas ex discendo capitur, the keenest pleas- ure is derived fro7ri learning', multa de bene beateque vivendo a Platone disputata sunt, there was much discussion by Plato on the subject of living well and happily. 5. As a rule, only the Genitive of the Gerund and the Ablative (without a preposition) admit a Direct Object. Gerundive Construction instead of the Gerund. 339. I. Instead of the Genitive or Ablative of the Gerund with a Direct Object, another construction may be, and very often is, used. This consists in putting the Direct Object in the case of the Gerund (Gen. or Abl.) and using the Gerundive in agreement with it. This is called the Gerundive Construction. Thus : — Gerund Construction. Gerundive Construction. cupidus urbem videndT, desirous - ,, ., f cupidus urbis videndae : of seeing the city. \ delector oratores legend©, / a7n ) ^ _, _ _ _ ., , , v,7 7-^7 . >^ delector oratoribus legendis. char 77ied with reading the orators. \ 222 SYNTAX. 2. The Gerundive Construction must be used to avoid a Direct Object with the Dative of the Gerund, or with a case dependent upon a Preposition ; as, — locus castris muniendis aptus, a place adapted to fortifying a camp ; ad pacem pe ten dam venerunt, tkey came to ask peace ; xnultum temporis consumo in legendis poetis, / spend much time . in reading the poets. 3. In order to avoid ambiguity (see § 236, 2), the Gerundive Con- struction must not be employed in case of Neuter Adjectives used substantively. Thus regularly — philosophi cupidi sunt verum investigandi, philosophers are eager for discovering truth (rarely veri investigandi) ; studium plura cognoscendi, a desire of knowiiig more (not plurium pognoscendorum) . 4. From the nature of the case only Transitive Verbs can be used in the Gerundive construction ; but utor, fruor, fungor, potior (orig- inally transitive) regularly admit it ; as, — hostes in spem potiundorum castrorum venerant, the enemy had conceived the hope of gaining possession of the camp. 5. The Genitives mei, tui, sui, nostri, vestri, when used in the Gerundive Construction, are regularly employed without reference to Gender or Number, since they were originally Neuter Singular Adjec- tives used substantively. Thus : — mulier sui servandi causa aufugit, the woTnan fled for the sake of saving herself] legati in castra venerunt sui purgandi causa, the envoys came into camp for the purpose of clearing the7ns elves. So nostri servandi causa, yyr the sake of saving ourselves. 6. Occasionally the Genitive of the Gerundive Construction is used to denote /2^r/<9j^ ^ Anapaest. 3. A Verse is a succession of feet. 4. The different kinds of verses are named Trochaic, Iambic, Dac- tylic, Anapaestic, according to the foot which forms the basis of their structure. 5. Ictus. In every fundamental foot the long syllable naturally re- ceives the greater prominence. This prominence is called ictus. ^ It is denoted thus : Z. ^ w ; Z. w 6. Thesis and Arsis. The syllable which receives the ictus is called the thesis ; the rest of the foot is called the arsis. 7. Elision. Final syllables ending in a vowel, a diphthong, or -m are regularly elided before a word beginning with a vowel or h. In reading, we omit the elided syllable entirely. This may be indicated as follows : corpor® in uno ; mult""^ ille et ; raonstr""* horrendum ; causae irarum. a. Omission of elision is called Hiatus. It occurs especially before and after monosyllabic interjections ; as, O et praesidium. 1 Ictus was not accent, — neither stress accent nor musical accent, — but was simply the quantitative prominence inherent in the long syllables oi fundamental feet. 244 PROSODY. 8. The ending of a word within a foot is called a Caesilra {cutting). Every verse usually has one prominent caesura. The ending of a word and foot together within the verse is called a diaeresis. 9. Verses are distinguished as Catalectic or Acatalectic. A Cata- lectic verse is one in which the last foot is not complete, but lacks one or more syllables ; an Acatalectic verse has its last foot complete. 10. At the end of a verse a slight pause occurred. Hence the final syllable may be either long or short (syllaba anceps), and may terminate in a vowel or m, even though the next verse begins with a vowel. 1 1 . Iambic, Trochaic, and Anapaestic verses are further designated as dimeter, trimeter, tetrameter, according to the number of dipodies (pairs of feet) which they contain. Dactylic verses are measured by single feet ^ and are designated as tetrameter, pentameter, hexameter, accordingly. SPECIAL PECULIARITIES. 367. I. Syniz^sis (Synadresis). Two successive vowels in the interior of a word are often united into a long syllable ; as, — aureis, deinde, anteire deesse. 2. Diastole. A syllable usually short is sometimes long ; as, — videt, audit. 3. Systole. A syllable usually long is sometimes short ; as, — stetgrunt. a. Diastole and Systole are not mere arbitrary processes. They usually represent an earlier pronunciation which had passed out of vogue in the ordinary speech. 4. After a consonant, i and u sometimes become j and v. The preceding syllable then becomes long ; as, — abjete for abiete ; genva for genua. 5. Sometimes V becomes u ; as, — silua for silva ; dissoluo for dissolve. 6. Sometimes a verse has an extra syllable. Such a verse is called an Hyp^rmeter. The extra syllable ends in a vowel or -m, and is united with the initial vowel or h of the next verse by Synaphdia. Thus : — ignari hominumque locorum^"® erramus. VERSE-STRUCTURE. 245 7. Tmesis {cutting). Compound words are occasionally separated into their elements ; as, — quo me cumque rapit tempestas, for quocumque, etc. 8. Syncope. A short vowel is sometimes dropped between two consonants ; as, — repostus for repositus. THE DACTYLIC HEXAMETER. 368. I. The Dactylic Hexameter, or Heroic Verse, consists theoretically of six dactyls. But in all the feet except the fifth, a spondee ( ) may take the place of the dactyl. The sixth foot may be either a spondee or a trochee, since the final syllable of a verse may be either long or short (syilaba anoeps). The following represents the scheme of the verse : — 2. Sometimes we find a spondee in the fifth foot. Such verses are called Spondaic. A dactyl usually stands in the fourth place, and the fifth and sixth feet are generally made up of a quadrisyllable ; as, — armatum<»"e auro circumspicit Oriona. cara deum suboles, magnum Jovis incrementum. 3. Caesura. a) The favorite position of the caesura in the Dactylic Hexam- eter is after the thesis of the third foot ; as, — . arma virumque cano || Trojae qui primus ab oris. b) Less frequently the caesura occurs after the thesis of the fourth foot, usually accompanied by another in the second foot ; as, — inde toro || pater Aeneas |1 sic orsus ab alt" est. c) Sometimes the caesura occurs between the two short syl- lables of the third foot ; as, — O passi graviora j| dabit deus his quoque finem. This caesura is called Feminine, as opposed to the caesura after a long syllable, which is called Masculine (as under a and b). 246 PROSODY. d) A pause sometimes occurs at the end of the fourth foot. This is called the Bucolic Diaeresis, as it was borrowed by the Romans from the Bucolic poetry of the Greeks. Thus ; — sdlstitium pecori defendite ; || jam venit aestas. DACTYLIC PENTAMETER. 369. I. The Dactylic Pentameter consists of two parts, each of which contains two dactyls, followed by a long syllable. Spondees may take the place of the dactyls in the first part, but not in the second. The long syllable at the close of the first half of the verse always ends a word. The scheme is the following : — jL 00 Z. 00 Z-WZ. WW Z- WW 5-d 2. The Pentameter is never used alone, but only in connection with the Hexameter. The two arranged alternately form the so-called Ele- giac Distich. Thus : — Vergilium vidi tantum, nee amara TibuUo Tempus amicitiae fata dedSre meae. IAMBIC MEASURES. 370. I. The most important Iambic verse is the Iambic Trimeter (§ 366. II ), called also Senarius. This is an acata- lectic verse. It consists of six Iambi. Its pure form is : — V^ W \J W W ^ — Beatus ille qui prooul negotiis. The Caesura usually occurs in the third foot ; less fre- quently in the fourth. 2. In place of the Iambus, a Tribrach (w \j \j) may stand in any foot but the last. In the odd feet (first, third, and fifth) may stand a Spondee, Dactyl, or Anapaest, though the last two are less frequent. Sometimes a Proceleusmatic (w w w v^) occurs. 3. In the Latin comic writers, Plautus and Terence, great free- dom is permitted, and the various equivalents of the Iambus, viz. the Dactyl, Anapaest, Spondee, Tribrach, Proceleusmatic, are freely admitted in any foot except the last. SUPPLEMENTS TO THE GRAMMAR. I. JULIAN CALENDAR. 371. I. The names of the Roman months are : Januarius, Februa- rius, Martius, Aprilis, Majus, Junius, Julius (Quintilis ^ prior to 46 B.C.), Augustus (Sextilisi before the Empire), September, Octo- ber, November, December. These words are properly Adjectives in agreement with mensis understood. 2. Dates were reckoned from three points in the month : — a) The Calends, the first of the month. b) The Nones, usually the fifth of the month, but the seventh in March, May, July, and October. c) The Ides, usually the thirteenth of the month, but the fif- teenth in March, May, July, and October. 3. From these points dates were reckoned backward; consequently all days after the Ides of any month were reckoned as so many days before the Calends of the month next following. 4. The day before the Calends, Nones, or Ides of any month is designated as pridie Kalendas, Nonas, Idus. The second day be- , fore was designated as die tertio ante Kalendas N5nas, etc. Simi- larly the third day before was designated as die quarto, and so on. These designations are arithmetically inaccurate, but the Romans reckoned both ends of the series. The Roman numeral indicating the date is therefore always larger by one than the actual number of days before Nones, Ides, or Calends. 5. In indicating dates, the name of the month is added in the form of an Adjective agreeing with Kalendas, Nonas, Idus. Various forms of expression occur, of which that given under d) is most common : — a) die quinto ante Idus Martias ; b) quinto ante Idus Martias ; c) quinto (V) Idus Martias ; d^ ante diem quintum Idus Martias. 1 Originally the Roman year began with March. This explains the names Quintilis, Sextilis, September, etc., fifth month, sixth month, etc. 247 248 SUPPLEMENTS TO THE GRAMMAR. 6. These designations may be treated as nouns and combined with the prepositions in, ad, ex ; as, — ad ante diem IV Kalendas Octobres, up to the 2Zth of September. ex ante diem quintum Idas Octobres, /r^?;/ the nth of October. 7. In leap-year the 25th was reckoned as the extra day in February. The 24th was designated as ante diem VI Kalendas Martias, and the 25th as ante diem bis VI Kal Mart. 372. CALENDAR. Days of the month. March, May, July, January, August, April, June, Sep- February. October. December. tember, November. 1 KalendTs. KalendTs. Kalendis. Kalendis. 2 VI. Nonas. IV Nonas. IV Nonas. IV. Nonas. 3 V. III. III. III. 4 IV Pridie Nonas. Pridie Nonas. Pridie Nonas. 5 III. NONIS. NONlS. NONIS. 6 Pridie Nonas. VIII. Idus. VIII. Idus. VIII. Idus. 7 NonTs. VII. VII. VII. 8 VIII. Idus. VI. VI. VI. 9 VII. V. V. V. 10 VI. IV. IV. IV. 11 V. III. III. III. 12 IV. Pridie Idus. Pridie Idus. Pridie Idus. 13 III. _ " Idibus. Tdibus. Idibus. 14 Pridie Idus. XIX. Kalend. XVIII. Kalend. XVI. Kalend. IS Idibus. • XVIII. " XVII. XV. 16 XVII. Kalend. XVII. " XVI. XIV. 17 XVI. XVI. XV. XIII. 18 XV. XV. XIV. XII. 19 XIV XIV. XIII. XI. 20 XIII. XIII. XII. X. 21 XII. XII. XI. IX. 22 XI. XI. X. VIII. 23 X. X. IX. VII. 24 IX. IX. VIII. VI. 25 VIII. VIII. VII. V. (bis VI.)" 26 VII. VII. VI. IV. (V.) " 27 VI. VI. V. III. (IV.) " 28 V. V. IV. Prid. Kal. (Ill Kal.) 29 IV. IV. III. (Prid. Kal.) 30 III. III. Pridie Kalend. (Enclosed forms are 31 Pridie Kalend. Pridie Kalend. for leap-year.) FIGURES OF SYNTAX. 249 II. PROPER NAMES. 373. I. The name of a Roman citizen regularly consisted of three parts : the praenomen (or given name), the nomen (name of the gens or clan), and the cognomen (family name) . Such a typical name is exemplied by Marcus TuUius Cicero, in which Marcus is the prae- nomen, Tullius' the nomen, and Cicero the cognomen. Sometimes 3. second cognomen (in later Latin called an agnomen) is added — rixpecially in honor of military achievements ; as, — Gaius Cornelius Scipio Africanus. 2. Abbreviations of Proper Names. A. = Aulus. Mam. = Mamercus. App. = Appius. N. = Numerius. C. = Gains. P. = Publius. Cn. = Gnaeus. Q. = Quintus. D. = Decimus. Sex. = Sextus. K. = Kaeso. Ser. = Servius. L. — Lucius. Sp. = Spurius. M. = Marcus. T. = Titus. M\ = Manius. Ti. = Tiberius. III. FIGURES OF SYNTAX AND RHETORIC. A. Figures of Syntax. 374. I. Ellipsis is the omission of one or more words ; as, — quid multa, why {should I say) much f 2. Brachvlogy is a brief or condensed form of expression ; as, — ut ager sine cultura fructuosus esse non potest, sic sine doc- trina animus, as a field cannot be prodiictive without cultiva- tion^ so the mi7id {cannot be productive) without learning. Special varieties of Brachylogy are — a) Zeugma, in which one verb is made to stand for two ; as, — minis aut blandimentis corrupta = {terrified) by threats or corrupted by flattery. b) Compendiary Comparison, by which a modifier of an object is mentioned instead of the object itself; as, — dissimilis erat Chares eorum et factis et moribus, lit. Chares was different from their conduct and character^ i.e. Chares's conduct and character were different, etc. 2SO FIGURES OF SYNTAX AND RHETORIC. 3. Pleonasm is an unnecessary fullness of expression ; as, — prius praedicam, lit. I will first say in advance. 4. Hendfadys (ev 8ta Svoti/, otie through two) is the use of two nouns joined by a conjunction, in the sense of a noun modified by a Genitive or an Adjective ; as, — f ebris et aestus, the heat of fever ; celeritate cursuque, dy swift rtinning. 5. Proldpsis, or Anticipation, is the introduction of an epithet in advance of the action which makes it appropriate ; as, — submersas obrue puppes, lit. overwhelm their submerged, ships, i.e. overwhelm and sink their ships. a. The name Prolepsis is also applied to the introduction of a noun or pronoun as object of the main clause where we should expect it to stand as subject of a subordinate clause. Thus : — nosti Marcellum quam tardus sit, yoit know how slow Marcellus is (lit. you know Marcellus, how slow he is). Both varieties of Prolepsis are chiefly confined to poetry. 6. Anacoliithon is a lack of grammatical consistency in the con- struction of the sentence ; as, — turn Anci filii . . . impensius eis indignitas crescere, then the sons of Ancus . . . their indignation increased all the more. 7. Hysteron Prdteron consists in the inversion of the natural order of two words or phrases ; as, — moriamur et in media arma ruamus = let us rush into the midst of arms and die. B. Figures of Rhetoric. 375. I. Litotes (literally softening) is the expression of an ide?< by the denial of its opposite ; as, — haud parum laboris, no little toil (i.e. much toil) ; non ignoro, I am not ignorant (i.e. I am well aware). 2. Oxym6ron is the combination of contradictory conceptions; as, — sapiens insania, wise folly. 3. Alliteration is the employment of a succession of words presenting frequent repetition of the same letter (mostly initial) ; as, — sensim sine sensu aetas senescit. 4. Onomatopoeia is the suiting of sound to sense ; as, — quadrupedante putrem sonitu quatit ungula campum, <- And shake with horny hoofs the solid ground. "^ INDEX OF THE SOURCES OF THE H^LUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES CITED IN THE SYNTAX.^ p. 1 1 8, nonne videtis, Sest. 47. num exspectas, Phil, ii, 86. videsne, Vatin. 30. sensistine, Cat. i, 8. a rebus, de Sen. 15. p. 119, visne locum, Leg. ii, i. estisne, Liv. i, 38, 2. jam ea, Ter. Phor. 525. estne f rater, Ter. Ad. 569. p. 120, decorum est, Hor. Od. iii, 2, 13. opportune accidit, AU. i, 17, 2. Numa, Eut. i, 3. p. 121, philosophia, Tj^sc. Disp. ii, 16. assentatio, Lael. 89. Corinthi, Tac. H. n, i. p. 122, audi tu, Livy, i, 24. nate, mea, ^e». i, 664. rumor est, Ter. And. 185. p. 123, galeam, Aen. ii, 392. cinctus, Ov. Am. iii, 9, 61. nodo sinus, Aen. i, 320. p. 124, idem gloriari, de Sen. 32. eadem peccat, N. D. i, 51. multa egeo. Cell, xiii, 24. multum valet, Hor. Epp. i, 6, 52. nihil peccat, Stat. 161. minitantem vana, Sil. i, 306. acerba tuens, Lucr. v, 33. dulce loquentem, Hor. Od. i, 22, 24. multum sunt, B. G. iv, i, 8. servitutem, PI. Pers. 34 a. vitam, Ter. Ad. 859. stadimn, Off. iii, 10, 42. Olympia, de Sen. 14. p. 125, pisds. Sen. N. Q. iii, 18, 2. orationes. Brut. 82. homines. Rose. Am. 101. otium, Hor. Od. ii, 16, i. me duas, Att. ii, 7, i. p. 126, te litteras. Pis. 73. hoc te, Ter. Hec. 766, me id, PI. Tr. 96. non te, Fam. ii, 16, 3. omnes artes, Liv. 25, 37, rogatus, de Dom. 16. multa, iV. D. ii, 166. milites, 5. C. i, 54. p. 127, tremit, Lucr. iii, 489. nuda, Aen. i, 320. manus, ylew. ii, 57. hie locus, B. G.\, 49. in domum, Ac.'i, 13, p. 128, Thalam, Sail. Jug. 75, i. Thurios in, Nep. Ale. 4. cum Acen, Nep. Dat. 5. Italiam venit, Aen. i, 2. p. 130, amicis. Sail. C. 16, 4. Orgetorix, jB. G. i, 2. p. 131, munitioni, B. G. i, 10. mihi ante, Verr. v, 123. illi, Tac. Ag. 9. intercludere, PI. M. G. 223. oppidum, B. C. iii, 80. tu mihi, Verr. 3, 213. quid mihi, Hor. Epp. i, 3, 15. p. 132, erit ille, Eel. i, 7. quae ista, Par. 41. honorem, Verr. iv, 25. Caesar, Div. ii, 79. scintillam, Aen. i, 174. disputatio, Tusc. Disp. ii, 2. honesta, 0^. iii, 38. p. 133, castris, B. G. vii, 16. legiones, B. C. ii, 22. receptui, B. G. vii, 47. fortunae, Fam. vi, 5, i. quibus, Flac. 19. hos tibi, Nep. Paus. 2. me gerendo, Liv. i, 23. noxiae. Leg. iii, 11. p. 134, it clamor, Aen. v, 451. dum Latio, Aen. i, 6. p. 137, magni, Nep. Cat. i, 2. tantae moUs, Aen. i, 33. 1 For explanation of the abbreviations, see p. 257. 251 252 INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES. p- 139, p. 140, p. 141, p. 142, p. 143, p. 138, viri, Tusc. Disp. ii, 43. memoria, Or. 54. Epicuri, F. y, 3. praeteritorum, Div. i, 63. nomina, PL Poen. 1062. reminiscere, B. G.i, 13. reminiscens, Nep. Ale. 6. mihi patriae, SuU. 19. te veteris, ad Her. iv, 24, 33. me admones, ad Att. v, i, 3. pecuniae, Place. 43. miseremini, Verr. i, 72. desine, Hor. Od. ii, 9, 17. operum, Hor. Od. iii, 17, 16. curis, Marc. 34. Caesar, 5. G. 5, 51. caret, Hor. Sat. i, 3, 66. urbem, A^e^. Thras. i. abstinere, P/iw. £^^. i, 12, 9 hostes, 5. G. i, i, 4. praedones, Verr. iv, 144. dissentio, Plane. 9. secernantur, Ca/. i, 32. ab Ulixe, Liv. i, 49, 9. a fortuna, 5. G. v, 34, 2. a multitudine, 5. G. iii, 2, i. p. 144, melle dulcior, de Sen. 31. patria, Cat. i, 27. amplius, B. G. vii, 15, i. opinione, 5. G. ii, 3, i. munere, Aen. vi, 885. carne. Sail. Jug. 89. castris, 5. G. ii, 26, 4. opus est properato. Mil. 49. p. 14s, nititur, Aen. vi, 760. nervis, N. D. ii, 59. mortali, Luer. v, 65. quid hoc, Sest. 29. quid mea, Fam. xiv, 4, 3. fossas, B. G. iii, 18. vinum, Juv. vii, 121. p. 146, militibus, B. G.i, %, i. victoria, B. G. i, 14, 4. natura loci, B. G. iii, 9, 3. p. 147, nulla est, Brut. 164. exstinguitur, Tae. A. ii, 72. longo, Aen. v, 320. cum febri, de Or. iii, 6. improbitas, de Or. ii, 237. aer calore, N. D. ii, 27. assuetus, de Or. iii, 58. p. 148, puella, PL Mere. 13. vir singulari, PL Vid. 41. sunt specie, B. G. vi, 28, i. scopulis, Aen. i, 166. Helvetii, B. G. i, 2, 2. me dignor, Aen. i, 335. p. 149, Cn. Pompeio, B. G. iv, i. omnes virtutes. Fin. ii, 117. perditis, Fam. vi, i, 4. nullo adversante, Tae. A. i, 2. passis palmis, B. C. iii, 98. audito eum, Liv. xxviii, 7. p. 150, stant litore, Aen. vi, 901. p. 151, a Gergovia, B. G. vii, 59, i. Stella, N. D. ii, 52. biennio, Tae. Agr. 14. p. 153, prima et, Tae. ^. i, 37. omnium rerum, Fam. vi, 21, 1. eadem alacritas, B. G. iv, 24, 4. res operae, B. G.v, 11, 5. stultitia, F. iii, 39. p. 154, domus, uxor, Ter. And. 891. pars. Sail. Jug. 14, 15. p. 156, senectus, de Sen. 55. exercitus, Livy, xxxix, i. p. 157, virtus, Lael. 100. p. 158, me oravit, Phil, ii, 45. me oraverunt, Div. Caee. 2. suum genium, Tae. Dial. 9. p. 159, Hannibalem, Sest. 142. suus quemque. Rose. Am. 67. Belgae, B. G. ii, i, i. Galli, B. G. vi, 8, i. Themistocles, Nep. Them. 9. illud intellego. Sail. Jug. 85, 5. hie est, PL Tr. 697. p. 160, Maximum, de Sen. 10. non is sum, B. G.v, 30, 2. non suspicabatur, Verr. i, 36. vincula, Cat. iv, 7. quod idem, ^c. ii, 52. bonus vir, Lael. 65. p. 161, ipso terrore, B. G. iv, 33, i. valvae se, Div. i, 74. Persae, Nep. Ale. 5. ea molestissime, Q. Fr. i, i, 2. p. 162, career quae, Verr. v, 143. Belgae, B. G. ii, i, i. nostra qui. Cat. i, 7. servili, B. G. i, 40. erant, B. G. i, 6, quam quisque, Tuse. Disp. 41. non longe, B. G. i, 10, i. Themistocles, Nep. Them. 4, 3. INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES. 253 P- 163, p. 164, P- 165, p. 166, p. 167, p. 168, p. 169, p. 170, p. 171, p. 172, p. 173, P- 174, P- 17s, P- 177, p. 178, numqwam digne, de Sen. 2. cognatio, Arch. 2. mors est, Tusc. Disp. i, 27. justitia, F. i, 50. si quisquam, Lael. 9. • potestne, Tusc. Disp. iv, 54. si ullo, Att. xii, 23, I. taetrior, Verr. iv, 123. quod cuique. Off. i, 21. quinto quoque, Verr. ii, 139. nemo Romanus, Liv. viii, 30, 3. alter exercitum. Plane. 86. alteri se, B. G. i, 26, i. causidicus, de Or. i, 202. Tarquinii, Liv. i, 34, 7. non omnis, Div. ii, 90. Corioli, Liv. ii, ss, 8. duo milia, Curt, iii, 2, 5. temeritas, F. iii, 72. si tu, Fam. xiv, 5, i. velatus, Ov. Met. v, no. tunica, Aen. viii, 457. virtus, Lael. 100. dum vitant, Hor. Sat. i, 2, 24. Caesar, B. G. vii, 90, 2. jam pridem, Att. ii, 5, i. Duilium, de Sen. 44. hostes, B. G. v, 9, 6. domicilium, Arch. 7. Regulus, Oj^. iii, 100. Caesar, B. G. iv, 17, i. nihil habebam, Att. ix, 10, i. videor, N. D. ii, 72. Gallos, B. G. vii, 4, 4. honestum, F. ii, 49. si solos, Tusc. Disp. i, 9. rex tantum, Nep. Con. 4. Verres, Verr. Act. Pr. 12. ardebat. Brut. 302. Caesar, B. G. iii, 24, i. hoc jam, Cat. i, 5. dico me, Sull. 27. quare. Cat. i, 32. isto bono, de Sen. 33. ne repugnetis, Cluent. 6. tu vero, Tusc. Disp. i, 112. impii ne, Leg. ii, 41. cave ignoscas, Lig. 14. quid faciam, PI. Cure. 589. ego redeam, Ter. Run. 49. huic cedamus ! Phil, xiii, 16. quid facerem, Ter. Eun. 831. hunc ego, Arch. 18. ne sint, de Sen. 34. fuerit, Ferr. i, 37. di istaec, Ter. H. T. 1038. falsus utinam, Liv. xxi, 10, 10. p. 179, dicat aliquis, Ter. And. 640. fortunam, Pub. Syr. 193. velim mihi, Fam. xiii, 75, i. nolim putes, Fam. ix, 15, 4. dies deficiat, N. D. iii, 81. p. 180, egredere. Cat. i, 20. rem vobis, Verr. iv, i. si bene, de Sen. 3. consules, Leg. iii, 8. hominem, Twelve Tables. amicitia, Liv. 38, 38, i. quin equos, Liv. i, 57, 7. p. 181, adjuta, Ter. Eun. 150. portas, B. G. ii, :i^, i. haec, ^«(/. 472. ut ne. Of. i, 103. ut non. Cat. i, 23. ut earum, B. G. iv, 17, 10. p. 182, Helvetii, 5. G. i, 7, 3. haec habui, t/e Sen. 85. non habebat, 5. G. iv, 38, 2. idoneus, Verr. iii, 41. dignus, Zeg. iii, 5. multa, rw5c. />w^. i, 80. p. 183, sunt qui, Inv. ii, 144. nemo, Fam. i, 4, 2. sapientia. Fin. i, 43. quae, Lael. 23. non is sum, B. G. v, 30, 2. non longius, 5. G. ii, 21, 3. o fortunate, Arch. 24. ut qui, Phil, xi, 30. egomet, de Or. i, 82. nemo est, Verr. iv, 115. nemo fuit, B. C. iii, 53, 3. quem audierim, Nep. Ar. i, 2. p. 184, quis tam, Tusc. Disp. iii, 71. Siciliam, Verr. Act. Pr. 12. mons, B. G. i, 6, i. non is. Cat. i, 22. nemo est, t/e Sen. 24. . habetis, Co/, iv, 24. nihil, Ter. H. T.675. nemo est, B. G. vi, 39, 3. p. 185, Themistocles, Nep. Them. 8, 3. neque, de Sen. 84. quoniam, Nep. Milt. 7, 5. noctu, Tusc. Disp. iv, 44. Bellovaci, B. G. vii, 75. 254 INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES. p. 1 86, id feci, Caec. loi. Crasso, Fam. xiii, i6, 3. hoc ita, Leg. iii, 31. Haeduos, .B. G. i, 16, 6. id omitto, Sail. Jug. no, 7. p. 187, Epaminondas, Nep. Ep. 9, 4. id ut, Nep. Them. 8, 3. Caesar, B. G. iii, 9, 2. ubi de, B. G. i, 7, 3. ut quisque, Verr. v, 143. hostes, B. G. iv, 26, 2. id ubi, Liv. i, 32, 13. p. 188, postquam occupatae, Liv. xxiv, 35, 4- postquam Romam, Sail. Jug. 28, 2. postquam structi, Liv. i, 23, 6. posteaquam, Leg. ii, 64. an turn, Pis. 26. credo tum, Verr. iv, 46. eo tempore, Lig. 20. illo die, Mil. 38. p, 189, Lysander, Div. i, 96. Pythagoras, iV. D. iii, 88. jam GalU, B. G. vii, 26, 3. Treveri, B. G. vi, 7, i. cum ad, Verr. v, 27. cum equitatus, B. G. v, 19, 2. saepe cum, TVe^. Cirn. 4, 2. cum procucurrissent, B. C. ii, 41, 6. p. 190, tum tua, Hor. Epp. i, 18, 84. cum videbis, PI. Bacch. 145. stabiUtas, Lael. 82. cum tacent, Cat. i, 21. cum te, Att. xiv, 17 A, 4. prius, PI. Merc. 456. nihil contra, Place. 51. non prius. Sail. C. 51. p. 191, priusquam, Liv. i, 24, 3. tempestas. Sen. Ep. 103, 2. priusquam telum, B. C. ii, 34, 6. animum, PI. Amph. 240. sol antequam, Phil, xiv, 27. Ale:sander, Quint. Curt, iv, 6, 17- dum haec, J5. G. iii, 17, i- dirni anima, Att. ix, 10, 3. Lacedaemoniorum, Tusc. Disp. i, lOI. Cato, Nep. Cat. 2, 4. p. 192, donee, Liv. xxiii, 31, 9- ferrum, Nep. Ep. 9, 3. trepidationis, Liv. xxi, 28, 11. exspectavit, B. G. iv, 23, 4. dum litterae, Fow. xi, 23, 2. postulo, r^r. ylw(i. 550. orat, Ter. Ad. 882. milites, B. G. ii, 21, 2. Helvetiis, B. G. i, 2, i. p. 193, huic. Rose. Am. 54. consuli, Liv. xxxv, 20, 4. ne lustrum, Liv. xxiv, 43, 4. prohibuit, Liv. xxv, 35, 6. nee quin, Liv. xxvi, 40, 4. constitueram, ^//. xvi, 10, i. decrevit. Cat. i, 4. convenit, Liv. x, 27, 2. facut, PI. Rud. 1 2 18. cura ut. Cat. iii, 12. laborabat, 5. G. vii, 31, i. p. 194, sequitur, N. D. ii, 81. eos moneo, Cat. ii, 20. huic imperat, B. G. iv, 21, 8. opto, Verr. Act. Pr. 50. p. 19s, vereor ne, Att. vii, 12, 2. ex quo, F. ii, 24. ita fit, Tusc. Disp. ii, i6. est mos. Brut. 84. p. 196, quis. Par. 48. illud, Ojf. iii, in. hoc uno, de Or. i, 32. bene mihi, Tusc. Disp. i, 97. quod, B. G. i, 44, 6. quod me, Nep. Ep. 5, 6. p. 197, oculis, B. G. i, 12, I. bis bina, N. D. ii, 49. effugere, N. D. iii, 14. saepe autem, A^. D. iii, 14. Epaminondas, F. ii, 97. ex Socrate, Tusc. Disp. v, 34. nescio, PI. Amph. 1056. p. 198, conantur, B. G. i, 8, 4. pergit, Ziz>. i, 7, 6. quaeritur, A. Z>. i, 61. hand scio, Tusc. Disp. ii, 41. p. 199, naturam. Of. i, 100. memoria, de Sen. 21. si quis, B. G. i, 48, 6. si dicendo, Tac. Z)ja/. 19. p. 200, mentiar, Lael. 10. haec si. Cat. i, 19. sapientia, F. i, 42. consilium, de Sen. 19. LaeUus, Arch. 16. num igitur, c?e Sen. 19. INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES. 255 p. 20I p. 202 P- 203, p. 204, P- 205, p. 206, p. 207, p. 208, p. 209, p. 211, p. 212, P- 213, , nisi felicitas, Tac. Ag7. 31. eum patris, Phil, ii, 99. si Sestius, Sest. 81. si unum, Liv. ii, 38, 5- non potestis, F. ii, 71. eras, PL Merc. 770. haec reputent, Titsc. Disp. i, 51. roges, F. iv, 69. ferreus, Fam. xv, 21, 3. dolorem, Phil. 12, 21. si feceris, Fam. v, 19, 2. hoc si, Fam. vii, i, 6. hunc mihi, Cat. i, 18. nihil. Cat. ii, 10. nisi. Mil. 19. sed quid, Div. Caec. 14. serviam, PI. Men. iioi. sit fur, Verr. v, 4. haec sint, Ac. ii, 105. ne sit, Tusc. Disp. ii, 14. homines, Phil, ii, 39. non est, Rep. i, 10. quamquam, Off. i, 56. Caesar, B. G. iv, 31, i. Atticus, Nep. Att. 6, 2. licet, Rose. Am. 31. quamquam quid, Cat. i, 22. quamquam, Lfz>. xxxvi, 34, 6. quamvis, multi, Tac. Dial. 2. quamvis infesto, Liv. ii, 40, 7. multi. Of. iii, 82. omnia postposui, Fam. xvi, 21, 6. nil obstat, Hor. Sat. i, i, 40. oderint. Ace. 204. manent, (fe Sen. 22. nubant, P/. ^m/. 491, quidquid, A en. ii, 49. quidquid oritur, Div. ii, 60. Regulus, Of. iii, 100. turn Romulus, Liv. i, 9, 2. nuntiattmi, B. G. i, 38, i. dixit, Nep. Them. 7, 5. Ariovistus, B. G. i, 44, 7. milites, B. G. iii, 5, 3, Caesar, B. G. i, 14, 6. concursu, Tac. Z>io/. 39. demonstrabantur, de Sen. 78, Paetus, Att. ii, i, 12. nemo. Par. 52. cum diversas, Tac. Dial, i, 4. mos est, Oral. 151. quod ego, PI. Capt. 961. dulce, Hor. Od. iii, 2, 13. virorum, Tusc. Disp. ii, 43. aliud est, Tusc. Disp. iv, 27. impune. Sail. Jug. 31, 26. licuit, Tm^c. Z)w^. i, 33. p. 214, Demosthenes, F. v, 5. beatus, N. D. i, 48. Cato, Sail. Cat. 54, 5. apertum est, F. v, 34. p. 215, Epicurei, Lael. 13. Thales, N. D. i, 25. Democritus, N. D. i, 29. nuUo se, Lig. 3. nee mihi, de Sen. 85. eas res, B. G. i, 18. te tua, Brut. 331. cupio, Cat. i, 4. Timoleon, iVe^. Tim. 3, 4. p. 216, gaudeo, PI. Bacch. 456. non moleste, de Sen. 7. Sestius, Sest. 95. p. 217, traditum, Tusc. Disp. v, 114. audax, Hor. Od. i, 3, 25. huncine, Hor. Sat. i, 9, 72. interim, B. G. i, 16, i. p. 218, assurgentem, Liv. iv, 19. gloria, Tusc. Disp. iii, 3. Conon, Nep. Con. 4, 5. omne, PM. v, 31. mente, Tusc. Disp. v, 100. p. 219, Solon, de Sen. 26. sol, N. D. ii, 102. mendaci, Div. ii, 146. perfidiam, B. G. vii, 5, 5. eis Catonem, de Sen. 3. Homerus, de Sen. 54. urbem, Liv. xxii, 20, 4, equitatum, B. G. i, 15, i. p. 220, obliviscendum, Pac. Hi^t. ii, i. numquam, Ferr. i, 38. suo cuique, N. D. iii, i. Caesar, B. G. i, 13, i. p. 221, scribendo, Fam. xv, 6, 2. mens. Of. i, 105. Themistocles, Nep. Them. 2, 3. multa, P. i, 5. p. 222, ad pacem, Liv. xxi, 13, i. hostes, B. G. iii, 6, 2. legati, B. G. iv, 13, 5. quae ille, ^a/Z. Pr. i, 77, n. p. 223, legati, B. G. i, 30, i. do (colloco), PI. Tr. 735. hoc est, Att. vii, 22, 2. cum homines, Cat. i, 31. 256 INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES. p. 224, p. 225, p. 226, p. 227, p. 228, p. 229, p- 230, P- 231, discidia, F. i, 44. horae, de Sen. 69. Caesar, B. G. ii, 35, 3. cita, Hor. Sat. i, i, 8. qui aether, N. D. ii, 41. adsentatio, Lad. 89. Cn. Pompeio, B. G. iv, i, i. Darius, Nep. Milt. 4, i. magnus, Nep. Them. 6, i. erant duo, B. G. i, 6, i. nisi forte, de Sen. 18. id ut, Nep. Them. 8, 3. eo cum, B. G. vii, 7, 4. ut ad, Lael. 5. Septimus, de Sen. 38. recepto, B. C. iii, 12, i. sed pleni. Arch. 14. horribilem, Tusc. Disp. i, 118. simulatam, Tac. A. i, 10. p. 232, Caesar, B. G. i, 25, i. Haedui, B. G. i, 11, 2. Caesar cum, B. G. i, 7, i. accidit, Nep. Ale. 3, 2. p. 233, si quid. Arch. 1. Caesar, 5. G. v, 4, i. p. 237, hostium, B. G. iii, 29, 3. mens quoque, de Sen. 36. ' tanto, Sull. 59. p. 238, pro multitudine, B. G. i, 2, 5. p. 249, ut ager, Tusc. Disp. ii, 13. minis, Tusc. Disp. v, 87. dissimilis, Nep. Chab. 3, 4. p. 250, febris, Cat. i, 31. submersas, ^ew. i, 69. nosti, Fam. viii, 10, 3. tum Anci, Liv. i, 40, 2. moriamur, ^e», ii, 353. quadrupedante, Aen. viii, 596. ABBREVIATIONS USED IN INDEX TO THE ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES. Ac, Cicero, Academica. Ace, Accius. ad Her., ad Herennium. Aen., Virgil, Aeneid. Arch., Cicero, pro Archia. Att., Cicero, Epistulae ad Atticum. B. C, Caesar, de Bello Civili. B. G., Caesar, de Bello Gallico. Brut., Cicero, Brutus. Caec, Cicero, pro Caecina. Cat., Cicero, in Qatilinam. Cluent., Cicero, pro Cluentio. Curt., Quintus Curtius. de Dom., Cicero, de Domo Sua. de Or., Cicero, de Oratore. de Sen., Cicero, de Senectute. D., Cicero, de Divinatione. Div. Caec, Cicero, Divinatio in Caecilium. Eel., Virgil, Eclogues. Eut., Eutropius. F., Cicero, de Finibus. Fam., Cicero,' Epistulae ad Familiares. Flac, Cicero, pro Flacco. Cell., Aulus Gellius. Hor., Horace. Epp., Epistles. Od., Odes. Sat., Satires. Inv., Cicero, de Inventione. Juv., Juvenal. Lael., Cicero, Laelius, de Amicitia. Leg., Cicero, de Legihus. Lig., Cicero, pro Ligario. Li v., Livy. Lucr., Lucretius. Marc, Cicero, pro Marcello. Mil., Cicero, pro Milone. N. D., Cicero, de Natura Deorum. Nep., Nepos. Ale, Alcibiades. At., Aris tides. Att., Atticus. Cat., Cato. Chab. Chahrias. Cim., Cimon. Con., Conon. ■ Dat., Datames. Ep., Epaminondas. Milt., Miltiades. Paus., Pausanias. Them., Themistocles. Thras., Thrasybulus. Tim., Timoleon. Off., Cicero, de Officiis. Or., Cicero, Orator. Ov., Ovid. Am., Amores. Met., Metamorphoses. Par., Cicero, Paradoxa. Phil., Cicero, Philippics. Pis., Cicero, in Pisonem. Plane, Cicero, pro Plancio. PI., Plautus. Amph., Amphitruo. Aul., Aulularia. Bacch., Bacchides. Capt., Captivi. Cure, Curculio. Men., Menaechmi. Mere, Mercator. M. G., Miles Gloria sus. Pers., Persa. Poen., Poenulus. Rud., Rudens. Tr., Trinummus. Vid., Vidularia. Plin. Epp., Pliny the Younger, Letters. Pub. Syr., Publilius Syrus. Q. F., Cicero, ad Quintum Fratrem. Rose Am., Cicero, pro Roscio Amerino. Sail., SaUust. C, Catiline. Fr., Fragments. Jug., Jugurtha. Sen., Seneca. Ep., Epistles. N. Q., Naturales Quaestiones. 257 258 ABBREVIATIONS IN THE EXAMPLES. Sest., Cicero, pro Sestio. Sex. Rose, Cicero, pro Sexto Roscio. Sil., Silius Italicus. Stat., Caecilius Statius. Sull., Cicero, pro Sulla. Tac, Tacitus. A., Annals. Agr., Agricola. Dial., Dialogus de Oraioribus. Ger., Germania. H., Histories. Ter., Terence. Ad., Adelphoi. And., Andria. Eun., Eunuchus. Hec, Hecyra. H. T., Hautontimoroumenos. Phor., Phormio. Tusc. Disp., Cicero, Tusculan Disputa- tions. Twelve Tables, Laws of the Twelve Tables. Vatin,, Cicero, in Vatinium. Verr., Cicero, in Verrem. Verr., Act, Pr., Cicero, Actio Prima in C. Verrem. INDEX TO THE PRINCIPAL PARTS OF THE MOST IMPORTANT VERBS. Note. — Compounds are not given unless they -present some special irregularity. The references are to sections. abdo, 122, I, 2. abicio, 122, III. abnuo, 122, II. aboleo, 121, I. abstergeo, 121, III. absum, 125. accendo, 122, I, 4. accidit, 138, III. accio, 121, 1, N. accipio, 122, III. acquiro, 122, I, 6. acuo, 122, II. •»ddo, 122, I, 2. adhaeresco, 122, IV, 2. adiplscor, 122, V. adolesco, 122, IV, i. adsum, 125. advenio, 123, IV. affero, 129. afficio, 122, III. affligo, 122, I, I, a. agnosco, 122, IV, i, ago, 122, I, 3. algeo, 121, III. alo, 122, I, 5. amicio, 123, III. amo, 120, I. amplector, 122, V. ango, 122, I, 7. aperio, 123, II. appeto, 122, I, 6. arceo, 121, II, a. arcesso, 122, I, 6. ardeo, 121, III. aresco, 122, iV, 2. arguo, 122, II. ascendo, 122, I, 4. aspicio, 122, III. assentior, 123, VII. . assuefacio, 122, III. assueflo, 122, III. audio, 123, I. aufero, 129. augeo, 121, III. aveo, 121, II, a, N.-2. C. cado, 122, I, .2. caedo, 122, I, 2. calefacio, 122, III. calefio, 122, III. caleo, 121, II, a. calesco, 122, IV, 2. cano, 122, I, 2. capesso, 122, I, 6. capio, 122, III. careo, 121, II, a. carpo, 122, I, I, a. caveo, 121, V. cedo, 122, I, I, b. censeo, 121, II, b. cerno, 122, I, 6. cieo, 121, I. cingo, 122, I, I, a. circumsisto, 122, I, 2. claudo, 122, I, I, b. claudo, 122, I, 7. coemo, 122, I, 3. coepi, 133. coerceo, 121, II, a. cognosce, 122, IV, I. cogo, 122, I, 3. 259 colligo, 122, I, 3. colo, 122, I, 5. comminlscor, 122, V. comperio, 123, V. compleo, 121, I. concutio, 122, III. condo, 122, I, 2. confero, 129. confiteor, 121, VII. congruo, 122, II. consenesco, 122, IV, 2. consero, 122, I, 5. consero, 122, I, 6 (plant). consido, 122, I, 4. consisto, 122, I, 2. conspicio, 122, III. constat, 138, III. constituo, 122, II. consuesco, 122, IV, i. consuls, 122, I, 5. contineo, 121, II, b. contingit, 138, III. coquo, 122, I, I, a. crepo, 120, II. cresco, 122, IV, i. cubo, 120, II. cupio, 122, III. curro, 12 2, I, 2. debeo, 121, II, a. decerno, 122, I, 6. decet, 138, II. dedecet, 138, II. dedo, 122, I, 2. defends, 122, I, 4. 26o INDEX TO THE PRINCIPAL PARTS deleo, 121, I, deligo, 122, I, 3. demo, 122, I, 3. desero, 122, I, 5. desino, 122, I, 6. desum, 125. dico, 122, I, I, a. differo, 129. diligo, 122, I, 3. dimico, 120, II. dirimo, 122, I, 3. diripio, 122, III. dlruo, 122, II. discerno, 122, I, 6. disco, 122, IV, I. dissero, 122, I, 5. distinguo, p. 87, footnote, divido, 122, I, I, b. do, 127. doceo, 121, II, 6. doleo, 121, II, a. domo, 120, II. duco, 122, I, I, a. E. edo, 122, I, 2. edo, 122, I, 3. eflfero, 129. efifugio, 122, III. egeo, 121, II, a, N. i. elicio, 122, III. emineo, 121, II, a, N. i. emo, 122, I, 3. eo, 132. esurio, 123, VI. evado, p. 87, footnote, evanesco, 122, IV, 3. excolo, 122, I, 5. excudo, 122, I, 4. exerceo, 121, II, a. experior, 123, VII. expleo, 121, I, N. explico, 120, II. exstinguo, p. 87, footnote, extimesco, 122, IV, 2. facio, 122, III. fallo, 122, I, 2. fateor, 121, VII. faveo, 121, V. The references are to sections. ferio, 123, VI. fero, 129. ferveo, 121, VI. figo, 122, I, I, b. findo, 122, I, 2, N. fingo, 122, I, I, a. fio, 131. flecto, 122, I, I, b. fleo, 121, I. floreo, 121, II, a, n. i. floresco, 122, IV, 2. fluo, 122, II. fodio, 122, III. foveo, 121, V. frango, 122, I, 3. fremo, 122, I, 5. frico, 120, II. frigeo, 121, II, a, N. 2. fruor, 122, V. fugio, 122, III. fulcio, 123, III. fulgeo, 121, III. . fulget, 138, I. fundo, 122, I, 3. fungor, 122, V. furo, 122, I, 7. gemo, 122, I, 5. gero, 122, I, I, a. gigno, 122, I, 5. gradior, 122, V. H. habeo, 121, II, a. haereo, 121, III. haurio, 123, III. horreo, 121, II, a, n. i. I. ignosco, 121, IV, 2. illicio, 122, III. imbuo, 122, II. immineo, 121, II, a, N. 2. impleo, 121, I, N. implies, 120, II. incipio, 122, III. incolo, 122, I, 5. incumbo, 122, I, 5. indulge©, 121, III, induo, 122, II. infero, 129. ingemisco, 122, IV, 2. insum, 125. intellego, 122, I, 3. interficio, 122, III. intersum, 125. invado, p. 87, footnote, invenio, 123, IV. irascor, 122, V. J. jaceo, 121, II, a. jacio, 122, III. jubeo, 121, III. jungo, 122, I, I, a. juvo, 120, III. L. labor, 122, V. lacesso, 122, I, 6. laedo, 122, I, I, b. lambo, 122, I, 7. largior, 123, VII. lateo, 121, II, a, n. lavo, 120, III. lego, 122, I, 3. libet, 138, II. liceor, 121, VII. licet, 138, II. loquor, 122, V. luceo, 121, III. ludo, 122, I, I, b. lugeo, 121, III. luo, 122, II. ^ M. maereo, 121, II, a, N. 2. malo, 130. maneo, 121, III. maturesco, 122, IV, 3. medeor, 121, VII. memini, 133. mereo, 121, II, a, meteor, 121, VII. mergo, 122, I, i, b. metior, 123, VII. metuo, 122, II. mico, 120, II. minuo, 122. II. OF THE MOST IMPORTANT VERBS. 261 misceo, 121, II, 6. miseret, 138, II. misereor, 121, VII. mitto, 122, I, I, b. molo, 122, I, 5. moneo, 121, II, a. mordeo, 121, IV. morior, 122, V. moveo, 121, V. N. nanciscor, 122, V. nascor, 122, V. necto, 122, I, I, b. neglego, 122, I, 3. ningit, 138, I. niteo, 121, II, a, n. i. nitor, 122, V. noceo, 121, II, a. nolo, 130. nosco, 122, IV, I. nubo, 122, I, I, a. obduresco, 122, IV, 3. oblino, 122, I, 6. obliviscor, 122, V.' obmutesco, 122, IV, 3. obruo, 122, II. obsolesco, 122, IV, i. obsum, 125. obtineo, 121, II, b. odi, 133. offero, 129. oleo, 121, II, a, N. I. operio, 123, II. oportet, 138, II. opperior, 123, VII. ordior, 123, VII. orior, 123, VII. paenitet, 138, II. palleo, 121, II, a, n. i, pando, 122, I, 4. parco, 122, I, 2. pareo, 121, II, a. pario, 122, III. pasco, 122, IV, I. pascor, 122, IV, i. The references are to sections. patefacio, 122, III. patefio, 122, III. pateo, 121, II, a, N. I. patior, 122, V. paveo, 121, V. pellicio, 122, III. pello, .122, I, 2. pendeo, 121, IV. pendo, 122, I, 2. perago, 122, I, 3. percello, 122, I, 2, n. percrebresco, 122, IV, 3. perdo, 122, I, 2. . perficio, 122, III. perfringo, 122, I, 3. • perfruor, 122, V. perlego, 122, I, 3. permulceo, 121, III. perpetior, 122, V. pervado, p. 87, footnote, peto, 122, I, 6. piget, 138, II. pingo, 122, I, I, a. placed, 121, II, a. plaudo, 122, I, I, b. pluit, 138, I. polleo, 121, II, a, N. 2. polliceor, 121, VII. polluo, 122, II. pono, 122, I, 6. posco, 122, IV, I. possldo, 122, I, 4. possum, 126. poto, 120, I. praebeo, 121, II, a. praestat, 138, III. praesum, 125. prandeo, 121, VI. prehendo, 122, I, 4. premo, 122, I, i, b. prodo, 122, I, 2. promo, 122, I, 3. prosum, 125. prosterno, 122, I, 6. pudet, 138, II. pungo, 122, I, 2. quaero, 122, I, 6. quatio, 122, III. queror, 122, V. quiesco, 122, IV, i. rado, 122, I, I, b. rapio, 122, III. reddo, 122, I, 2. redimo, 122, I, 3. refercio, 123, III. refero, 129. refert, 138, II. rego, 122, I, I, a. relinquo, 122, I, 3. reminiscor, 122, V. reor, 121, VII. reperio, 123, V. repo, 122, I, I, a. resists, 122, I, 2. respuo, 122, II. restinguo, p. 87, footnote, retineo, 121, II, b. rideo, 121, III. rodo, 122, I, I, b. rubeo, 121, II, a, n. i. rumpo, 122, I, 3. ruo, 122, II. saepio, 123, III, salio, 123, II. sancio, 123, III. sapio, 122, III. sarcio, 123, III. scindo, 122, I, 2, N. scisco, 122, IV, 2. scribo, 122, I, I, a. sculpo, 122, I, I, a. seco, 120, II. sedeo, 121, V. sentio, 123, III. sepelio, 123, I. sequor, 122, V. sero, 122, I, 6. serpo, 122, I, I, a. sileo, 121, II, a, N. sino, 122, I, 6. solvo, 122, I, 4. so no, 120, II. spargo, 122, I, I, b. sperno, 122, I, 6. splendeo, 121, II, a, N. i spondeo, 121, IV. status, 122, II. stems, 122, I, 6. -stinguS, 122, I, I, a. 262 INDEX TO THE MOST IMPORTANT VERBS. sto, 120, IV. . strepo, 122, I, 5. strideo, 121, VI. stringo, 122, I, i, a. struo, 122, II. studeo, 121, II, a, n. i. suadeo, 121, III. subigo, 122, I, 3. subsum, 125, sum, 100. sumo, 122, I, 3. suo, 122, II. supersum, 125. sustineo, 121, II, b. T. taceo, 121, II, a. taedet, 138, II. tango, 122, I, 2. tego, 122, I, I, a. temno, 122, I, i, a. tends, 122, I, 2. teneo, 121, II, b. tero, 122, I, 6. terreo, 121, II, a. The references are to sections texo, 122, I, 5. timeo, 121, II, a, n. i. tingo, 122, I, I, a. tollo, 122, I, 2, N. tonat, 138, I. tondeo, 121, IV. tono, 120, II. torpeo, 121, II, a, N. i. torqueo, 121, III. torreo, 121, 11, b. trado, 122, I, 2. traho, 122, I, I, a. tremo, 122, I, 5, tribuo, 122, II. trudo,' 122, I, I, b. tueor, 121, VII. tundo, 122, I, 2. U. ulciscor, 122, V. unguo, 122, I, I, a. urgco, 121, III. uro, 122, I, I, a. utor, 122, V. vado, 122, I, I, b. valeo, 121, II, a. veho, 122, I, I, a. vello, 122, I, 4. venio, 123, IV. vereor, 121, VII. vergo, 122, I, 7. verro, 122, I, 4. verto, 122, I, 4. vescor, 122, V. veto, 120, II. video, 121, V. vigeo, 121, II, a, N. I. vincio, 123, III. vinco, 122, I, 3. vireo, 121, II, a, n. i, viso, 122, I, 4. vivo, 122, I, I, a. volo, 130. volvo, 122, I, 4. vomo, 122, I, 5. voveo, 121, V. H GENERAL INDEX. The references are to Sections and paragraphs. Abbreviations. — Abl., ablative; ace, accusative; adj., adjective; adv., adverb, adver- bial, or adverbially; cf., compare; comp., comparison or comparative; conj., conjunction or conjugation; const., constr., construction; dat., dative; decl., declension; gen., genitive; ind., indicative; indir. disc, indirect discourse; loc, locative; N., note; nom., nominative i plu., plural; prep., preposition; pron., pronoun or pronunciation; sing., singular; subj., subject; subj v., subjunctive; voc, vocative; w., with. A. a, vowel, 2, I ; pronunciation, 3, i ; de- velopment of a, before a single conso- nant, 7, I, a; before two consonants, 7, I, i; ^ as ending of nom. sing, of ist decl., 20; in voc. sing, of Greek nouns in -es of ist decl., 22 ; in nom. sing, of Greek nouns in -e of ist decl., 22, 3; termination of nom. and ace. plu. of neuters, 23 ; 35; 48; termina- tion of nom. sing, of nouns of 3d decl., 28; gender of nouns in -a, of 3d decl., 43, 3 ; ending of ace. sing, of Greek nouns of 3d decl., 47, i ; regular quan- tity of final a, 363, i ; exceptions to quantity of final a, 363, i, a-c. a, pronunciation, 3, i ; arising by con- traction, 7, 2 ; as ending of stem in ist decl., 18; a-stems inflected, 20 ; in voc. sing, of Greek nouns of ist decl., 22; in voc. sing, of Greek nouns in -as of 3d decl., 47, 4; distinguishing vowel of ist conjugation, 98; ending of im- perative act. of ist conj., loi ; final a long by exception, 363, i, a-c. a, ab, abs, use, 142, i ; with town names, 229, 2. d to denote agency, 216. to denote separation, 214. place from which, 229. with town names, 229, 2. with abl. of gerund, 338, 4, b. -d-stems, 20; 98; loi. Abbreviations of proper names, 373. Ablative case, 17; 213 f. in -dbus, 21. 2, e. in -d in prons., 84, 3 ; 85, 3. formation of sing, of adjs. of 3d decl., 67, a; 70, 1-5. of ^-stems, 37 ; 38. genuine abl. uses, 214 f. absolute, 227. of agent, 216. ■ of accompaniment, 222. of accordance, 220, 3. of association, 222, A. of attendant circumstance, 221 ; 227, 2, e). of cause, 219. of comparison, 217, of degree of difiference, 223. • of fine or penalty, 208, 2, b. of manner, 220. of material, 224, 3. of means, 218. of penalty, 208, 2, b. of place where, 22S. of place whence, 239.^ of price, 225. of quality, 224. of separation, 224^ with compounds of dis- and se-, 214, 3. of source, 215. of specification, 226. of time at which, 230. of time during which, 231, i. 263 264 GENERAL INDEX. The references are to sections and paragraphs. Ablative case of time within which, 231. Ablative case, of way by which, 2ig29. with contineri, consistere, consldre, 218, 4. with special phrases, 218, 7. with jungere, miscere, mutare, etc., 222, A. with/ac^o, /fo, 218, 6. with prepositions, 142; 213 f. with verbs of filling, 218, 8. with verbs and adjs. of freeing, 214, I, a, and n. i. with adjs. of plenty, 218, 8. with Utor, fruor, fungor, potior, ves- cor, 218, I. with opus and usus, 218, 2. with nitor, innixus, smd fretus, 218, 3. abs, 142, I. absens, 125. Absolute, ablative, 227. time, of participles, 336, 4. use of verbs, 174, a. ^ Abstract nouns, 12, 2, b); plural of, 55, 4, c). -dbus, 21, 2, e). ac, 341, 2, b) ; = as, than, 341, i, c). Acatalectic verses, 366, '9. accedit ut, 297, 2. Accent, 6,; in gen. of nouns in -ius and -ium, 25, I and 2. accidit ut, 297, 2. accidit quod, 299, i, b. Accompaniment, abl. of, 222. Accordance, abl. of, 220, 3. Accusative case, 17; in -an and -en, of Greek nouns, 22; in -om in 2d decl., 24 ; in -on and -on in Greek nouns, 27 ; in -a in sing, of Greek nouns, 47, i ; in -ds in plu., 47, 3 ; in -im and -Is in i-stems, 37; 38; ace. sing. neut. as adv., 77, 3; 176, 3; 172 f. of duration of time, 181. of result produced, 173, B; 176. of extent of space, 181. of limit of motion, 182 f. of neut. prons. or adjs., 176, 2. of person or thing affected, 173, A; 175. in exclamations, 183. as subj. of inf., 184. with admoneo, commoneo, etc., 207. with adv. force, 176, 3. with compounds, 175, 2. with impersonal verbs, 175, 2, c. with intransitive verbs, 175, 2, a. with passive used as middle, 175, 2, d). with verbs of remembering and for- getting {meminl, obliviscor, reminis- cor), 206, I ; 2. with verbs expressing emotion, 175, 2, b. with verbs of tasting and smelling, 176, 5- with verbs of making, choosing, calling, regarding, etc., iTj. with verbs of asking, requesting, demanding, teaching, concealing, 178, with adjs. {propter, proximus), 141, 3- with adverbs (propius, proxime), 141, 3 ; clam, pridie, 144, 2. Genavam ad oppidum, 182, 2, a. cognate ace, 176, 4. Greek ace, 180. synecdochical ace, 180. two aces., direct obj. and pred. ace, 177; person affected and result pro- duced, 178; with compounds of trans, 179; with other compounds, 179, 2. with prepositions, 141 ; 179 f. retained in pass., 178, 2. Accusing, verbs of, constr., 208 f. accuso, constr., 178, i, d). deer, decl., 68; compared, 71, 3. Acquitting, verbs of, constr., 208 f . ac si, with subj v., 307, i. ad, 'toward,' 'in vicinity of,' 182, 3; ad with ace alternating with dat,, 358, 2. compounds of ad governing dat., 187, III; 188, 2, d. with gerund denoting purpKJse, 338, 3- -ades, patronymic ending, 148, 6, a. adg- = agg-, 9, 2. Adjectives, 62 f. ; 354; derivation of, 150 f. of ist and 2d decl., 63 ff. in -ius, gen. sing., 63, a. of 3d decl., 67 ff. ; in abl., 70, 5. comparison of adjs., 71 f.; in -er, 71, 3; in -His, 71, 4; comparative lacking, 73, 3; defective comparison, 73 ; not admitting comparison, 75 ; comparison by magis and maxime, 74. I GENERAL INDEX. The references are to sections and paragraphs. 265 Adjectives, numerals, 78 f . syntax, 233 ff. ; attributive and predicate adjs., 233, 2. agreement, 234, f . used substantively, 236 f . denoting part of an object, 241, i. with force of adverbs, 239. force of comp. and superl., 240, i. not followed by infinitive, 333. liot used with proper names, 354, 3. equivalent to a poss. gen., 354, 4. special Latin equivalents of Eng. adjs., 354, i- equiv. to rel. clause, 241, 2. as pred. ace, 177, 2. position of adj., 350, 4. pronominal adjs., 92. governing gen., 204. governing da t., 192. — — governing ace, 141, 3. construed with abl., 214, i, d; 217, i; 218,8; 223; 226,2; 227,1. with supine in -w, 340, .2. adl- = all-, 9, 2. admoneo, constr., 207. Admonishing, const, of verbs of, 207. adr- = arr-, 9, 2. ads- = ass-, 9, 2. ad sensum, constr., 235, B, 2, c; 254, 4- adulescens, spelling, 9, 2. adulter, decl., 23, 2. adultus, force, 114, 2. Adverbs, defined, 140; formation and comparison, 76 f. ; 140, 157. in -iter from adjs. in -us, 77, 4. in -tus and -tim, 77, 5. in and -0, 77, 2. numeral, 79. as preps., 144, 2. derivation of, 157. with gen., 201, 2 ; 3 ; and a. special meanings, 347. position, 350, 6. Adversative clauses, 309. conjunctions, 343. adversus, prep, with ace, 141. ae, how pronounced, 3, 2; phonetic changes, 7, 1, d. aedes, plu., 61. aequdlis, abl. sing, of, 70, 5, a; as subst., 238. aequor, decl., 34. aequum est = aequum sit, 271, i, h). aes, in plu., 55, 4, b; lacks gen. plu., 57, 7. aetds, decl., 40, i, e) ; id aetdtis, 185, 2. -aeus, suffix, 152, 3. aevom, decl., 24. Affected, ace. of person or thing, 175. Agency, dat. of, 189; abl., 216. Agent, abl., 216, with names of animals, 216, 2. ager, decl., 23. Agreement, nouns, 166; 168; 169,2; 3; 4- adjs. 234; in gender, 235, B; in number, 235, A; prons., 250; verbs, with one subj., 254, i ; with two or more subjs., .255, i. -at, case-ending, gen. sing., ist decl., poet., 21, 2, b). am, 135, N. <^Jo, 135 ; quantity of first syllable, 362, 5. -al, declension of nouns in, 39. alacer, decl., 68, i ; comp., 73, 4. aliqua, 91, 2. aliqui, 91 ; 91, 2. aliquis, 91; 252, 2; aliquis dlcat, dlxerit, 280, I. -dlis, suffix, 151, 2. aliter ac, 341, i, c. alius, 66 ; 92, i ; used correlatively, 253, I. alius ac, 'other than,' 341, i, c). Allia, gender of, 15, 3, n. allicio, conj., 109, 2,b). Alliteration, 375, 3. Alphabet, i. alter, decl., 66; 92, i ; used correlatively, ,253, I. Alternative questions, 162, 4; indirect, 300, 4. alteruter, decl., 92, 2. alvus, gender of, 26, i, b. amandus sum, conj., 115. amdturus sum, conj., 115. amb- (ambi-), 159, 3, N. ambo, 80, 2, a; usage, 355, 2. amo, conj., loi. amplius = amplius quam, 217, 3. amussis, -im, 38, i. an, 162, 4, and a) ; 300, 4; haud scio an, nescio an, 300, 5. Anacoluthon, 374, 6. Anapaest, 366, 2. 266 GENERAL INDEX. The references are to sections and paragraphs. Anaphora, 350, 11, •^). Anastrophe of prep., 141, 2 ; 142, 3 ; 144, 3- anceps (syllaba anceps), defined, 366, 10. Androgeos^ decl., 27. animal, decl., S9- Animals, as agents, 216, 2. animl, locative, 232, 3. annon, in double questions, 162, 4. Answers, 162, 5. ante, prep. w. ace, 141 ; as adv., 144, i ; dat. w. verbs compounded w. ante, 187, III; in expressions of time, 357, I," 37i> 5; flwfe diem, 371, 5; 6. Antecedent of rel., 251. attraction of, 251, 4. incorporated with rel., 251, 4. Antecedent omitted, 251, i. repeated with rel., 251, 3. Antepenult, 6, 2. antepono, with dat., 187, III, 2. antequam, with ind., 291 ; with subjv., 292. Anticipation, denoted by subjv., w. antequam and priusquam, 292 ; by subjv. with dum, donee, quoad, 293, III, 2; 374, 5. -anus, suffix, 151, 2; 152, i ; 3. Aorist tense, see Historical perfect. Apodosis, 301 fif. in conditional sent, of ist type, 302, 4 ; result clauses as apodoses, 322 ; quin- clauses as apodoses, 322; ind. ques- tions as apodoses, 322, b; potuerim in apodosis, 322, c ; apodosis in indir. disc, 319-321 ; in expressions of obligation, ability, etc., 304, 3, a ; with periphras- tic conjugations, 304, 3, b. Apposition, 169; agreement, 169, 2; partitive, 169, 5; with voc. in nom., 171, 2 ; genitive w. force of appositive, 202 ; id as appositive of clause, 247, 1, b; inf. as appositive, 326; 329; subst. clauses as appositives, 282, i, /; 294; 297, 3. Appositive of locative, 169, 4; with ace. of limit of motion, 182, 2, a ; with town names, in abl. of place whence, 229, 2. position of, 350, 2. aptus, w. dat., 192, 2. apud, prep. w. ace, 141. Archids, declension of, 22. -or, declension of nouns in, d). 39- arguo, constr., 178, -dris, suffix, 151, 2. -drium, suffix, 148, 3. -drius, suffix, 151, 2. armiger, decl., 23, 2. Arrangement of words, 348-350; ol clauses, 351. Arsis, defined, 366, 6. artus, dat. and abl. plu. of, 49, 3. arx, decl., 40. -as, ace. plu. in Greek nouns, 47, 3. -as, old gen. sing., ist decl., case-end- ing, 21, 2, a). ending of Greek nouns, nom. sing, in, 22. gender of nouns in -as, 43, 2 ; 45, i. voc. of Greek nouns in -as, antis,. 47, 4- dtis, abl. of patrials in, 70, 5, c). Asking, case const, with verbs of, 178,1^ c ; subst. clauses w., 295, i ; ind. ques- tions, 300, I. Aspirates, 2, 3, c. Assimilation of consonants, 8, 4 f . ; 9, 2, Association, abl. of, 222, A. Asyndeton, 341, 4, a) ; 346. at, 343, i,d). -dtim, suffix, 157, 2. Atlas, decl., 47, 4. atomus, gender of, 26, 1, c). atque, 341, 2, b); = as, 341, i, c). atqui, 343, I, e). Attendant circumstance, abl. of, 221 ; 227, 2, e). Attraction of demonstratives, 246, 5; of relatives, 250, 5; subjunctive by at- traction, 324; of adjectives, 327, 2, a; 328, 2. Attributive adjs., 233, 2. -dtus, its force as suffix, 151, 4. auddcter, formation and comparison, 76, 2. audeo, conj., 114, i. audio, conj., 107; with pres. partic.^ 337, 3- auldl, archaic gen., 21, 2, b. ausus, force as participle, 336, 5. aut, 342, I, a). autem, 343, i, c) ; 350, 8. Auxiliary omitted in infin., 116, 5; in finite forms, 166, 3. i GENERAL INDEX. The references are to sections and paragraphs. 267 auxUium, auxilia, 61. -dx, suffix, 150, 2. B. balneum, balneae, 60, 2, barbitos, decL, 27, Believing, verbs of, with dat., 187, II. belli, locative, 232, 2. bellum, decl., 23. bene, comparison, 77, i. Benefiting, verbs of, w. dat., 187, II. benevolus, comparison, 71, 5, a). -ber, declension of month names in, 68, i . -bilis, suffix, 150, 4. bonus, decl., 63; comparison, 72. bos, decl., 41. Brachylog>% 374, 2. Bucolic diaeresis, 368, 3, d. -bulum, suffix, 147, 4. -bundus, suffix, 150, i. bUris, decl., 38, i. C. C, for G. as abbreviation of Gains, 373. caedes, decl., 40. Caesura, 366, 8; in dactylic hexameter, 368, 3. calcar, decl., 39. Calendar, 371 ; 372. Calends, 371, 2, a), cam pester, decl., 68, i. canis, decl., 38, 2. capio, conj., no. carbasus, gender of, 26, i, 6). career, car ceres, 61. Cardinals, defined, 78, i ; list of, 79 ; decl., 80; with and without et, 81, i ; 3; expressed by subtraction, 81, 2; replaced by distributives in poetry, 81, 4, d. care, comparison, 76, 2. card, decl., 42. carrus, carrum, 60, i. Cases, 17 ; aUke in form, 19; 170 ff. Case-endings, 17, 3. castrum, castra, 61. Catalectic verses, 366, 9. causa, with gen., 198, i ; nulla causa est cur, with subjv., 295, 7. Causal clauses, 285; 286; clause of characteristic with accessory notion of cause, 283, 3. conjunctions, 345. Cause, abl. of, 219; 227, 2, d). cave, 363, 2, b). cave, cave ne in prohibitions, 376, 6. -ce, 6, 3 f. ; 87, footnote 2. cedo, ceUe, 137, 3. cedo, with dat., 187, II. celeber, decl., 68, i. celer, decl., 68, 2. celo, constr., 178, 1, e). cendtus, force, 114, 2. cetera, adverbial ace, 185, 2. ceteri, use, 253, 4. Characteristic, clauses of, 283 ; denoting cause or opposition ('although'), 283, 3; gen. of, 203, i; abl., 224. Charge, gen. of, 208, i ; 2. Chiasmus, 350, 11, c). Choosing, const, w. verbs of, 177, 1-3. circa, circUer, circum, preps, w. ace, 141. circum, compounds of, w. dat., 187, III. circumdo, const., 187, i, a. Circumstance, abl. of attendant, 221. cis, prep. w. ace, 141. citerior, comparison, 73, i. cito, 77, 2, a. citrd, prep. w. ace, 141. clvitds, decl., 40, x, e. clam, with ace, 144, 2. Clauses, coord, and subord., 164, 165. Clauses of characteristic, 283 ; purpose, 282; result, 284; causal, 285; tem- poral with postquam, ut, ubi, simul ac, etc., 287; with CMW, 288; substantive clauses, 294 f. ; condition, 301 f.; con- ditional comparison, 307 ; concessive, 308 ; adversative, 309 ; wish or proviso, 310; relative, 311 f. ; 283 f. cldvis, decl., 38, i. Clinging, construction of verbs of, 258, 3. clipeus, clipeum, 60, i. Close of sentences, cadences used, 350, 12. coepi, conj., 133; coeptus est, 133, i. Cognate ace, 176, 4. cognomen, 373. cogo, w. ace, 178, i, d) ; w. infin., 331, VI. Collective nouns, 12, 2, a); w. pla verb, 254, 4- colus, gender of, 26, i, b). com-, compounds of, w. dat., 187, III. 268 GENERAL INDEX. The references are to comedo, conj., 128, 2. comeies, decl., 22. comitia, as time expression, 230, i. Commanding, dat. w. verbs of, 187, II; subst. clause w. verbs of, 295, i ; commands expressed by jussive subjv., 27s; by imperative, 281. Common gender, 15, B, n. i. nouns, 12, I. syllables, 5, ii, 3. commonefacio, w. gen. and ace, 207. commoneo, w. gen. and ace, 207. communis, w. gen., 204, 2; with dat. 204, 2, a. commuto, w. abl., 222, A. Comparatives, decl., 69; w. abl., 217; w. quam, 217, 2, occasional meaning, 240. , two required in Latin, 240, 4. Comparison of adjs., 71 f.; of adverbs, 76; 77. participles as adjs., 71, 2. adjs. in -dicus, -ficus, -volus, 71, 5. defective, 73. abl. of, 217. Comparison, conditional, 307. Compendiary comparison, 374, 2, b) ; w. result clauses, 284, 4; w. clauses of characteristic, 283, 2, a. Completed action, tenses expressing, 262-4; 267, 3. Compounds, 158 f. ; spelling of, 9, 2, Compound sentences, 164. verbs governing ace, 175, 2, a; gov- erning dat., 187, III; 188, 2, d. Conative uses of pres., 259, 2 ; of imperf ., 260, 3 ; of pres. partic, 336, 2, a. Concessive clauses, 308; 'although' as accessory idea to clause of character- istic, 283, 3. • subjunctive, 278. Conclusion, see Apodosis. Concrete nouns, 12, 2, a). Condemning, verbs of, constr., 208, f . Conditional clauses of comparison, 307. sentences, ist type (nothing im- plied), 302; in indir. disc, 319; 2d type ('should '-'would'), 303 ; in indir. disc, 320; 3d type (contrary to fact), 304; in indir. disc, 321; abl. abs. equivalent to, 227, 2, b) ; introduced by relative pronouns, 312; general conditions, 302, 2 ; 3 ; indicative in con- sections and paragraphs. trary-to-fact apodoses, 304, 3 ; protasis omitted or implied, 305, i ; protasis contained in imperative, or jussive subjv., 305, 2 ; employment of nisi, si non, sin, si minus, 306; conditional relative sentences, 312, 2. confido, w. abl., 219, i, a. Conjugation, 1 1 ; 93 f. ; the four conju- gations, 98; periphrastic, 115; pecul- iarities of conj., 116. Conjunctions, 145, i ; 341 f . Conor, with inf., 295, 5, a. Consecutive clauses, see Result clauses. consistere, with abl., 218, 4. Consonant stems, nouns, 29 f. ; adjs., 70, I. partially adapted to ^-stems, 40. Consonants, 2, 2 f. ; pronunciation, 3, 3. , double, 2, 9. combinations of, in division into syllables, 4, 2 f. Consonant changes, 8 ; omission of finals, 8, 3 ; assimilation of, 8, 4 f . stems, 29; following analogy of «-stems, 40. conspicio, conj., 109, 2, b). constdre, w, abl., 218, 4. Construction ace to sense, 254, 4; 235, B, 2, c). consuetado est, with subjv. substantive clause, 297, 3. consuevi = pres., 262, A. consuldris, abl. sing, of, 70, 5, a. Contending, verbs of, with dat., 358, 3. contentus, w. abl., 219, i. contineri, with abl., 218, 4. contingit ut, 297, 2. Continued action, tenses for, 257, i, b. contra, prep. w. ace, 141 ; as adv., 144, i. Contraction, 7, 2. , length of vowel as result of, 5, Ay i,&). Contrary-to-fact conditions, 304. Convicting, verbs of, constr., 208 f. Coordinate clauses, 165. conjunctions, 341 f . copia, copiae, 61. Copulative conjunctions, 341. cor, lacks gen. plu., 57, 7. cornu, decl., 48. Correlative conjunctions, 341, 3 ; 342, 2. adverbs, 140. cottidie, spelling, 9, 2. Countries, gender of, Crime, gen. of, 208, -crum, suffix, 147, 4. -culum, suffix, 147, 4. -cuius (a, um), suffix, 148, i. cum, appended, 142, 4. cum (conj.), 'when,' 288-290; 'when- ever,' 288, 3. adversative, 309, 3. causal, 286, 2, explicative, 290. to denote a recurring action, 288, 3 ; 289, a. inversum, 288, 2. cum . . . turn, 290, 2. cum prlmum, 287, i. cum, spelling of, 9, i. cum (prep.) , with abl. of manner, 220; with abl. of accompaniment, 222; ap- pended to prons., 142, 4. -cundus, suffix, 150, i. cupio, conj., 109, 2, a) ; with subst. clause developed from optative, 296; w. inf., 331, IV, and a. cur, nulla causa est cur, w. subjv., 295, 7. curd, with gerundive const, as obj., 337, 8, b, 2. Customary action, 259, i ; 260, 2. D. D, changed to 5, 8, 2 ; d final omitted, 8, 3 ; assimilated, 8, 4. Dactyl, 366, 2. Dactylic hexameter, 368. pentameter, 369. dapis, defective, 57, 6. Daring, verbs of, with obj. inf., 328, i. Dates, 371, 2-5; as indeclinable nouns, 371, 6; in leap vear, 371, 7. Dative, 17; irregular, ist decl., 21, 2, c) ; 3d decl., 47, 5 ; 4th decl., 49, 2 ; 3 ; sth decl., 52, I and 3 ; 186 ff. in the gerundive const., 339, 7. of agency, 189. of direction and limit of motion, 193. of indir. obj., 187. of advantage or disadvantage, so called, 188, I. of local standpoint, 188, 2, a). of person judging, 188, 2, c). of possession, 190; 359, i. of purpose or tendency, 191 ; 339, 7. GENERAL INDEX. The references are to sections and paragraphs. 26, I, a. ; 2. 269 of reference, 188. of separation, 188, 2, d). • of the gerund, 338, 2. with adjs., 192 ; with proprius, com- munis, 204, 2 ; similis, 204, 3. with compound verbs, 187, III, with intrans. verbs, 187, II. with nomen est, 190, i. with impersonal pass, verbs, 187, 11, b. with trans, verbs, 187, I. — '■ — with verbs of mingUng, 358, 3. ethical dat., 188, 2, b). de, prep. w. abl., 142 ; with abl. instead of gen. of whole, 201, i, a; with verbs of reminding, 207, a; compounds of de governing dat., 188, 2, d; de vi, with verbs of accusing and convicting, 208, 3 ; with gerund and gerundive, 338, A,h. dea, dedbus, 21, 2, e). debebam, debut in apodosis, 304, 3, a). debeo, governing obj. inf., 328, i. debul, with pres. inf., 270, 2. decemvir, gen. plu. of, 25, 6, b). decerno, w. subst. clause developed from volitive, 295, 4. decet, w. ace, 175, 2, c). Declarative sentences, defined, 161, i ; in indir. disc, 314. Declension, 11; heteroclites, 59. , stems and gen. terminations, 18. , ist decl., 20-22; 2d decl., 23-27; 3d decl., 28-47; 4th decl., 48-50; 5th decl. 51-53; of Greek nouns, 22; 27; 47 ; of adjs., 62-69 ; of prons., 84-90. Decreeing, verbs of, w. subjv., 295, 4. dedecet, 175, 2, c). Defective verbs, 133 f. ; nouns, 54 f. ; 52, 4; 57; comparison, 73. Definite perfect, see Present perfect. Degree of difference, abl. of, 223. Degrees of comparison, 71 ff. delectat, w. inf. as subj., 327, i. delector, w. abl. of cause, 219. DeUberative subjv., 277 ; in indir. ques- tions, 300, 2; in indir. disc, 315, 3. Demanding, verbs of, w. two aces., 178, i; w. subst. clause, 295, i. Demonstrative pronouns, 87; 246; of ist, 2d, and 3d persons, 87 ; position of demonstratives, 350, 5, a. Denominative verbs, 156^ 270 GENERAL INDEX. The references are to sections and paragraphs. Dental mutes, 2, 4. stems, ss. Dependent clauses, 282 ff. Deponent verbs, 112; forms with passive meanings, 112, b) ; semi-deponents, 114. Depriving, verbs of, w. abl., 214, i, b. Derivatives, 147 f. -des, patronymics in, 148, 6. Description, imperf. as tense of, 260, I, a. Desideratives, 155, 3. Desire, adjs. of, w. gen., 204, i ; verbs of, w. subst. clauses, 296, i. deterior, 73, i. deus, decl., 25, 4, devertor, 114, 3. dexter, decl., 65, i. di-, 159, 3, N. Diaeresis, 366, 8; bucolic d., 368, 3, d). Diastole, 367, 2. die, 116, 3. dlcitur, dictum est, w. inf., 332, note. died, accent of compounds of, in impera- tive, 116, 3. -dicus, comparison of adjs. in, 71, 5. Dido, decl., 47, 8. dies, decl., 51; gender, 53. Difference, abl. of degree of, 223. difficile est = Eng. potential, 271, i, b). difficilis, comp., 71, 4. dignor, with abl., 226, 2. dignus, 226, 2 ; in rel. clauses of purpose, 282, 3. Dimeter, verses, 366, 11. Diminutives, 148, i. Diphthongs, 2, i ; 3, 2 ; diphthong stems, 41 ; diphthongs shortened, 362, 2. diphthongus, gender of, 26, i, c). Dipodies, 366, 11. Direct reflexives, 244, i. object, 172. quotation, 313. discourse, 313. questions, 162. dis-, in compounds, 159, 3, n. Disjunctive conjunctions, 342. dissimilis, comp., 71,4. Distributives, 63, 2; 78, i; 79; 81, 4- diu, compared, 77, i. dives, decl., 70, i; compared, 71, 6. dlxtl, 116, 4, c. do, conj., 127. doceo, with ace, 178, i, b) ; with inf., 331, VI. doml, locative, 232, 2. domo, 229, I, b). domos, 182, I, b. domum, 182, i, b) ; 'house,' in ace, 182, N. domus, decl., 49, 4; gender, 50. donee, with ind., 293; with subjv., 293, III, 2. dono, constr., 187, i, a. dos, gender, 44, 3. Double consonants, 2, 9. questions, 162, 4; indirect, 300, 4. Doubting, verbs of, w. quin, 298. Dubitative subjunctive, see Deliberative. dubito, dubium est, non dubito, non dubium est, with quln, 298 ; non dubito w. inf., 298, a. dUc, 116, 3. duco, accent of compounds of, in imper., 116, 3. duim, duint, 127, 2. -dum, 6, 3. dum, temporal with ind., 293; with subjv., 293, III, 2 ; in wishes and provisos, 310. dummodo, 310. duo, decl., 80, 2. Duration of time, 181, 2. Duty, expressed by gerundive, 189; 337, 8; verbs of duty in conclusion of cond. sentences contrary-to-fact, 304, 3, a; subst. clauses dependent on verbs of, 295, 6; inf. w. verbs of duty, 327, i; 328, I ; 330; 'it is the duty of,' 198, 3; 'I perform a duty,' 218, I. duumvir, gen. plu. of, 25, 6, b). dux, decl., 32. e, as vowel, 2, i ; as second member of diphthongs, 2, i ; sound of, 3, i ; change, to t, 7, i, a; for c, 7, i, c; in voc. sing, of 2d decl., 23 ; in abl. sing, of 3d decl., 31 ; dropped in nom. of neuters of 3d decl., 39 ; -e for -I in abl. of mare, 39; alternating w. I in abl. sing, of i-stems, 37, 38 ; for e in gen. sing, of 5th decl., 52, i ; in abl. sing, of adjs. of 3d decl., 70, i ; 3 ; in GENERAL INDEX. 271 The references are to sections and paragraphs. ben^ and male, 77, i ; distinguishing vowel of 3d conj., 98; before y, 362, 5 ; for -e in imperatives, 363, 2, b; in temere and saepe, 363, 2, c. e, pronunciation, 3, i ; by contraction, 7, 2; as ending of Greek nouns, 22; e-stems, 51 ; ending of dat. of 5th decl., 52, 3 ; distinguishing vowel of 2d conj., 98; -e in fame, 363, 2, a; in adverbs, 363, 2, c. ■€, ex, use, 142, 2 ; see ex. ecquis, 91, 6. edic, 116, 3. Editorial 'we,' 242, 3. ■edd, 128. e^/MC, 116, 3. ■efficio ut, 297, I. efficitur ut, 297, 2. Effort, subjv. w. verbs of, 295, 5. eged, w. abl., 214, i, c. ego, 84. egomet, 84, 2. -e?', diphthong, 2, i ; 3, 2. -ei, gen. of 5th decl., 52, i. ~eis, 148, 6, 6). ejus, as poss., 86, i ; quantity, 362, 5. Elegiac distich, 369, 2. Elision, 266, 7. Ellipsis, 374, I. -e//M^ {a, urn), 148, i. Emphasis, 349. Enclitics, accent of preceding syllable, 6,3. , -met, 84, 2 ; -pte, 86, 3 ; c«w as en- clitic, 142, 4. End of motion, see Limit. Endings, case endings, 17, 3; personal, of verb, 96 ; in formation of words, 147 f . enim, 345. -ensimus {-ensumus), 79, n. -ensis, 151, 2; 152, 3. Envy, verbs of, with dat., 187, II. eo, 132 ; cpds., 132, i. Epexegetical genitive, 202. Epistolary tenses, 265. epistida, spelhng, 9, 2. epitome, decl., 22. epulum, epulae, 60, 2. equdhus, 21, 2, e). equester, decl., 68, i. equos, decl., 24. ~er, decl., of nouns in, 23 ; adjs., 63 ; 64 ; 65; 68; adjs. in -er compared, 71, 3. erga, prep. w. ace, 141. ergo, 344, I, b). -emus, suffix, 154. -is, gender of nouns in, 43, i ; exception, 44, 5 ; in nom. plu. of Greek nouns of 3d decl., 47, 2. -es, ending of Greek nouns, nom. sing. in, 22. , gen. -is, decl. of nouns in, 40, i, a). esse, conjugation of, 100 ; compounds of, 125; 126; 6556 omitted, 116, 5. est qui, with subj., 283, 2. et, 341, I, a; in enumerations, 341, 4, c). et is, 247, 4. et . . . neque, 341, 3. Ethical dative, 188, 2, b). etiam, in answers, 162, 5. et non, 341, 2, c). etsl, 'although,' 309, 2; etsl, 'even if,' 309, 2, a. -etum, suffix, 148, 3. -eus, inflection of Greek nouns in, 47, 6 ; adj. suffix, 151, I. evenit ut, 297, 2. ex, 142, 2 ; with abl., instead of gen. of whole, 201, I, a; compounds of, with dat., 188, 2, d; with abl. of source, 215, I. Exchanging, verbs of, with abl. of asso- ciation, 222, A. Exclamation, ace. of, 183. Exclamatory sentences, 161, 3. Expectancy, clauses denoting, in subjv., 292, I ; 293, III, 2. exposed, constr., 178, i, a), exsisto, speUing, 9, 2. exspecto, spelhng, 9, 2. exteri, exterior, 73, 2. extremus, use, 241, i. exuo, w. abl., 214, i, b. /, pronunciation, 3, 3; nf, quantity of vowel before, 5, i, a. fac, 116, 3 ; with subjv., 295, 5. facile, 77, 3- facilis, comp., 71, 4. facio, 109, 2, a); pass, of, 131. . , in imper., 116, 3. falsus, comparison, 73, 3. fame, 59, 2, b). FamiHarity, adjs. of, w. gen., 204, i. 272 familids, 21, 2, a). fdri, 136. fas, indeclinable, 58, fauces, decl., 40, i, d). Favor, verbs signifying, with dat., 187, II. Fearing, verbs of, constr., 296, 2. febris, decl., 38, i. felix, 70. Feminine, see Gender. Feminine caesura, 368, 3, c. femur, decl., 42, 4. -fer, decl. of nouns in, 23, 2 ; adjs. 65, i. fero, and its compounds, 129. -ficus, comparison of adjs. in, 71, 5. fidet, 52, I. fido, 114, I ; with abl., 219, i, a. fidus, compared, 73, 3. fterem, fieri, 362, i, c; fieri potest ut, 298, 2. Fifth decl., 51 f. Figures of rhetoric, 375. of syntax, 374. fili, 25, 3. filia, filidbus, 21, 2, e). Filling, verbs of, w. abl., 218, 8. Final clauses, see Purpose clauses. Final consonant omitted, 8, 3. Final syllables, quantity, 363, 364. finis, fines, 61. Finite verb, 95, fiq, conj., 131. fid, with abl., 218, 6. First conj., loi ; principal parts of verbs of, 120; deponents of ist conj., 113. First decl., 20 f. ; pecuUarities, 21 ; Greek nouns of ist decl., 22. fit ut, 297, 2. fldgitd, constr., 178, i, a), fodid, conj., icJg, 2, o). Foot, in verse, 366, 2. 'For,' its Latin equivalents, 358, i. fore, page 57, footnote 3. fore ut, 270, 3 ; 297, 2. forem, fores, etc., page 57, footnote 2. foris, 228, I, c. Formation of words, 146 f . fors, forte, 57, 2, a. fortior, decl., 69. fortis, decl., 69. fortHna, fortunae, 61. Fourth conj., 107. Fourth decl., 48; dat. in -w, 49, 2; gen. in -i, 49, 1 ; dat. abl. plu. in -uhus, 49, 3. GENERAL INDEX. The references are to sections and paragraphs. fraude, abl. of manner, 220, 2. Free, abl. w. adjs. signifying, 214, i, d. Freeing, abl. w. verbs of, 214, i, a. frenum, plu. of, -60, 2. Frequentatives, 155, 2. fretus w. abl., 218, 3. Fricatives, 2, 7. Friendly, dat. w. adjs. signifying, 192, i. fructus, decl., 48. frUgi, compared, 72; 70, 6. frUgis, 57, 6. fruor, with abl., 218, i; in gerundive constr., 339, 4. fugid, conj., 109, 2, a), fui, fuisti, etc., for sum, es, etc., in com- pound tenses, p. 60, footnote; p. 61, footnote. Fullness, adjs. of, w. abl., 218, 8 ; w. gen., 204, I. fungor, w. abl., 218, i; in gerundive constr., 339, 4. fUr, decl., 40, i, d). fUrtd, abl. of manner, 220, 2. . Future tense, 261 ; w. imperative force, 261, 3. time in the subjv., 269. perfect, 264 ; with future meaning, 133, 2 ; inf., 270, 4. imperative, 281, i. infinitive, 270, i, c ; periphrastic fut. inf., 270, 3, and a, participle, 337, 4- futurum esse ut, with subjv., 270, 3. gauded, semi-deponent, 114, i. gemd, w. ace, 175, 2, b. Gender, 13-15; in ist decl., 20, 21; in 2d decl., 23 ; exceptions, 26 ; in 3d decl., 43 f. ; in 4th decl., 50; in sth decl., S2> ; determined by endings, 14 ; by signification, 15, .4 ; heterogeneous nouns, 60. gener, decl., 23, 2. General relatives, 312, i ; general truths, 259, I ; 262, B, I ; 'general' conditions, 302, 2; 3. Genitive, 17 ; in -i for -ii, 25, i and 2 ; of 4th decl., in -i, 49, i ; of 5th decl. in -i, 52, 2; of 5th decl. in -ei, 52, i ; in -e, 52, 3 ; of ist decl. in -di, 21, 2, b) ; of ist decl. in -ds, 21, 2, a) ; gen. plu. -um GENERAL INDEX. The references are to sections and paragraphs 2, d); 273 for -drum, 21, 2, d) ; -um for- drum, 25, 6 ; 63, 2 ; -MW for -ium, 70, 7 ; gen. plu. lacking, 57, 7 ; syntax of, 194 f . of characteristic, 203, i. of charge with judicial verbs, 208. of indefinite price, 203, 4. of indefinite value, 203, 3. of material, 197. of measure, 203, 2. of origin, 196. of possession, 198. of quaUty, 203. of the whole, 201. appositional, 202. objective, 200. of separation, 212, 3. subjective, 199. with adjs., 204; with participles, 204, I, a. with, causa, gratia, 198, i. with verbs, 205 f . ; of plenty and want, 212; with impers. verbs, 209. position of gen., 350, i. genus, decl., 36; id genus, 185, i. ,-ger, decl. of nouns in, 23, 2 ; adjs., 65, i. Gerund, 95, i; ist conj., loi ; 2d conj., 103; 3d conj., 105; 4th conj., 107; sj'ntax, 338; with object, 338, 5. Gerundive, 95, i; ist conj., 102; 2d conj., 104; 3d conj., 106; 4th: conj., 108; in periphrastic conj., lis; 337,8. Gerundive, const., 339, 1-6; in passive periphrastic conj., 337, 8 f. ; gen. de- noting purpose, 339, 6; with dat. of purpose, 191, 3; 339, f. gndrus, not compared, 75j 2. Gnomic present, 259, i; perfect, 262, i. gradior, conj., 109, 2, c. Grammatical gender, 15. grdtid, with gen., 198, i ; grdiia, grdtiae, 6i. Greek nouns, ist decl., 22 ; 2d decl., 27 ; exceptions in gender, 26, i, c) ; 3d decl., 47 ; Greek ace, 180; Greek nouns in verse, 365. grus, decl., 41, 2. gu = gv, 3, 3. Guttural mutes, 2, 4. stems, 32. H. h, pron., 3, 3; ph, ch, th, 2, 4; 2,, 3- habed, with perf. pass, partic, 337, 6. dat., 187, foot- 29s, 331, Hadria, gender, 21, i. Happening, verbs of, w. ind., 299, i, 2; w. subjv., 297, 2. Hard consonants, 2, 3, a), footnote i. Hardening, 367, 4. haud, use, 347, 2, a; haud scid an, 300, 5. have, 137, 5. Help, verbs signifying, w. n. Hendiadys, 374, 4. herl, locative, 232, 2. Heteroclites, 59. Heterogeneous nouns, 60. Hexameter, dactyUc, 368. Hiatus, 366, 7, a. hlc, 87 ; 246, I ; 246, 2 ; hlc, 364, note. hiems, 35, footnote. Hindering, verbs of, with subjv., 3- Historical tenses, 258 ; historical present, 259, 3 ; 268, 3 ; historical perfect, 262, B; historical infinitive, 335. honor, decl., 36. Hoping, verbs of, w. inf., Hortatory subjv., 274. hortus, decl., 23. hdscine, 87, footnote i. hostis, decl., 38. hujusce, 87, footnote i, huml, locative, 232, 2, humilis, comp., 71, 4. humus, gender of, 26, i, h). huncine, 87, footnote i. Hyperbaton, 350, 11, a). Hypermeter, 367, 6. Hysteron proteron, 374, 7. «, I, I ; in diphthongs, 2, i ; pron., 3, i ; from e, 7, I, a; from a, 7, i,b; dropped by syncope, 7,4; for u in some words, 9, I ; changes to e, 39 ; dropped, 39 ; final i short, 363, 3 ; becomes j, 367, 4- J-stems, 37 ; 39 ; not always ending in -is, 38, 3. -i, gen. and voc. of 2d decl. nouns in -ius and -ium in, 25, i and 2. gen. of 4th decl. nouns in -us, 49, i. gen. of sth decl. nouns, 52, 2. 274 i-stem, vfs, 41. i, in abl., 3d decl., 38, i ; 39 ; in adjs., 67, S,a; 70,5; participles, 70, 3 ; patrials, 70, s, c) ; nom. plu., of is, 87 ; as char- acteristic of 4th conj., 98. -ia, 149. Iambus, 366, 2. Iambic measures, 370. trimeter, 370. -idnus, suflBx, 152, i. -ias, sufl&x, 148, 6, h). -ibam, in imperf., 116, 4, h). -Ibo, in future, 116, 4, 6). Ictus, 366, 5. -icM5, suflSx, 151, 2; 152, 2. id aetdtis, 185, 2. ii genus, 185, i. «(/ gwotf, 247, I, 6. «(i temporis, 185, 2. Ideal 'you'; see Indefinite second per- son. idem, 87 ; 248. idem ac, 248, 2. Ides, 371, 2, c). -ides, suflfix, 148, 6, a). -ides, suffix, 148, 6, a). -ido, sujQ5x, 147, 3, c). idoneus, not compared, 74, 2; w. dat., 192, 2; w. ad and ace, 192, 2, and N. ; with rel. clause of purpose, 282, 3. 4dus, sufl&x, 150, 3. Idas, fem. by exception, 50. -ie, in voc. sing, of adjs. in -ius, 63, i. iens, pres. partic. from eo, 132. -im5, as ending of numeral adverbs, 97 and N. -ier, inf. ending, 116, 4, a. -ies, nouns in, 51. igitur, 344, I, c). ignis, decl., 38. -4i, in gen. sing, of i(J-stems, 25, 2. iis, in dat. and abl. plu. of is, 87. ■4le, suflSx, 148, 3. //iow, decl., 27. -ilis, sufl5x, 151, 2. -i/w, sufl&x, 150, 4. Illative conjunctions, 344. ille, 87; 'the following,' 246, 2; 'the former,' 246, i; 'the well-known,' 246, 3 ; position, 350, 5, b. illuc, 87, footnote 3. -illus (a, urn), diminutive sufl&x, 148, i. -im, in ace, 3d decl., 38, i. GENERAL INDEX. The references are to sections and paragraphs. -im, -is in subjv., 116, 4, d. impedimentum, impedimenta, 61. Imperative, 281 ; tenses in, 94, 3 ; 281, I ; future indie, with force of, 261, 3. as protasis of a conditional sent., 305, 2 ; as apodosis, 302, 4. sent, in indir. disc, 316. Imperfect tense, 260; co native, 260, 3; inceptive, 260, 3 ; with jaw, etc., 260, 4 ; epistolary imp., 265. Imperfect subjv. in conditional sent, referring to the past, 304, 2. Impersonal verbs, 138; gen. with, 209; dat. with, 187, II, b ; in passive, 256, 3 ; with substantive clauses developed from volitive, 295, 6 ; of result, 297, 2 ; with infin., 327, i ; 330. impetus, defective, 57, 4. ImpHed indir. disc, 323. imus, 'bottom of,' 241, i. in, prep., 143 ; verbs compounded w. in governing ace, 175, 2, a, 2; verbs compounded w. in governing dat., 187, lit in with abl. of place, 228; with abl. of time, 230, 2; 231. -ina, sufl5x, 148, 5. Inceptives, 155, i. Inchoatives, 155, i. Incomplete action, 257, i, b; 267, 3. Indeclinable adjs., 70, 6 ; 80, 6. nouns, 58; gender of, 15, 3. Indefinite price, 225, i ; 203, 4. Indefinite pronouns, 91; 252; in con- ditions, 302, 3. Indefinite second person, 280, 3 ; 356, 3 ; 302, 2. Indefinite value, 203, 3. Indicative, equivalent to Eng. subjv., 271. in apodosis of conditional sent, of 3d type, 304, 3, a) and b). indiged, constr., 214, i, N. 2. indignus, with abl., 226, 2; with rel. clause of purpose, 282, 3. Indirect discourse, defined, 313 f. ; mood in, 3i3ff. ; tenses in, 317-18; declara- tive sentences in, 314; interrog. sen- tences in, 315 ; imperative sentences in, 316 ; conditional sentences in, 319-22 ; verbs introducing, 331, i; verb of saying, etc., implied, 314, 2; ind. in subord. clauses of indir. disc, 314, 3; GENERAL INDEX. The references are to sections and paragraphs. 275 inf. for subjv. in indir. disc, 314, 4; subj. ace. omitted, 314, s; implied indir. disc, 323. questions, 300 ; particles introduc- ing, 300, I, a; deliberative subjv. in ; , indir. quest., 300, 2 ; indir. quest, w. , si, 300, 3 ; double indir. questions, 300, 4 ; * in indir. quest., 300, 6 ; in conditional sents. of 3d type, 322, b. reflexives, 244, 2. object, 187. . inferum, Inferior, 73, 2. infimus, 241, i. Infinitive, gender of, 15, A, s; in -ier, 116, 4, a; force of tenses in, 270; 326 fif. fut. perf. inf., 270, 4; periphrastic future, 270, 3. without subj. ace, 326-328; 314, 5- with subj. ace, 329-331- asobj., 328; 331. as subj., 327 ; 330. with adjs., ss3- denoting purpose, 326, N. in abl. abs., 227, 3. in exclamations, 334. historical inf., 335. infitids, constr., 182, 5. Inflection, 11. Inflections, 11 ff. Injrd, prep. w. ace, 141. ingens, comp., 73, 4. injuria, abl. of manner, 220, 2. injussu, defective, 57, i; the abl., 219, 2. inl- = ill-, 9, 2. innlxus, w. abl., 218, 3. inops, decl., 70, 2. inquam, conj., 134. Inseparable prepositions, 159, 3, n. insidiae, plu. only, 56, 3. Instar, 58. Instrumental uses of abl., 213 ; 218 ff. Intensive pron., 88. Intensives (verbs), 155, 2. inter, prep. w. ace, 141 ; compounded w. verbs, governing dat. 187, III; to express reciprocal relation, 245. interdico, const., 188, i, a. interest, constr., 210; 211. interior, comp., 73, i. Interjections, 145. Interlocked order, 350, 11, d. Interrogative pronouns, 90. sentences, 162; particles, 162, 2; omitted, 162, 2, d) ; in indir. disc, 315. intra, prep. w. ace, 141. Intransitive verbs, with cognate ace, 176, 4; in passive, 256, 3; 187, II, h; impersonal intransitives, 138, IV. -Inus, suffix, 151, 2; 152, i; 152, 3. -id, verbs of 3d conj., 109. -ior, ius, comparative ending, 71. ipse, 88; 249; as indir. reflexive, 249, 3. ipsius and ipsorum, with possessive pro- nouns, 243, 3. -ir, decl. of nouns in, 23. Irregular comparison, 72 ff.; nouns, 42; verbs, 124 f. is, 87; 247; as personal pron., 247, 2. -is, as patronymic ending, 148, 6, b) ; nouns in -is of 3d decl., 37 f . ; adjs. in -is, 69. -is, ace plu., 3d decl., 37 ; 40. , -itis, abl. of partials in, 70, 5, c). istaec, 87, footnote 2. iste, 87; 246, 4. istic, 6, 4. tstiic, 6, 4; 87, footnote 2. ita, in answers, 162, 5. itaque, 344, i, a). iter, 42, I. -ttta, 149. -ito, frequentatives in, 155, 2, a. -ium, gen. of nouns in, 25, 2 ; ending of gen. plu., 3d decl., 37 f.; 39; 40; 147, 3, 6); 148, 2. -ius, gen. and voe sing, of nouns in, 25, I and 2; of adjs., 63, a; 151,2; 152,2; 152, 3 ; -Ius for ius, 362, I, a), -ivus, suffix, 151, 2. J. J, I, 2. jacio, conj., 109, 2, a); compounds of, 9, 3 ; 362, 5. jam, etc., with present tense, 259, 4 ; with imperfect, 260, 4. jecur, decl., 42, 3. joco, abl. of manner, 220, 2. jocus, plu. of, 60, 2. Joining, verbs of, construction, 358, 3. jubed, constr., 295, i, a; 331, II. 276 GENERAL INDEX. The references are to judicor, w. inf., 332, c. jugerum, 59, i. Julian calendar, 371. jungo, w. abl., 222, A. Juppiter, decl., 41. jurdius, 114, 2. jure, abl. of manner, 220, 2. jus est, with substantive clause, 297, 3. jussu, 57, I ; the abl., 219, 2. Jussive subjv., 275 ; equiv. to a protasis, 305, 2. juvat, w. ace, 175, 2, c) ; with inf., 327, i, Juvendle, abl., 70, 5, 6. juvenis, a cons, stem, 38, 2 ; comparison, 73, 4- y^DO, with ace, 187, II, n. juxtd, prep. w. ace, 141. k, I, I. Knowing, verbs of, w. inf., 331, I. Knowledge, adjs. of, w. gen., 204, L. /, pron,, 3, 3. Labial mutes, 2, 4. stems, 31 ; gender of, 43, 3 ; 46, i. lacer, decl., 65, i. locus, decl., 49, 3. laedo, w. ace, 187, II, N, laeius, w. adverbial force, 239. lapis, decl., 33. largior, 113. Latin period, 351, 5'. Length of syllables, 5, B. Length of vowels, 5, A . -lenius, suffix, 151, 3. led, decl., 35. Liber, decl., 23, 2. liber, adj., decl., 65, i. libera, constr., 214, i, N. i. liber ta, liber tdbus, 21, 2, e). liberum, gen. plu., 25, 6, c). /ice^, with subjv., 295, 6 and 8; 308, a] with inf., 327, I ; 330. licet, adversative, 309, 4. Likeness, adjs. of, w. dat., 192, 1. Limit of motion, ace of., 182. Lingual mutes, 2, 4. linter, decl., 40. Liquids, 2, 5. stems, 34. sections and paragraphs. lis, decl., 40, 1, d). Litotes, 375, i. litter a, litter ae, 61, Locative, 17, i ; in -ae, 21, 2, c); in -I, 25> S; syntax, 232; apposition with, 169, 4; loe uses of abl., 213 ; 228 f. loco, locis, the abl., 228, i, 6, locus, plurals of, 60, 2. Long syllables, 5, 5, i. vowels, 5, A, I. longius = longius quam, 271, 3. longum est = Eng. potential, 217, i, b. lubet, lubidd, spelling, 9, i. ladis, the abl., 230, i. -lus, -la, -lum, diminutives in, 148, i. lax, 57, 7. « M. m, pron., 3, 3 ; changed to n before (f, c, 8, 5, c; w-stem, 35, footnote; w-final in poetry, 366, 10. maered, w. ace, 175, 2, b. magis, comparison, 77, i ; comparison with, 74. magni, gen. of value, 203, 3. magnopere, compared, 77, i. magnus, compared, 72. Making, verbs of, w. two accusatives, 177- male, comparison, 77, i. maledicens, comparison, 71, 5, a). mdlim, potential subjv., 280, 2, a. mdllem, potential subjv., 280, 4. mdld, 130; with inf., 331, IV, and a; with subjv., 296, I, a. malus, comparison, 72. mdne, indecUnable, 58. Manner, abl. of, 220. mare, decl., 39, 2; mart, 228, i, c). mas, decl., 40, 1, d). Masculine, see Gender. Masculine caesura, 368, 3, c. Material, abl. of, 224, 3. mdteries, mdteria, 59, 2, a). mdture, compared, 77, i. mdtUrus, compared, 71, 3. maxime, adjs. compared with, 74. maximi, as gen. of value, 203, 3. maxumus, 9, i. Means, abl. of, 218, abl. abs. denoting, 227, 2; denoted by partie, 337, 2, d. med, for mS, 84, 3. GENERAL INDEX. The references are to sections and paragraphs. 277 Mediae (consonants), 2, 3, b), footnote 2. medius, 'middle of,' 241, i. met, as objective gen., 242, 2. melior, comparison, 72. melius est = Eng. potential, 271, i, b). memini, 133; constr., 206, i, a; 2, a. memor, decl., 70, 2. -men, -mentum, suffixes, 147, 4. mensis, 38, 2, footnote i. mentem {in meniem venire), 206, 3. -we/, enclitic, 6, 3 ; 84, 2. Metrical close of sent., 350, 12. metud, w. subjv., 296, 2. wi, dat., 84, I. mi, voc. of meus, 86, 2. Middle voice, verbs in, 175, 2, d). miles, decl., 33. mllitiae, locative, 232, 2. wi//e, wf/za, decl., 80, 5. minime, comparison, 77, i ; in answers, 162, 5, b). minimus, comparison, 72. minor, comparison, 72. minoris, gen. of value, 203, 3 ; of pricq, 203, 4- minus, comparison, 77, i ; = minus quam, 217, 3; quo minus, 295, 3; si minus, 306, 2 and a. miror, conj., 113. mirus, comparison, 75, 2. miscere, with abl., 222, ^ ; with dat., 358, 3- misereor, with gen., 209, 2. miser esco, with gefi., 209, 2. miseret, constr., 209. Mixed stems, 40. modium, gen. plu., 25, 6, a). modo, in wishes and provisos, 310. moneo, 103; constr., 178, i, d). months, gender of names of, 15, i ; decl., 68, I ; abl., of month names, 70, 5, a) ; names, 371, i. Moods, 94, 2. in independent sentences, 271 f. in dependent clauses, 282 f. Mora, 366, I. morior, conj., 109, 2, c). mos, decl., 36; mores, 61. mos est, with subjv. clause, 297, 3. muliebre secus, constr., 185, i. Multiplication, distributives used to in- dicate, 81, 4, c. multum, 77, 3 ; compared, 77, i. multus, compared, 72 ; with another adj., 241, 3. mils decl., 40, i, d). mutdre, with abl., 222, A. Mutes, 2, 3. . * Mute stems, 30. N. n, pronunciation, s, s', w-stems, 35. n adulter inum, 2, 6. -nam, appended to quis, 90, 2, d. Names, Roman, 373. Naming, verbs of, w. two accusatives, 177, I. Nasals, 2, 6. Nasal stems, 35. ndtii, 57, I ; maximus ndtu, minimus ndtic, 73, 4, footnotes 4, 5; 226, i. Natural gender, 14. ndtus, constr., 215. ndvis, decl., 41, 4. nd, vowel short before, 5, 2, a. -ne, 6, 3 f. ; 162, 2, c) ; 300, i, b); -ne . . . an, 162, 4; in indir. double questions, 300, 4. ^ ne, in prohibitions, 276; with hortatory subjv., 274; with concessive, 278; with optative, 279; in purpose clauses, 282 ; in substantive clauses, 295 f ., 296 ; in provisos, 310. ne, ' lest,' 282, i ; 296, 2. ne non for ut after verbs of fearing, 296, 2, a. ne . . . quidem, 347, i ; 2. Nearness, adjs. of, w. dat., 192, i. nee, 341, I, d) ; nee usquam, 341, 2, d). necesse est, w. subjv., 295, 8. necne, in double questions, 162, 4. nefds, indeclinable, 58. Negatives, 347, 2 ; two negatives strength- ening the negati n, 347, 2. nemo, defective, 57, 3; use, 252, 6. nequam, indeclinable, 70, 6; compared, 72. neque, 341, i, d); neque in purpose clauses, 282, i, e. nequeo, conj., 137, i. ne quis, use, 91, 5. nequiter, compared, 77, i. nescio an, 300, 5. nescid quis, as indef . pron., 253, 6. Neuter, see Gender. 278 GENERAL INDEX. The references are to sections and paragraphs. neuter, decl., 66; use, 92, i. neve (neu), in purpose clauses, 282, i, d. nf, quantity of vowel before, 5, i, a. nihil, indeclinable, 58. nihil est cur, quin, 295, 7. ningit, 'it snows,' 138, i. nisi, 306, I and 4. nisi forte, 306, 5. nisi si, 306, 5. nisi vero, 306, 5. nltor, constr., 218, 3. nix, decl., ^o, i, d). No, in answers, 162, 5, h. -no, class of verbs, 117, 4. noli, with inf., in prohibitions, 276, h. nolim, potential subjv., 280, 2, a. nolletn, potential subjv., 280, 4. nolo, 130; with inf., 331, IV and a; 276, 2, a; with subjv., 296, i, a. nomen, decl., 35 ; nomen est, constr., 190, I ; nomen, as part of Roman name, 373. Nominative, 17 ; 170 ; used for voc, 171, i; nom. sing, lacking, 57, 6; pred. nom., 168. Nones, 371, 2, b). non, in answers, 162, 5, b); with poten. subjv., 280; with deliberative, 277. non dubito quin, with subjv., 298; non dubito, w. inf., 298, a ; b. non modo for non modo non, 343, 2, a. nonne, 162, 2, a) ; 300, i, b), N. non quia, with ind., 286, i, c ; with subjv., 286, I, b. non quin, with subjv., 286, i, b. non quod, with ind.,. 286, i, c ; with subjv., 286, I, b. nos = ego, 242, 3. nostrl, as objective gen., 242, 2. nostrum, as gen. of whole, 242, 2 ; as possessive gen., 242, 2, a. Nouns, 12 ff. ; 353; derivation of , 147 f. in -is not always t-stems, 38, i. of agency, force, 353, 4. used in plu. only, 56. used in sing, only, 55. used only in certain cases, 57. indeclinable, 58. with change of meaning in plural, 61. syntax, 166 f. predicate, agreement of, etc., 167 f . appositives, agreement of, etc., 169 f. Noun and adj. forms of the verb, 95, 2. novl, as pres., 262, A. no'vus, compared, 73, 3. ns, quantity of vowel before, 5, i, a. -ns, decl. of nouns in, 40, i, c). nt, quantity of vowel before, 5, 2, a. nuhes, decl., 40, i, a. nulla causa est cUr, quin, 295, 7. nullus, decl., 66; 57, 3; use, 92, i. num, 162, 2, b) ; 300, i, b). Number, 16; 94, 4. Numerals, 78 f . ; peculiarities in of, 81. numquis, decl., 91, 5. nuper, compared, 77, i. -nus, sufl&x, 151, 2. O. 6, vowel, 2, I ; as element in diphthong flj, 2, I ; pron., 3, i ; alternating w. u in certain classes of words, 9, i ; 2 ; 4 ; <5-stems, 23; 24; in cito, 77, 2, a; in duo, 80, 2; inegcJ, 34; 363, 4, «; in , modo, 363, 4, a; in compounds of pro-, 363, 4, c; in amo, led, etc., 363, 4, b. 0, pron., 3, I ; for au, 7, i, e; by contrac- tion, 7, 2 ; in abl. sing, of 2d decl., 23 ; in nom. sing, of 3d decl., 35 ; in Greek nouns, 47, 8; in adverbs, 77, 2 ; in am- bo, 80, 2, a; in personal endings, 96. ob, pr^. w. ace, 141 ; verbs compounded w. governing dat., 187, III. Obqying, verbs of, w. dat., 187, II. Object, direct, 172 f. ; two objects w. same verb, 177; 178; indirect, 187 f.; inf. as obj., 326; 328; 329; 331. Objective gen., 200. Obligation, verb in expression of, 304, 3, a ; see also Duty. Oblique cases, 71, 2. obllvlscor, constr., 206, i, b; 2. octodecim (for undevlginti), 81, 2. odi, 133. oe, 2, I ; pron., 3, 2. Old iorms, familids, 21, 2, a; aulai, 21, 2, b; servos, aevom, equos, etc., 24; med, ted, 84, 3 ; sed, 85, 3. olle, archaic for ille, 87. -olus (a, um), 148, i. -om, later -um in 2d decl., 23. -on, Greek nouns, 2d decl. in, 27. Onomatopoeia, 375, 4. opera, operae, 61. GENERAL INDEX. The references are to sections and paragraphs. 279 Operations of nature, impersonal verbs expressing, 138, I. opinio ne with comparatives, 217, 4. opis, 57, 6; opes, 61. oportet, 138, II; w. subjv., 295, 6; 8; w. inf., 327 ; 330. oportuit, with pres. inf. 'ought to have,' 270, 2 ; with perf . inf., 270, 2, a. oppidum (Genavam ad oppidum), 182, 2, a. Optative subjv., 272; 279; substantive clauses developed from, 296. optimdtes, decl., 40, 1, d). optimus, comp., 72. opto, w. subst. cl. developed from opta- tive, 296, I. optuntus, spelling, 9, i. opus est, w. abl., 218, 2; w. partic, 218, 2, c. -or, nouns in, 34 ; 36 ; -or for -os, 36 ; gender of nouns in, 43, i ; exceptions in gender, 44, 2 ; as sufl&x, 147, 2, Oratio Obliqua, 313 f. Order of words, 348 f . Ordinals, 78, i ; 79. orior, conjugation, 123, VII. oriundus, constr., 215, 2. oro, with ace, 178, i, a). Orpheus, decl. 47, 6. Orthography, peculiarities, 9, ortus, constr., 215. OS, decl., 57, 7. OS, decl., 42. -OS, later -us in 2d decl., 23. -OS, later -or in 3d decl., 36, i. -OS, Greek nouns, 2d decl. in, 27. -osus, form of suffix, 151, 3. ovis, decl., 38, i. Oxymoron, 375, 2. P. P, pron., 3,3; by assimilation, 8, 4 ; by partial assimilation, 8, 5. paenitet, 138, II ; with gen., 209. palam, as prep. w. abl., 144, 2. Palatal mutes, 2, 4. paluster, decl., 68, i. Parasitic vowels, 7, 3. pardtus, with infin., 333. Pardon, verbs signifying,' w. dat., 187, II. par id, 109, 2, a). pars, partes, 61. parte, abl. of place, 228, i, b. partem, adverbially used, 185, i. Participation, adjs. of, w. gen., 204, i. Participial stem, 97, III; formation, 1x9. Participles, in -dns and -ens, 70, 3 ; gen. plu. of in -um, 70, 7 ; pres. act. partic, 97, I, s; loi ; 103; 105; 107 ; no; 113; fut. act. partic, 97, III ; as one of the principal parts of the verb, p. 55, foot- note; 100; loi ; 103; 105; 107; no; 113; perf. pass, partic, 97, III; 102; 104; 106; 108; in; 113; gerundive, see Gerundive; fut. act., peculiar for- mation of, 119, 4; perf. pass., w. act. or neuter meaning, 114, 2; of deponents, 112, h; syntax, 336 ff. Participles, fut. act., 119, 4; denoting purpose, SSI, 4- perf. act., how supplied, 356, 2. perf. pass., 336, 3 ; as pres,, 336, 5. — — pres. partic, 336, 2 ; with conative force, 336, 2, a. perf. pass., with active meaning, 114, 2; pred. use of partic, 337, 2; participles equivalent to subordinate clauses, 337, 2 ; to coordinate clauses, 337, 5; w. opus est, 218, 2, c, with noun, equivalent to abstract noun, 337. 6; with habed, 337, 7. with video, audio, facio, etc., 337, 3. Particles, 139 f . ; 341 f . Partitive apposition, 169, 5. Partitive gen., so called, 201. Parts of speech, 10. parum, comparison, 77, i. parm, gen. of value, 203, 3. parvus, comparison, 72. Passive, verbs in, with middle meaning, 175, 2, J); 256; verbs governing dat. used in pass, only impersonally, 187, II, b; constr. of passive verbs of say- ing, etc., 332, and note; how supplied when missing, 356, i. patior, conj., 109, 2, c); 113; with inf., 331, III. Patrial adjs., 70, 5, c). Patronymics, 148, 6. paulum, formation, 77, 3. paulus, spelUng, 9, 2. pauper, decl., 70, i. pedester, decl., 68, i. pejor, quantity of first syllable, 362, 5. 28o GENERAL INDEX. The references are to sections and paragraphs. pelagus, gender of, 26, 2. Penalty, abl. of, 208, 2, b. pendtes, decl., 40, i, d). penes, prep. w. ace, 141. Pentameter, dactylic, 369. Penult, 6, 2. per, prep. w. ace, 141 ; with ace. of time and space, 181, 2. Perceiving, verbs of, w. inf., 331, I. Perfect active ptc, how supplied in Latin, 356, 2. Perfect pass, partic, force of w. depo- nent verbs, 112, b; dat. of agency sometimes used w., 189, 2; opus, 218, 2, c. Perfect stem, 97, II; formation, 118. in -dvt, -evi, -Ivl contracted, 116, I. historical perf., 262. with force of pres., 262 ; 133, 2 ; pres. perf. and hist. perf. distinguished, 237, I and 2 ; gnomic perf., 262, i ; perf. subjv. as historical tense, 268, 6 and 7, b; perf. inf. w. oporiuit, 270, 2 ; perf. prohibitive, 279, a ; perf. potential, 280, I and 2; perf. concessive, 278; sequence of tenses after perf. inf., 268, 2. Periodic structure, 351, 5. Periphrastic conj., 115; 269, 3; in con- ditional sentences of the 3d type, 304, 3, b) ; in indir. disc, 322 ; in passive, 337. 8, b, I. fut. inf., 270, 3. Persons, 95, 4; 2d sing, of indefinite subject, 356, 3. Personal pronouns, 84 ; 242 ; as subject, omission of, 166, 2 ; as objective geni- tives, 242, 2. endings, 96. persuaded, with dat., 187, II, a; with subjv., 295, I. Persuading, verbs of, w. dat., 187, II. ph, 2, 3, c; 2, 4; 3, 3. piget, with gen., 209. Pity, verbs of, w. gen., 209, i and 2. Place to which, 182; whence, 229; place where, 228. placitus, force, 114, 2. Pleasing, verbs of, w. dat., 187, II, a; w. ace, 187, II, a, N. plebes, heteroclite, 59, 2, d). plebi, gen., 52, 2. Plenty and Want, verbs of, constr., 212; cf. 218, 8. plenus, w. gen., 218, 8, a. Pleonasm, 374, 3, pier ague, 6, 5. pluU, 138, I. Pluperfect tense, formation, 100 ; syntax, 263 ; 265 ; 287, 2 ; 288, 3 ; with im- perfect meaning, 133, 2. Plural, 16; in 5th decl., 52, 4; of proper names, 55, 4, a) ; of abstract nouns, 5, 4, c); nouns used in, only, 56; with change of meaning, 61 ; styUstic use, 353, I ; 2. Pluralia tantum, 56; 81, 4, &). pluris, gen. of value, 203, 3; of price, 203, 4. plus, decl., 70; 70, 4; = plus quam, 217, 3- poema, decl., 47, 5. Polysyndeton, 341, 4, b). por-, inseparable prep., 159, 3, e. porticus, gender, 50. partus, decl., 49, 3. posed, constr., 178, i, a). Position of clauses, 351, 3. of words, 348; 350; 351. Possessive dat., 190; gen., 198; con- trasted with dat. of poss., 359, i. Possessive pronouns, 86 ; 243 ; = objec- tive gen., 243, 2; position of, 243, I, a. Possibility, verbs of, put in indie, in cond. sentences, 304, 3, a. possum, 126; with present infin., 'I might,' 271, I, a); in cond. sentences, 304, 3, a- post, prep. w. ace, 144, i ; in expressions of time, 357, I. Post-positive words, 343, i, c). postedquam, 287 ; separated, 287, 3 ; with imperf. ind., 287, 4; w. pluperf. ind., 287, 3; with subjv., 287, 5. posterus, posterior, comp., 73, 2. postremus, use, 241, 2. postrldie, with gen., 201, 3, a. postulo, constr.,^ 178, i, a. Potential subjv., 272; 280. potior, with gen., 212, 2; with abl., 218, I ; in gerundive constr., 339, 4. , adj., 73, I- potius, compared, 77, i. potul, poteram, in apodosis of conditional GENERAL INDEX. 281 The references are to sent, of 3d type, 304, 3, a) ; in indir. disc, 322, c. potui, with pres. inf. = 'could have,' 270, 2. potuerim, in dependent apodosis, 322, c. pdtus, force, 114, 2. prae, prep. w. abi., 142; verbs com- pounded with governing dat., 187, III ; short in praeaculus, etc., 362, 2. Praenomen, 373. praesens, 125. praesum, w. dat., 187, III. prdnsus, force, 114, 2. preci, -em, -e, 57, 5, a. Predicate, 163. gen., 198, 3; 203, 5- Predicate nouns, 167; 168; in ace, 177; predicate nouns or adjs. attracted to dat., 327, 2, a; to nom., 328, 2. adjectives, 232, 2; 177, 2. Prepositions, assimilation of, in com- pounds, 8, 4 ; 9, 2 ; with ace, 141 ; with abl., 142; as adverbs, 144; inseparable prepositions, 159, 3, n. ; position, 350, 7 ; prepositional phrases as attributive modifiers, 353, 5 ; anastrophe of, 144, 3 ; 141, 2 ; 142, 3 ; usage with abl. of Sep., 214 f. ; with abl. of source, 215- Present tense, 259; gnomic, 259, i ; co- native, 259, 2 ; historical, 259, 3 ; with jam pndem,jam diu, etc., 259, 4; with dum, 'while,' 293, 1; in Re praesentdlio, 318; pres. subjv., in -im, 127, 2; pres. partic, see Participle. stem, 97, 1; formation, 117. perf., 257, I and 2. Preventing, verbs of, w. subjv. clause, 295, 3- Price, indefinite, special words in gen., 203, 4; also 225, I. , abl. of, 225. pridie, with gen., 201, 3, a; with ace, 144, 2. Primary tenses, see Principal tenses. primus, 'first who,' 241, 2. prince ps, decl., 31. Principal parts, 99; list, p. 251. tenses, 258 f. prior, compared, 73, i. Prius, compared, 77, i. priusquam, with ind., 291 ; with subjv., 292; separated, 291. sections and paragraphs. Privation, verbs of, w. abl., 214, i, h and c. pro, prep. w. abl., 142. procul, as prep. w. abl., 144, 2. prohibeo, w. abl., 214, 2; w. subjv. clause, 295, 3. Prohibitions, method of expressing, 276. Prohibitive subjv., 276. Prolepsis, 374, 5. Pronominal adjs., 253. Pronouns, defined, 82 ; classes, 83 ; per- sonal, 84 ; reflexive, 85 ; possessive, 86 ; demonstrative, 87 ; intensive, 88 ; relative, 89; interrogative, 90; indefi- nite, 91 ; pronominal adjs., 92 ; per- sonal, omission of, as subject, 166, 2; syntax, 242 f. ; personal, 242 f. ; possess., 243 f . ; reflex., 244 f . ; recip- rocal, 245 f. ; demonstrative, 246 f . ; relative, 250 f. ; indef., 252 f. ; position, 350, 5; 355- Pronunciation, Roman, 3. Prope, compared, 77, i. Proper names, abbreviated, 373. nouns, 12, I. propter, compared, 73, i ; with ace, 141, 3- proprius, with dat., 204, 2, a ; with gen., 204, 2. propter, prep. w. ace, 141. Prosody, 360 f. prosper, decl., 65, i. prosum, conj., 125, N. Protasis, 301 ; denoting repeated action, 302, 3 ; without si, 305 ; of indef. 2d sing., 302, 2 ; see Conditions. Provisos, 310. proxime, -us, comp., 73, i ; 77, i ; with ace, 141, 3. prudens, decl., 70. -pie, 86, 3. pudei, with gen., 209; w. inf., 327, i. puer, decl., 23. pulcher, comp., 71, 3. pup pis, decl., 38, I. Purpose, dat. of purpose, 191 ; with dat. and gerundive, 191,3; w. ad and ace, 192, 2 ; subjv. of purp., 282, i ; w. quo, 282, I, a; w. utne, 282, i, b; with non in purpose clause, 282, i, c; neve (neu) in purpose clauses, 282, i, d; neque, 282, i, e; rel. clauses of pur- pose, 282, 2 ; w. dignus, indignus, ido- 282 GENERAL INDEX. The references are to sections and paragraphs. neus, 282, 3 ; independent of principal verb, 282, 4; inf., denoting purpose, 362, N. ; fut. partic, denoting purpose, 337, 4; gerund, w. ad, 338, 3; gerun- dive, 339, 2 ; supine, 340. Q. -qu-, pron., 3, 3 ; both letters consonants, 74, a. quaero, w. indir. questions, 300, i, h), n. quaeso, 137, 2. Quality, gen., 203; abl., 224. quam, in comparisons, 217, 2; with su- perl., 240, 3; anie . . . quam, post . . . quam, prius . . . quam, see antequam, postquam, priusquam; quam qui, 283, 2, a. gwaw 5j, 307, I. quam ut, with subjv., 284, 4. quamquam, with ind., 309, 2 ; with subjv., 309, 6; = 'and yet,' 309, 5. quamvis, with subjv., 309, i ; 6 ; denot- ing a fact, 309, 6. quando, 286, 3, 6. quantl, as gen. of price, 203, 4 ; of value, 203, 3- Quantity, 5. of syllables, 5, B; 363 f. of vowels, 5, ^ ; 362 ; in Greek words, 365. quasi, 307, i. quatio, conj., 109, 2, a). -g«€, accent of word preceding, 6, 3 ; 6, 5; 341, I, b); 2, a); 4, c). ?Meo, 137, I. Questions, word, sentence, 162 f.; rhetor- ical, 162, 3 ; double (alternative), 162, 4; indirect, 300; questions in indir. disc, 315. qui, rel., 89 ; interr., 90 ; indef ., 91 ; for quis in indir. questions, 90, 2, h ; with ne, si, nisi, num, 91, 5; in purpose clauses, 282, 2 ; abl., 90, 2, a. quia, in causal clauses, 286, i. qulcum, 89. qulcumque, decl., 91, 8. quldam, decl., 91 ; syntax, 252, 3. quidem, post-positive, 347, i. qullibet, decl., 91. quln, in result clauses, 284, 3 ; in sub- stantive clauses, 295, 3 ; 298 ; = qui non in clauses of characteristic, 283, 4 ; with ind., 281, 3; in indir. disc, 322 and a; nulla causa est quin, 295, 7. quinam, 90, 2, d. Quintllis (= Julius), 371. qulppe qui, in clauses of characteristic, 283, 3- Quirltes, decl., 40, i, d. quis, indef., 91 ; interr., 90 ; 90, 2, c ; 252, I ; nescio quis, 253, 6 ; with ne, si, nisi, num, 91, 5. quis est qui, 283, 2. •— -'' quis = quibus, 89. quisnam, inflection, 90, 2, d. qidspiam, inflection^ 91. quisquam, inflection, 91 ; usage, 252, 4- quisque, inflection, 91 ; usage, 252, 5. quisquis, inflection, 91, 8. qulvis, inflection, 91. quo, in purpose clauses, 282, i, a. quoad, with ind., 293 ; with subjv., 293, III, 2. quod, in causal clauses, 286, i ; in sub- stantive clauses, 299; 331, V, a; 'as regards the fact,' 299, 2. quod audierim, 283, 5; quod sciam, 283, 5. quod (si), adverbial ace, 185, 2. quom, early form of cum, 9, i . quo minus, after verbs of hindering, 295, 3- quoniam, in causal clauses, 286, i. quoque, post-positive, 347. -quus, decl. of nouns in, 24. R. r, pron., 3, 3 ; ior s between vowels ('Rhotacism'), 8, i. rapid, conj., 109, 2, a), rdstrum, plurals of, 60, 2. ratus, 'thinking,' 336, 5. Reciprocal pronouns, 85, 2 ; 245 ; cf . 253, 3- Reduplication in perf., 118, 4, a); in pres., 117, 7. Reference, dat. of, 188. refert, constr., 210; 211, 4. Reflexive pronouns, 85 ; 244 ; 249, 3. rego, conj., 105. Regular verbs, 101-113. rei, 362, I, b). reicio, quantity, 362, 5. GENERAL INDEX. The references are to sections and paragraphs. 283 Relative adverbs, in rel. clauses of purp., 282, 2. clauses, of purp., 282, 2 ; w. dignus, indignus, idoneus, 282, 3 ; of charac- teristic, 283 ; denoting cause or oppo- sition, 283, 3 ; restrictive, 283, 5 ; in- troduced by quln, 283, 4 ; 284, 3 ; conditional rel. clauses, 311; 312, i and 2; relative as subj. of inf., 314, 4; rel. clause standing first, 251, 4, a. pronouns, inflection, 89; use, 250 fif. ; = Eng. demonstrative, 251, 6; agreement, 250; not omitted as in Eng., 251, 5 ; fondness for subordinate clauses, 355. relinquitur ut, 297, 2. reliqul, use, 253, 5. reliquum est, with subjv., 295, 6. remex, decL, 32. Remembering, verbs of, cases used w., 206. Reminding, verbs of, const., 207, teminlscor, constr., 206, 2. Removing, verbs of, w. abl., 214, 2. reposed, constr., 178, i, a). Repraesentdtio, 318. requies, requiem, requietem, 59, 2, c). res, decl., 51. Resisting, verbs of, w. dat., 187, II. Restrictive clauses, 283, 5. Result, ace. of, 173, B; 176; clauses of, 284 ; 297 ; in dependent apodosis, 322, and a; sequence of tense in, 268, 6. reverter, semi-deponent, 114, 3. Rhetorical questions, 162, 3; 277, a; in indir. disc, 315, 2. Rhotacism, 8, i; 36, i. Rivers, gender of names of, 15, rogdtu, abl. of cause, 219, 2. rogo, constr., 178, i, c) ; 178, i Roman pronunciation, 3. Root, 17, 3, footnote i. -rs, decl. of nouns in, 40, 1, c). rure, abl., place from which, 229, i, h. rurl, abl., place in which, 228, i, c. rus, 57, 7 ; ace, limit of motion, 182, i, b. A, I. a). s, pron., 3, 3; vowels, 8, I 8. 2. changed to r between s, ss, from dt, tt, ts, -s, decl. of monosyllables in, preceded by one or more consonants, 40, i h). 5-stems, 36. sacer, decl., 65 ; comparison, 73, 3. saepe, compared, 77, i. SO'I, SI, T, sales, 61. salubris, decl., 68, 3. salutdris, comp., 73, 4. salve, salvete, 137, 4. Samnites, decl., 40, i, i). sdne, in answers, 162, 5. sapid, conj., 109, 2, a), satur, decl., 65, 2. Saying, verbs of, w. inf. of ind. disc, 331, I- scio, quod sciam, 283, 5. -5co-class of verbs, 117, 6; 155. scrlbere ad aliquem, 358, 2. se, use, 244. se-, compounds of, 159, 3, e,. Second conj., 103 ; decl., 23 ; peculiarities 25 ; second person indefinite, 280, 3 ; 356, 3; 302, 2. Secondary tenses, see Historical tenses. secundum, prep. w. ace, 141. securis, decl., 38, i. secus, compared, 77, i. secus (virile secus), 185, i ; 58. secutus, 'following,' 336, 5. sed, se, 85, 3. sed-, compounds of, 159, 3, e. sed, 343, I, a). sedile, decl., 39. sementis, decl., 38, i. Semi-deponent verbs, 114. Semivowels, 2, 8. senex, decl., 42 ; compared, 73, 4. Sentences, classification, 160 f.; simple and compound, 164; sentence-struc- ture, 351; sentence questions, 162, 2. sententid, abl. of accordance, 220, 3. Separation, dat. of, 188, 2, d) ; gen., 212, 3; abl., 214. Sequence of tenses, 267 ; 268. sequester, decl., 68, i. sequitur ut, 297, 2. sequor, conj., 113. Serving, verbs of, w, dat., 187, II. servos, decl., 24. sese, decl., 85. Sextllis ( = Augustus), 371. Sharing, adjs. of, w. gen., 204, i. Short syllables, 5, jB, 2; vowels, 5, .4, 2. 284 GENERAL INDEX. The references are to sections and paragraphs. Showing, verbs of, w. two aces., 177. si, with indir. questions, 300, 3 ; in pro- tasis, 301 ; omitted, 305. signifer, decl., 23, 2. silentio, abl. of manner, 220, 2. Silvester, decl., 68, 3. similis, with dat., 204, 3 ; with gen., 204, 3; comp., 71, 4. si minus, use, 306, 2. Simple sentences, 164. simul, as prep., w. abl., 144, 2. simul ac, w. ind., 287, i ; 2. si non, usage, 306, i and 2. sin, usage, 306, 3. sin minus, 306, 2, a. Singular, second person indefinite, 280, 3; 356, 3; 302, 2. sino, with inf., 331, III. sitis, decl., 38, i. Smelling, verbs of, constr., 176, 5. Soft consonants, 2, 3, &), footnote 2. -50, verbs in, 155, 2. .socer, decl., 23, 2. socium, gen. plu., 25, 6, c). sol, decl., 57, 7. 5o/go, semi-dep., 114, i. solitus, used as present partic, 336, 5. solus, 66; solus est qui with subjv., 283, 2. Sonant consonants, 2, 3, ft), footnote 2. Soracte, decl., 39, 2. Sounds, classification, 2. of the letters, 3. Source, abl., 215. Space, extent of, 181. Sparing, verbs of, w. dat., 187, II. Specification, abl. of, 226. spei, quantity, 362, i, b. Spelling, see Orthography. Spirants, 2, 7. Spondaic verses, 368, 2. Spondee, 368, i. sponte sua, abl. accordance, 220, 3. spontis, -e, defective, 57, 2, h. Statutes, fut. imperative used in, 281, i, h. Stem, 17, 3. , verb, 97; 117, Structure of sentences, see Sentences. Style, hints on, 352 f. su = sv, 3, 3. sub, prep, with ace. and abl., 143 ; com- pounds of, w. dat., 187, III. Subject, 163; nom., 166; ace, 184; sub- ject ace. of inf., 184; omitted, 314, 5; clauses as subject, 294 ; 295, 6 ; inf. as subj., 327; 330. Subjective gen., 199. Subjunctive, tenses in, 94, 3. in independent sentences, 272 ; by attraction, 324; tenses of, 266 f. ; method of expressing future time in, 269; volitive (hortatory, jussive, prohibitive, deUberative, concessive), 273 f. ; optative (wishes), 279; poten- tial, 280; in clauses of purpose, 282; of characteristic, 283; of result, 284; of cause, 286; temporal clauses with postguam, postedguam, 287, 5 ; tempo- ral clauses with cum, 288-290; with antequam and priusguam, 292; with dum, donee, guoad, 293, III, 2 ; sub- stantive clauses, 294 f. ; indir. ques- tions, 300; in apodosis of first type conditions, 302, 4 ; jussive subjunctive as protasis of condition, 305, 2 ; with velut, tamguam, etc., 307 ; with necesse est, oportet, etc., 295, 6 and 8; with licet, 309, 4 ; with guamvis, guamguam, etsi, cum, 'although,' 390 f. subldtus, p. 99, footnote. subm- = summ-, 9, 2. Subordinate clauses, 165. Substantive clauses, 294 f. ; developed from the voUtive, 295, 1-8 ; developed from the optative, 296 ; with non dubito, 298 ; indir. questions, 300 ; without ut, 295, 8 ; of result, 297 ; introduced by quod, 299. use of adjs., 236-238. subter, prep. w. ace., 143, i. Suffixes, 17, 3, footnote i; 147 f. sui, 85 ; as objective gen,, 244, 2 ; = pos- sessive gen., 244, 2. sum, conj., 100; omitted when auxiliary, 166, 3. summus, 'top of,' 241, i. sunt qui, with subjv., 283, 2. suopte, sudpte, 86, 3. supellex, decl., 42, 2. super, prep. w. ace., 143, i. Superlative degree; of adjs., 71. i ; 2; in -rimus, 91, 3; in -limus, 71, 4; irregular superl., 72; 73; lacking, 73, 4 ; formed w. maxime, 74 ; of adverbs, 76, 2 ; irregular, 77,1; force of, 240, 2. superus, compared, 73, 2. Supine, 340. supra, prep. w. ace, 141. -sura, suffix, 147, 3, a. Surd consonants, 2, 3, a), footnote i. sus, decl., 41. sustuli, p. 99, footnote. suus, decl., 86, i ; 244 ; suus quisque, 244 4, a. Syllaba anceps, 366, 10. Syllables, division, 4; quantity of, 5, B. Synapheia, 367, 6. Synaeresis, 367, i. Synchysis, 350, 11, d). Syncope, 7, 4 ; 367, 8. Synecdochical ace, 180. Synizesis, 367, i. Syntax, 160 f. Systole, 367, 3. GENERAL INDEX. The references are to sections and paragraphs. Tetrameter verses, 366, 285 t, pron., 3, 3 ; th, 8, 2; dropped, 2, 3 8,3 c; 3, 3; changes, taedet, 138, II ; w. gen., 209. Taking away, verbs of, w. dat., i38, 2, d. talentum, gen. plu., 25, 6, a). tamen, 343, i, /. tametsl, 309, 2. tamquam, tamquam si, w. subjv.. 307. tanton, 6, 4. -tas, 149; gen. -talis, decl. of nouns in. 40, I, e). Tasting, verbs of, constr., 176, 5. Teaching, verbs of, constr., 178, i, h. ted = te, 84, 3. Temporal clauses, w. postquam, ut, ubi, simul ac, 287; w. cum, 288; 289; w. antequam and priusquam, 291; 292; with dum, donee, quoad, 293. temporis {id temporis), 185, 21 Tendency, dat. of, 191. tener, decl., 64. Tenses, 94, 3; 257 ff. ; of inf., 270; of inf. in indir. disc, 317; of participles, 336; of subjv., 266 ; sequence of, 266- 268; in indir. disc, 317; 318. Tenues (consonants), 2, 3, a), footnote i. tenus, position, 142, 3. Terminations, 17, 3. terni, how used, 81, 4, b. -ternus, 154. terra marique, 228, i, c. terr ester, 68, 3. Thematic verbs, 101-113. vowels, 117, footnote. Thesis, 366, 6. Third conj., 105; 109 f. ; decl., 28 f. ; gender in, 43 f . Threatening, verbs of, 187, II. -tint, adverbs in, 157, 2. Time, at which, 230; during which, 181 ; 231, i; within which, 231. timed ne and ut, 296, 2. -tinus, suffix, 154. -tid, suffix, 147, 3. Tmesis, 367, 7. -to as suffix of verbs, 155, 2. -tor, use of nouns in, 353, 4. totus, 66; preposition absent w., in ex- pression of place relations, 228, i, b). Towns, gender of names of, 15, 2 ; names of, denoting limit of motion, 182, i, a; denoting place where, 228, i, a; place from which, 229, i, a; appositives of town names, 169, 4; 229, 2. trdditur, trdditum est, w. inf., 332, N. trans, prep. w. ace, 141 ; constr. of verbs compounded with, 179. Transitive verbs, 174. Trees, gender of names of, 15, 2. tres, decl., 80, 3. Tribrach, 370, 2. tribus, decl., 49, 3 ; gender, 50. Trimeter verses, 366, 11. trim, use, 81, 4, b). triumvir, gen. plu. of, 25, 6, b). -trlx, suffix, 147, I. Trochee, 366, 2. -Irum, suffix, 147, 4. Trusting, verbs of, w. dat., 187, II. tu, decl., 84. -tildd, suffix, 149. tui, as objective gen., 242, 2, -tura, suffix, 147, 3, a). tus, decl., 57, 7. -tus, suffix, 147, 3; 151, 4. tussis, decl., 38. tute, tutemet, tutimet, 84, 2. Two accusatives, 177; 178. Two datives, 191, 2. U. u, instead of i in some words, stead of o, 9, i ; 9, 4. 9, i; in- 286 GENERAL INDEX. The references are to sections and paragraphs. «, becomes v, 367, 4. ^-sterns, 48. ii-s terns, 41, -u, dat. sing., 4th decl., 49, 2, uber, decl., 70, i. uhi, with ind., 287, i ; 2 ; with gen., 201, 3- -ubus, dat., plu., 4th decl., 49, 3. «//«.y, decl., 66. ulterior, compared, 73, i. ultimus, use, 241, 2. M//m, prep. w. ace, 141. -ulus, diminutive ending, 150, 2 ; (a, «w), 148, I. -urrt, ist decl., gen. plu. in, 21, 2, d) ; 2d decl., 25, 6; for -ium, 70, 7. -undus, -undl, in gerund and gerundive, 116, 2. w««5, decl., 66 ; 92, i ; unus est qui, with siibjv., 283, 2. -«m, ending of desiderative verbs, 155, 3- -urus, ending of fut. act. partic, 10 1 ; 103 £F. ; -urus fuisse yi apodosis of conditional sentences contrary-to-fact, in indir. disc, 321, 2; -urus Juerim in indir. questions serving as apodoses, 322, b. -us, neuter nouns of 2d decl. in, 26, 2; nom. in 3d decl., in -us, 36; gender of nouns in -us of 3d dec!., 43, 3 ; excep- tions in gender, 46, 4. -us, nouns of 3d decl. in, 43, 2. usque ad, w. ace, 141, i. ilsus est, with abl., 218, 2. ut, temporal, 287, i ; 2 ; ut, utl, in pur- pose dauses, 282 ; in result clauses, 284 ; in substantive clauses, 295 f . ; substantive clauses without, 295, 8; with verbs of fearing, 296, 2. ut ne = ne, 282, i, b] 295, i, 4, 5. ut non instead oi ne, 282, i, c; in clauses of result, 284, 297. ut qui, introducing clauses of character- istic, 283, 3. ut si, w. subjv., 307, I. uter, decl., 66; 92, i. titer, decl., 40, i, d). utercumque, decl,, 92, 2. uterlibet, decl., 92, 2. uterque, decl., 92, 2 ; use, 355, 2. utervis, decl., 92, 2. iltUius est = Eng. potential, 271, i, b). utinam, with optative subjv., 279, i and 2. Utor, with abl., 218, i ; in gerundive constr., 339, 4. utpote qui, introducing clauses of char- acteristic, 283, 3. utrdque, 6, 5. utrum . . . an, 162, 4; 300, 4. V. V, I, I ; pron., 3, 3 ; developing from «, 367, 4- V, becomes u, 367, 5. valde, by syncope, for vaiide, 7, 4. m/e, 363, 2, b). Value, indefinite, in gen., 203, 3. vannus, gender of, 26, i, b). Variations in speUing, 9, vas, decl., 59, i. -"ve, 6, 3; 342, i,b). vel, 342, I, 6); with superl., 240, 3. velim, potential subjv., 280, 2, a. vellem, potential subjv., 280, 4. velut, velut si, w. subjv., 307, i. venter, decl., 40, 1, d). Verba sentiendi et dccldrandi, w. inf. of indir. disc, 331, I; passive use of these, 332. Verbal ad js.,' 1 50, 1-4. Verbs, 94 f. ; personal endings, 96; de- ponent, 1 1-2 ; archaic and poetic forms, 116, 4; irregular, 124; defective, 133; impersonal, 138; with substantive clauses of result, 297, 2 ; omission of, 166, 3; transitive, 174; used abso- lutely, 174, a; passives used as inid- dles, 175, 2, d); of smelUng and tasting, constr., 176, 5; not used in passive, 177, 3, a; intransitives im- personal in passive, 187, II, b; 256, 3 ; compounded with preps., constr., 187, III; of judicial action, constr., 208; derivation of, 155 f. ; inceptive or inchoative, 155, i ; frequentative or intensive, 155, 2; desiderative, 15 5,. 3; denominative, 156; agreement of, 254 f. Verb stems, 97; formation of, 117 f. vereor, conj., 113; with subst. clause in subjv., 296, 2. Vergilius, gen. of, 25, i. veritus, with present force, 336, 5. GENERAL INDEX. The references are to sections and paragraphs. 287 vero, 343, I, g) ; in answers, 162, 5. Verse, 366, 3. Verse-structure, 366 f. Versification, 361. versus, prep. w. ace, 141 ; follows its case, 141, 2. verum, 343, i, b). vescor, with abl., 218, i. vesper, decl., ^3, 2. vesperi, locative, 232, 2. vestri, as obj. gen., 242, 2. vestrum, as gen. of whole, 242, 2 ; as possessive gen., 242, 2, a. veto, with inf., 331, II. vetus, decl., 70; compared, 73, 3. vi, 220, 2. vicem, used adverbially, 185, i ; vicis, i^ce, 57, 5, b. victor, decl., 34. video, with pres. partic, 337, 3. vigil, decl., 34. violenter, formation, 77, 4, a. w>, decl., 23. , gen. plu. of nouns compounded with, 25, 6, b). virile secus, constr., 185, i. virus, gender of, 26, 2. vis, decl., 41. viscera, used in plu. only, 56, 3. Vocative case, 17; 19, i; of Greek proper names in -as, 47, 4; of adjs. in -ius, 63, I ; 171 ; in -i for -ie, 25, i ; position of, 350, 3. Voiced sounds, 2, 3, a. Voiced consonants, 2, 3, b). Voiceless consonants, 2, 3, a. Voices, 94; 256; middle voice, 256, i. Volitive subjunctive, 272 f. volnus, spelling, 9, i. void, 130; with inf., 331, IV and a; 270, 2, a; with subjv., 296, i, a. volt, spelling, 9, i. voltus, spelling, 8, i. voliicer, decl., 68, i. voluntdte, 220, 2. comparison of adjs. in, 71, -volus, 5- Vowels, 2, I ; sounds of the, 3, i ; quan- tity of, 5, A ; contraction of, 7, 2 ; para- sitic, 7, 3. Vowel changes, 7. vulgus, gender of, 26, 2. -vum, -vus, decl. of nouns in, 24. W. Want, verbs and adjs. of, w. abl., 214, i, c; d. Way by which, abl. of, 218, 9. We, editorial, 242, 3. Whole, gen. of, 201. Wills, use of fut. imperative in, 281, i,b. Winds, gender of names of, 15, i. Wish, clauses with dum, etc., expressing a, 310. Wishes, subjunctive in, 279; see Opta- tive subjunctive. Wishing, verbs of, with subst. clause, 296, I ; with obj. inf., 331, IV. Word-formation, 146 f. Word-order, 348 f . Word questions, 162, i. X. X, 2, g; = cs and gs, 32. -X, decl. of monosyllables in, preceded by one or more cons., 40, i, b); gender of nouns in -x of 3d decl., 43, 2 ; excepy- tions, 45, 4. Y. y. i> I- Yes, how expressed, 162, 5. 'You,' indefinite, 356, 3 ; 280, 3 ; 302, 2. Z. z, I, I ; 2, 9. Zeugma, 374, 2, a). RETURN TO the circulation desk of any University of California Library or to the NORTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY Bldg. 400, Richmond Field Station University of California Richmond, CA 94804-4698 ALL BOOKS MAY BE RECALLED AFTER 7 DAYS 2-month loans may be renewed by calling (510)642-6753 1-year loans may be recharged by bringing books to NRLF Renewals and recharges may be made 4 days prior to due date DUE AS STAMPED BELOW JAN 11 1993 ! DEC -2 1892llti;-J MAR 09 2006 PORAA NU. UUO, DtKNCLCT, v^MYH/zu ELEY re 36233 U.C.BtRKaEniB(lW«K ■«|3. I UNIVERSITY OF CAUFORNIA LIBRARY